This is a modern-English version of The Broncho Rider Boys with Funston at Vera Cruz: Or, Upholding the Honor of the Stars and Stripes, originally written by Fowler, Frank. It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling, and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.

Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.



Frontispiece “THIS ISN'T A PLACE FOR ME,” BILLIE SAID AS HE STAYED HIDDEN BEHIND A HUGE CACTUS.
The Broncho Rider Boys with Funston at Vera Cruz. Page 33.

The Broncho Rider Boys
With Funston at Vera Cruz

OR

Upholding the Honor of the Stars and Stripes

By FRANK FOWLER

AUTHOR OF

"The Broncho Rider Boys with the Texas Rangers," "The Broncho
Rider Boys at Keystone Ranch," "The Broncho Rider
Boys Down in Arizona," "The Broncho Rider Boys
Along the Border," "The Broncho Rider
Boys on the Wyoming Trail."

A. L. BURT COMPANY

NEW YORK.


Copyright, 1916

By A. L. Burt Co.

THE BRONCHO RIDER BOYS WITH FUNSTON AT VERA CRUZ


Table of Contents


THE BRONCHO RIDER BOYS WITH
FUNSTON AT VERA CRUZ.

CHAPTER I.

A DARING ADVENTURE.

"Let me look, Billie," and Donald reached out his hand for the field glass through which Broncho Billie was gazing down from the summit of Real del Monte upon the plain of Quesco, through which the Pachuca river winds its way. "Maybe I can make out who they are."

"Let me take a look, Billie," Donald said as he reached for the binoculars that Broncho Billie was using to look down from the peak of Real del Monte at the Quesco plain, where the Pachuca river flows. "Maybe I can figure out who they are."

Billie handed over the glass without a word and stood expectant, while Donald scrutinized closely a body of horsemen—twenty or more in number—which had halted beside the railroad that connects the little city of Pachuca with the City of Mexico.

Billie quietly passed the glass and waited, while Donald closely examined a group of horsemen—twenty or more—who had stopped next to the railroad linking the small city of Pachuca with Mexico City.

"They are not soldiers, that's certain," was Donald's comment after he had inspected the riders carefully for a couple of minutes.

"They're definitely not soldiers," Donald said after he had carefully watched the riders for a couple of minutes.

"That's what I thought," from Billie. "They look like a bunch of vaqueros to me; but what would a crowd of fifty cowpunchers be doing in a country where the only cattle are goats?"

"That's what I thought," said Billie. "They look like a bunch of vaqueros to me; but what would fifty cowhands be doing in a place where the only cattle are goats?"

"That's right!" laughed Donald, greatly amused[Pg 4] at Billie's odd expression, "but still that is what they appear to be. Perhaps they are expecting a drove of cattle up on the train."

"That's right!" laughed Donald, finding Billie's strange expression hilarious[Pg 4], "but still, that's what they look like. Maybe they're waiting for a herd of cattle to arrive on the train."

"More likely they are expecting a load of bullion going down to the City of Mexico," remarked the third of the party. "What do you think, Pedro?" turning to the fourth of the boys who composed the quartette.

"More likely they’re expecting a load of gold heading to Mexico City," said the third member of the group. "What do you think, Pedro?" he asked the fourth boy in the quartet.

"I am afraid you are right, Adrian," replied Pedro, with an accent which denoted that of the four he was the only one who was not of an English-speaking race.

"I’m afraid you’re right, Adrian," replied Pedro, his accent making it clear that out of the four of them, he was the only one who didn’t speak English as his first language.

"You don't think they would hold up a train in broad daylight, and that not more than five miles from town, do you?" queried Billie.

"You don't think they would stop a train in the middle of the day, just five miles from town, do you?" Billie asked.

"If they are what I suspect," declared Pedro, "I think they would hold it up at the station, if there were only a few more of them."

"If they are what I think they are," Pedro stated, "I believe they would stop it at the station if there were just a few more of them."

"And what do you think they are?"

"And what do you think they are?"

"I think they are Zapatistas."

"I think they're Zapatistas."

"What are they?" asked Donald.

"What are they?" Donald asked.

"Followers of the bandit leader, Emilio Zapata."

"Supporters of the bandit leader, Emilio Zapata."

"Which side does he belong to?" asked Adrian. "Huerta or Carranza?"

"Which side is he on?" Adrian asked. "Huerta or Carranza?"

"Neither. He is simply a bandit, and his followers prey upon any whom they find unprotected."

"Neither. He's just a bandit, and his followers take advantage of anyone they find unprotected."

"And do you really think they are going to hold up and rob the train from Pachuca?"

"And do you really think they're going to stop the train from Pachuca and rob it?"

"Sin duda!" meaning without doubt.

"Absolutely!"

"Then we must prevent them," declared Donald[Pg 5] emphatically.

"Then we have to stop them," declared Donald[Pg 5] emphatically.

"What business is it of ours?" asked Billie. "If one bunch of Mexicans wants to rob another bunch, especially if the second bunch are Huertistas, I don't know that it is for us to interfere. I'm not looking for trouble."

"What does it matter to us?" Billie asked. "If one group of Mexicans wants to rob another group, especially if the second group are Huertistas, I don't think it's our place to get involved. I'm not trying to stir up trouble."

"You're not afraid, are you? If——"

"You're not scared, are you? If——"

"Say, Don," interrupted Billie, "what's the use of always asking such foolish questions? If I remember rightly, the last time you asked me that question was up on the Rio Grande a year ago, about the time that I was swimming rivers and breaking into prisons with the Texas Rangers to get you and Ad out of trouble. Now why——"

"Hey, Don," Billie interrupted, "what's the point of always asking such silly questions? If I remember correctly, the last time you asked me that was up on the Rio Grande a year ago, around the time I was swimming through rivers and breaking into prisons with the Texas Rangers to get you and Ad out of trouble. Now why——"

Donald held up both hands.

Donald raised both hands.

"That's enough, Billie," he laughed. "I'll take it all back. Of course you're not afraid. But I insist we must prevent this hold-up."

"That's enough, Billie," he laughed. "I take it all back. Of course, you're not scared. But I insist we have to stop this hold-up."

"And again I ask, why?"

"And I ask again, why?"

"Because there may be women and children on the train and——"

"Because there could be women and children on the train and——"

"That's enough," exclaimed Billie. "You needn't go on with the rest. But what's the plan? We're a good ten miles from those chaps—unless we had an airship."

"That's enough," Billie said. "You don't need to keep going. But what's the plan? We're about ten miles from those guys—unless we had an airship."

"And then how far do you think it is?" queried Adrian.

"And how far do you think it is?" Adrian asked.

"Well," replied Billie slowly, as he squinted up one eye, "I should say they are about four miles [Pg 6] away as the crow flies. But we are not crows. By the Real road, it is at least ten miles."

"Well," Billie replied slowly, squinting one eye, "I'd say they’re about four miles [Pg 6] away as the crow flies. But we’re not crows. By the actual road, it's at least ten miles."

"There must be a short cut somewhere," insisted Donald.

"There has to be a shortcut somewhere," Donald insisted.

"There is," explained Pedro. "Just around the next turn in the road there is a goat path that leads down to the river. If you are not afraid of getting wet——"

"There is," Pedro explained. "Just around the next bend in the road, there's a goat path that goes down to the river. If you're not scared of getting wet——"

"There you go," laughed Billie. "Afraid of getting wet! Just let's settle it once for all that we are not afraid of anything that it is right for us to do."

"There you go," laughed Billie. "Afraid of getting wet! Let's just agree once and for all that we're not scared of anything that's right for us to do."

Pedro laughed good-naturedly.

Pedro laughed warmly.

"Well, then, since we are not afraid of getting wet, we can follow the river for about two miles by fording it several times, and emerge on the plain a mile this side of the clump of trees which hides those fellows from the highway."

"Alright, since we don’t mind getting wet, we can stick to the river for about two miles, crossing it several times, and end up on the plain a mile this side of the group of trees that blocks those guys from the road."

"And then what?" from Billie.

"What's next?" from Billie.

"That is as far as I've gone."

"That's as far as I've gone."

"Then you'll have to do better. Just as soon as we emerge from behind those trees, we'll be a fair target. Four against twenty is 'most too much on an open plain."

"Then you'll need to step it up. As soon as we come out from behind those trees, we'll be an easy target. Four against twenty is pretty much too much on an open plain."

For several minutes no one spoke. It was Adrian who broke the silence.

For several minutes, nobody said anything. It was Adrian who finally spoke up.

"I think I see a way, not only to save the train, but possibly to capture the bandits."

"I think I've found a way to not only save the train, but maybe even catch the bandits."

The boys looked up in surprise.

The boys looked up in shock.

"Do you notice how the railroad curves in toward [Pg 7] the hills just after it crosses the river bridge?" he continued, pointing out the place he meant.

"Do you see how the railroad bends in towards [Pg 7] the hills right after it crosses the river bridge?" he said, indicating the spot he was talking about.

"Sure, we see it," from Billie.

"Yeah, we see it," Billie said.

"Well, when we leave the river, instead of riding toward that bunch of trees, we'll ride the other way. That will bring us to the railroad track near the curve. Then we'll ride up the track. If we do not reach the station before the train leaves, we can flag it. There is sure to be at least half a dozen guards aboard. We will make ten. Most of the men aboard will have revolvers. The result will be that instead of the bandits taking the train by surprise, we will take them by surprise, and——"

"Alright, when we leave the river, instead of heading towards those trees, we'll go the other way. That will get us to the railroad track near the bend. Then we'll ride up the track. If we don't reach the station before the train leaves, we can signal it to stop. There will definitely be at least six guards on board. We'll make it ten. Most of the guys on the train will have guns. So, instead of the bandits catching the train off guard, we'll catch them by surprise, and——"

"And the army that takes the other by surprise wins," finished Billie, taking off his sombrero and bowing to Adrian in mock gravity. Then to Pedro, "Let the scout lead the way and the army will fall in behind, with the general at the head."

"And the army that catches the other off guard wins," concluded Billie, removing his sombrero and bowing to Adrian with exaggerated seriousness. Then to Pedro, "Let the scout take the lead, and the army will follow, with the general at the front."

A laugh followed Billie's words, and putting spurs to their horses, the four lads dashed down the mountain road upon their self-appointed mission, which was by no means the first daring adventure in which they had engaged; for the stories of the doings of the three American lads in the quartette have furnished interesting reading for thousands of American boys.

A laugh followed Billie's words, and urging their horses on, the four guys sped down the mountain road on their self-assigned mission, which definitely wasn't their first bold adventure; the stories of the three American boys in the group have provided fascinating reading for thousands of American boys.

It is because of their numerous adventures and their skill as horsemen that the trio has become known as the Broncho Rider Boys. Their names are Donald Mackay, Adrian Sherwood and William [Pg 8] Stonewall Jackson Winkle, better known as "Broncho Billie." This latter name was given him some two years before when he went to visit his cousin Donald at the latter's home on the Keystone Ranch in Wyoming. It was not given him because he was such an expert rider, but because he could fall from his broncho pony easier than any boy in that section. Rotund in appearance, he was as jolly as he was fat, and his chief failing was his appetite. No matter what the hour, no one ever mentioned eats that Billie was not hungry.

It’s because of their many adventures and their skills as riders that the trio has become known as the Broncho Rider Boys. Their names are Donald Mackay, Adrian Sherwood, and William [Pg 8] Stonewall Jackson Winkle, who is better known as "Broncho Billie." He got that name about two years ago when he visited his cousin Donald at his home on the Keystone Ranch in Wyoming. It wasn’t because he was an expert rider, but because he could fall off his broncho pony more easily than any other boy in that area. Round in shape, he was as cheerful as he was plump, and his main flaw was his big appetite. No matter what time it was, if anyone mentioned food, Billie was always hungry.

When he first came West he was supposed to be in poor health. It speedily developed that such was not the case. He was simply hungry. Months in the open air had enabled him to eat without fear and he was now about the most robust specimen of boy that any one ever saw.

When he first arrived in the West, people thought he was in bad health. It quickly became clear that wasn't true. He was just really hungry. Months spent outdoors had given him the freedom to eat without worry, and now he was one of the strongest boys anyone had ever seen.

Donald, the oldest of the trio, was one of those level-headed chaps who had a knack of doing the right thing at the right time. His judgment had been proven good in many a tight place and under many thrilling conditions. As a result, he was generally looked up to as a leader by the others, although it must be admitted that Adrian was also a lad of sense and plenty of nerve.

Donald, the oldest of the three, was one of those calm guys who had a talent for doing the right thing at the right moment. His judgment had been proven reliable in many tough situations and exciting scenarios. Because of this, he was usually respected as a leader by the others, although it must be acknowledged that Adrian was also a smart kid with a lot of courage.

Adrian was the owner of a large Wyoming ranch, and one of the books which has proved most interesting to American boys is known as The Broncho Rider Boys on the Wyoming Trail, a story of how [Pg 9] Adrian saved his property from being taken away from him by a dishonest uncle.

Adrian owned a big ranch in Wyoming, and one of the most fascinating books for American boys is called The Broncho Rider Boys on the Wyoming Trail, a story about how [Pg 9] Adrian saved his property from being stolen by a deceitful uncle.

About a year previous to the time this story opens, these three boys had been on a trip along the Rio Grande, when they fell in with Capt. June Peak and a company of Texas Rangers, who had been detailed to keep watch of the actions of a band of cattle smugglers. Sent across the river into Mexican territory on a secret mission, the Broncho Rider Boys had the good fortune to rescue Pedro Sanchez, the fourth member of the quartette, from the hands of a band of ruffians. Pedro turned out to be the son of Gen. Sanchez of the Mexican army, who was visiting an uncle in northern Mexico. After a series of thrilling adventures, which are told in full in The Broncho Rider Boys with the Texas Rangers, Donald, Adrian and Billie returned to their homes, promising to visit Pedro in the City of Mexico whenever the time was ripe.

About a year before this story begins, these three boys went on a trip along the Rio Grande, where they met Capt. June Peak and a group of Texas Rangers, who had been assigned to monitor a band of cattle smugglers. Sent across the river into Mexican territory on a secret mission, the Broncho Rider Boys were lucky enough to rescue Pedro Sanchez, the fourth member of their group, from a gang of thugs. It turned out that Pedro was the son of Gen. Sanchez of the Mexican army, who was visiting an uncle in northern Mexico. After a series of exciting adventures, which are detailed in The Broncho Rider Boys with the Texas Rangers, Donald, Adrian, and Billie returned home, promising to visit Pedro in Mexico City when the time was right.

During the time that the boys were scouting in Mexico they had learned to speak Spanish quite well, and this knowledge had been so improved during their visit with Pedro that they now spoke the language well, an accomplishment which proved of much value to them later on.

During the time the boys were exploring in Mexico, they had become quite good at speaking Spanish, and their skills improved even more during their visit with Pedro. By the end, they could speak the language well, which turned out to be very useful for them later.

About a month prior to the day upon which this story opens, the three Americans had met by appointment at New York City and had come to Vera Cruz by boat and thence to the City of Mexico, where they found everything in a greatly disturbed [Pg 10] condition because of the revolution which had been started some months previous by Gen. Carranza.

About a month before the story begins, the three Americans arranged to meet in New York City. They took a boat to Vera Cruz and then traveled to Mexico City, where they found everything in chaos due to the revolution that had begun a few months earlier, started by Gen. Carranza. [Pg 10]

It might be well right here to state briefly the history of the previous few months in Mexico, so that all may understand how it happened that none of the four boys had a very high opinion of Gen. Huerta, at that time dictator of Mexico.

It might be good to briefly explain the history of the last few months in Mexico, so that everyone can understand why none of the four boys thought very highly of Gen. Huerta, who was the dictator of Mexico at the time.

For nearly 35 years, up to 1911, Mexico had a peaceful existence under a republican form of government. During the last 32 years of that time Porfirio Diaz was president. Just prior to 1912 a revolution was begun against what had come to be called the Diaz government, and Diaz was compelled to flee from Mexico. The revolution was headed by Francisco Madero, who was then made president.

For almost 35 years, until 1911, Mexico enjoyed a peaceful existence under a republican government. For the last 32 of those years, Porfirio Diaz served as president. Right before 1912, a revolution started against what had come to be known as the Diaz government, forcing Diaz to flee from Mexico. The revolution was led by Francisco Madero, who then became president.

In February of 1913 a revolution was started against President Madero by Felix Diaz, nephew of Porfirio Diaz, and the City of Mexico was attacked. At that time Gen. Huerta was in command of Madero's forces in the City of Mexico. He proved a traitor to Madero, went over to Diaz, arrested Madero and confined him in prison. Two days later, April 22, 1913, President Madero was shot by order of Huerta, who then declared himself dictator. At the same time he asked that the other nations of the earth recognize him as the head of the Mexican government, a thing which the government of the United States refused to do.

In February 1913, Felix Diaz, nephew of Porfirio Diaz, launched a revolution against President Madero, and Mexico City was attacked. At that time, General Huerta was leading Madero's forces in Mexico City. He betrayed Madero, sided with Diaz, arrested Madero, and imprisoned him. Two days later, on April 22, 1913, President Madero was shot on Huerta's orders, who then declared himself dictator. He also requested that other nations recognize him as the head of the Mexican government, which the United States government refused to do.

March 26, 1913, another revolution was started, [Pg 11] this time against Gen. Huerta by Gen. Carranza, governor of the state of Chihuahua. This revolution had been in progress more than a year when this story opens.

March 26, 1913, another revolution began, [Pg 11] this time against Gen. Huerta, led by Gen. Carranza, the governor of the state of Chihuahua. This revolution had been underway for over a year when this story begins.

Pedro's father, Gen. Sanchez, had been a friend of President Madero. When Madero was shot, Gen. Sanchez fled to Pachuca where he had a large hacienda and also owned vast interests in the silver mines at Real del Monte, some six miles up the mountains. Later, however, he was promised protection by Gen. Huerta, who was anxious to have the friendship of such a prominent man, and returned to the City of Mexico. It was some time after this, about March 1, 1914—when matters had quieted down in the City of Mexico—that the three American boys went to visit Pedro.

Pedro's father, Gen. Sanchez, had been a friend of President Madero. After Madero was shot, Gen. Sanchez escaped to Pachuca, where he had a large estate and significant interests in the silver mines at Real del Monte, about six miles up the mountains. Later, he was promised protection by Gen. Huerta, who wanted to be friends with such a notable figure, and returned to Mexico City. It was a while after this, around March 1, 1914—when things had calmed down in Mexico City—that the three American boys went to visit Pedro.

A few days previous to the one on which we find the four boys headed for the railroad to foil the would-be train robbers, they had come to Pachuca, which is located some sixty miles from the City of Mexico, on horses furnished them by Gen. Sanchez, to see the mines and the beautiful mountains overlooking the plains of Quesco. Every day they took long rides in various directions, in spite of the unsettled condition of the country—a condition which compelled them always to go armed with their trusty Marlins and Colts—and that is how they happened to be on the Real road at such an opportune time.

A few days before the one where the four boys were headed to the railroad to stop the would-be train robbers, they had arrived in Pachuca, which is about sixty miles from Mexico City, on horses provided by Gen. Sanchez, to explore the mines and the stunning mountains overlooking the plains of Quesco. Every day, they took long rides in different directions, despite the unstable situation in the country—a situation that forced them to always carry their reliable Marlins and Colts—and that’s how they ended up at the railroad at such a convenient moment.

With these explanations, it is no wonder that [Pg 12] the boys were keen for the adventure upon which they were now embarked.

With these explanations, it is no wonder that [Pg 12] the boys were excited about the adventure they were now on.

A sharp ride of fifteen minutes brought them to the river and into it the horses plunged. At places it was only knee deep and at other places where they were obliged to cross it was necessary for the horses to swim; but this was only fun for the Broncho Rider Boys.

A quick ride of fifteen minutes took them to the river, and the horses jumped right in. In some spots, the water was only knee-deep, while in other areas where they had to cross, the horses had to swim; but this was just fun for the Broncho Rider Boys.

Half an hour after sighting the bandits, the boys halted on the railroad track, well secreted from their quarry by the curve before mentioned.

Half an hour after spotting the bandits, the boys stopped on the railroad track, well hidden from their target by the curve mentioned earlier.

"And none too soon," declared Donald as the sharp whistle of the engine was heard perhaps half a mile away.

"And none too soon," Donald said as the sharp whistle of the engine was heard from about half a mile away.

"How shall we flag her?" asked Pedro.

"How are we going to flag her?" Pedro asked.

"With that red bandana handkerchief on Billie's neck," replied Donald as he reached over and snatched the neckwear from its place.

"With that red bandana around Billie's neck," replied Donald as he reached over and grabbed the neckwear from its spot.

Springing from his horse, he ran up the track waving the red signal as he ran.

Springing from his horse, he dashed up the track, waving the red signal as he went.

A sharp blast from the whistle a couple of minutes later gave proof that the danger signal had been seen, and the grinding of the brakes told that the train was coming to a stop. Even before this was an accomplished fact the conductor swung himself from the front car and came running down the track to see what was the matter, while the guards covered the boys with their carbines.

A loud blast from the whistle a couple of minutes later confirmed that the danger signal had been spotted, and the screeching of the brakes indicated that the train was coming to a stop. Before this was fully realized, the conductor jumped from the front car and ran down the track to see what was going on, while the guards aimed their rifles at the boys.

"What do you mean by stopping the train?" he demanded angrily.

"What do you mean by stopping the train?" he shouted angrily.

Donald explained in as few words as possible.[Pg 13]

Donald explained in as few words as he could.[Pg 13]

The conductor signalled the guards to him and told them what Donald had said.

The conductor called the guards over to him and told them what Donald had said.

"What had we better do?" asked the conductor.

"What should we do?" asked the conductor.

"We had better go back to Pachuca for help," replied the guards.

"We should head back to Pachuca for help," replied the guards.

"And let the Zapatistas escape!" exclaimed Billie hotly. "What do you want to do that for?"

"And let the Zapatistas get away!" Billie shouted passionately. "Why would you want to do that?"

"We have only six guards," the conductor explained, "and——"

"We only have six guards," the conductor explained, "and——"

"And that, with us, makes ten," interrupted Billie.

"And that, with us, makes ten," Billie interrupted.

The conductor regarded the boy with surprise.

The conductor looked at the boy in surprise.

"Do you mean you will join us to help capture the bandits?"

"Are you saying you’ll join us to help catch the bandits?"

"What do you think we're here for?" asked Billie.

"What do you think we're here for?" Billie asked.

"Yes," chimed in Adrian. "What do you suppose we stopped the train for?"

"Yeah," added Adrian. "What do you think we stopped the train for?"

"But even ten are no match for twenty or more," declared the guard.

"But even ten can't compete with twenty or more," declared the guard.

"Of course they are," said Donald, "if the twenty are taken by surprise."

"Of course they are," Donald said, "if the twenty are caught off guard."

"Which they will not be if we don't act pretty quick," insisted Billie. "Come on! Let's go after them," and he climbed up onto the car.

"Which they won't be if we don't move fast," Billie insisted. "Come on! Let's go get them," and he jumped up onto the car.

"That's what I say," said Pedro, following Billie's example.

"That's what I think," said Pedro, following Billie's lead.

Without more words the others followed and the conductor gave the signal to go ahead.

Without saying anything more, the others followed, and the conductor signaled to proceed.

"How about the horses?" asked Donald, turning[Pg 14] to Pedro.

"How are the horses doing?" asked Donald, turning[Pg 14] to Pedro.

"They'll be all right; but if we capture the Zapatistas we'll have horses enough any way."

"They'll be fine; but if we capture the Zapatistas, we'll have plenty of horses either way."

"And if we don't," remarked Billie grimly, "there'll be some riderless horses any way."

"And if we don't," Billie said grimly, "there will be some horses without riders anyway."

"Let us hope that they will not be the ones we have left behind," said Donald gravely.

"Let’s hope they aren't the ones we’ve left behind," Donald said seriously.


CHAPTER II.

A STRANGE MIX-UP.

While the train was gathering headway the conductor and the guards rounded up all the men they could find on the train who were armed. There were more than a dozen, so that in point of numbers, the force on the train nearly equalled the Zapatistas. These were so stationed at the windows that they could give the would-be robbers a warm reception.

While the train was picking up speed, the conductor and the guards rounded up all the armed men they could find on board. There were over a dozen, so the number of people on the train was almost equal to the Zapatistas. They were positioned at the windows, ready to give the would-be robbers a warm welcome.

"We must use some strategy," declared Adrian, "or we will simply succeed in killing a few and scaring away the others. That will not be a very brilliant deed."

"We need to come up with a strategy," Adrian announced, "or we'll just end up taking down a few and scaring off the rest. That won't be a very impressive achievement."

"No," from Donald, "but it will save the bullion. What's your plan?"

"No," Donald said, "but it will save the gold. What's your plan?"

"Well, I was thinking it would be a good plan to separate the train."

"Well, I was thinking it would be a good idea to separate the train."

"How?"[Pg 15]

"How?"[Pg 15]

"You can see it is all down grade from here to where the bandits are waiting for us."

"You can see it’s all downhill from here to where the bandits are waiting for us."

"Yes."

Yes.

"As soon as we get to running a good speed, Billie and I will go into the express car with the three guards. You and Pedro stay here with the other guards and the passengers. As we near the bandits, uncouple the train, put on the brakes and stop the coaches. We will rush by with the engine and express car, firing as we go——"

"As soon as we pick up speed, Billie and I will head into the express car with the three guards. You and Pedro stay here with the other guards and the passengers. When we get close to the bandits, uncouple the train, apply the brakes, and stop the coaches. We'll zoom past with the engine and express car, shooting as we go——"

"Which will be all right," interrupted Billie, "if they don't ditch the engine."

"That'll be fine," Billie interrupted, "as long as they don't abandon the engine."

Adrian's face fell.

Adrian looked disappointed.

"I hadn't thought of that."

"I didn't think of that."

"Well, you'd better."

"Well, you better."

After a moment Adrian's face brightened.

After a moment, Adrian's face lit up.

"They might better ditch the engine and express car than the whole train," he declared.

"They might as well get rid of the engine and express car instead of the whole train," he said.

"Right you are," from Donald. "If you and Billie are game enough to try it, I say it is the proper thing. If they ditch the engine, we will be back a ways and can run down to your assistance. If they don't ditch you, we will have them between two fires."

"You're right," said Donald. "If you and Billie are willing to give it a shot, I think it's the right move. If they abandon the engine, we'll be a bit behind and can rush to help you. If they don’t abandon you, we’ll have them caught between two fires."

"Just what I thought," replied Adrian. "How about it, Billie?"

"Just what I was thinking," Adrian replied. "What do you think, Billie?"

"I'm game. My head may be a little thick, but I can see just as far through a two-inch plank as the next one."

"I'm in. My head might be a bit dense, but I can see just as well through a two-inch plank as anyone else."

"All right, then. Come on," and Adrian led the[Pg 16] way into the car ahead, while Donald and Pedro stood by to uncouple as soon as they passed the clump of trees before alluded to.

"Okay, let's go," and Adrian led the[Pg 16] way into the car in front, while Donald and Pedro waited to disconnect as soon as they passed the group of trees mentioned earlier.

Almost at the same instant several sharp blasts from the whistle gave the danger signal, and Donald threw over the coupling lever and put on the brake. The coaches slowed quickly down, but the engine and express car dashed in between the horsemen stationed on either side of the track.

Almost at the same moment, several loud blasts from the whistle sounded the danger signal, and Donald flipped the coupling lever and applied the brake. The coaches slowed down quickly, but the engine and express car raced through the space between the horsemen stationed on either side of the track.

Prepared for what they knew was coming, the engineer and fireman had thrown themselves down on the floor of the cab, while Adrian, Billie and the three guards poured a volley into the robbers as they passed and several horses lost their mounts.

Prepared for what they knew was coming, the engineer and fireman had thrown themselves down on the floor of the cab, while Adrian, Billie, and the three guards fired at the robbers as they passed, and several horses threw off their riders.

This fire was followed by a fusillade from the horsemen and a minute later the engine, striking an unspiked rail, rolled completely over into the ditch, wrenching itself clear from the express car, which, after bumping over the ties for several seconds, suddenly ceased its antics and glided smoothly along.

This fire was followed by a barrage from the horsemen, and a minute later, the engine, hitting an unspiked rail, tipped completely over into the ditch, pulling away from the express car, which, after bumping over the ties for several seconds, suddenly stopped its movements and glided smoothly along.

As by a miracle it had run completely over the space from which the rail had been loosed and landed upon the good track, down which it now sped.

As if by a miracle, it had traveled entirely across the section where the rail had come loose and landed on the proper track, down which it was now racing.

So unexpected was the change from ties to track that Adrian and Billie were unable for a few moments to understand what had happened. Then Billie rushed to the door and seized the hand brake.

So surprising was the switch from ties to track that Adrian and Billie couldn't comprehend what had just occurred for a few moments. Then Billie hurried to the door and grabbed the hand brake.

"Grab hold and help stop this car," he yelled to [Pg 17] Adrian, "or there is no knowing where we'll land."

"Hold on and help stop this car," he shouted to [Pg 17] Adrian, "or we have no idea where we'll end up."

Adrian hastened to obey, but the wrench that had been given the car when the engine broke loose had put the brake out of commission and the car sped on.

Adrian quickly got to work, but the wrench that had been used on the car when the engine malfunctioned had disabled the brake, and the car sped forward.

The three Mexican guards now appeared on the platform and gazed wildly up the track where they could see the fight going on between the bandits and their companions.

The three Mexican guards now showed up on the platform and looked anxiously up the track where they could see the battle happening between the bandits and their allies.

"What shall we do, Señor?" asked one of them.

"What should we do, Sir?" asked one of them.

"Search me," from Billie. "How long is this grade?"

"Search me," said Billie. "How long is this grade?"

"It is down hill all the way to Pitahaya."

"It’s all downhill from here to Pitahaya."

"How far is that?"

"How far is that?"

"Ten kilometers from Pachuca."

"10 kilometers from Pachuca."

"That must be about three miles farther," said Adrian.

"That’s probably about three miles further," said Adrian.

"Correct," from Billie, "but unless it's a mighty steep up-grade the other side of Pita-what's-its-name, we're going so fast we'll not stop till we've run away past it."

"Right," Billie said, "but unless it's a really steep uphill on the other side of Pita-what's-its-name, we're going so fast we won’t stop until we’ve sped right past it."

"Well, what of it? We can coast back, can't we?"

"Well, what about it? We can just cruise back, right?"

The car gave a lurch to one side that almost threw the boys off the platform.

The car lurched to one side, nearly tossing the boys off the platform.

"We're certainly going some," called Adrian. "Hang on!"

"We're definitely making progress," shouted Adrian. "Hold on!"

And hang on they did until they dashed past the little station of Pitahaya and after several minutes began to slow down.

And they held on until they sped past the little station of Pitahaya and, after a few minutes, started to slow down.

"This is a little better," Adrian finally remarked[Pg 18] as the car showed some sign of coming to a stop.

"This is a bit better," Adrian finally said[Pg 18] as the car began to slow down.

"Yes, indeed," from Billie. "I suppose we'll come to a dead stop soon. Do you think she'll start back on her own hook, or shall we have to start her?"

"Yes, for sure," Billie replied. "I guess we'll come to a complete stop soon. Do you think she'll head back on her own, or do we need to get her started?"

"We'll soon see," and see they did, for a couple of minutes later the car came to a stop.

"We'll soon see," and see they did, because a couple of minutes later the car came to a stop.

For some minutes the five occupants of the car waited to see if it would start back down the grade. When it did not they got off to decide what could be done.

For a few minutes, the five people in the car waited to see if it would roll back down the slope. When it didn't, they got out to figure out what to do next.

"It's a mighty steep hill," Billie ventured. "Looks as though the five of us ought to start it. Let's try."

"It's a really steep hill," Billie said. "Looks like the five of us should give it a go. Let's try."

The five put their shoulders against the car and pushed with all their might, but it refused to budge.

The five leaned against the car and pushed as hard as they could, but it wouldn't move.

"If we only had a crowbar," said Adrian, "we could start it in a jiffy. Suppose some of you look in the car. There might be one there."

"If we just had a crowbar," Adrian said, "we could get this started in no time. Why don't some of you check the car? There might be one in there."

The three Mexicans jumped to obey.

The three Mexicans immediately jumped to follow orders.

Directly they appeared in the doorway with a large claw-bar in their hands.

Directly, they appeared in the doorway with a large crowbar in their hands.

"Will this do?" asked one.

"Is this okay?" asked one.

"Sure! Throw it off," said Billie, "and I'll soon start the old caboose."

"Sure! Just toss it out," said Billie, "and I’ll get the old caboose going in no time."

Picking up the bar, Billie inserted the claw under one of the wheels while Adrian stood with his hand on the car rail ready to spring aboard.

Picking up the bar, Billie slipped the claw under one of the wheels while Adrian stood with his hand on the car rail, ready to jump on.

At the first attempt the claw slipped and nothing [Pg 19] happened, but at the second attempt the wheels yielded a little.

At the first try, the claw slipped and nothing [Pg 19] happened, but on the second try, the wheels moved slightly.

"This time she'll go," Billie called. "All aboard!"

"This time she’s going," Billie shouted. "Everyone get on!"

Adrian sprang onto the car as Billie bore down upon the bar and the wheels began to revolve.

Adrian jumped onto the car as Billie rushed toward the bar and the wheels started to turn.

"Never mind the bar," cried Adrian as he saw that Billie was raising the implement to throw it onto the platform. "Jump aboard!"

"Forget the bar," shouted Adrian as he noticed Billie lifting the tool to throw it onto the platform. "Get on!"

Billie started to obey, but the advice came too late. As he dropped the bar it struck one end of a tie, flopped over and hit him on the shin.

Billie began to listen, but the advice came too late. As he let go of the bar, it hit one end of a tie, flipped over, and hit him on the shin.

"Wow!" he yelled, grabbing his ankle with both hands.

"Wow!" he shouted, clutching his ankle with both hands.

"Never mind your leg," shouted Adrian. "Jump on or you'll be left."

"Forget about your leg," shouted Adrian. "Get on or you'll be left behind."

Billie tried to obey, but the car was now under headway and although he sprinted his best, he was soon left behind.

Billie tried to keep up, but the car was already moving, and even though he ran as fast as he could, he was quickly left behind.

Adrian started to jump off the car, but seeing his intention Billie called to him not to do it.

Adrian began to jump out of the car, but noticing what he was about to do, Billie shouted for him to stop.

"I'll get there some time," he called. "Just tell them I'm coming," and he stood in the middle of the track looking ruefully after the rapidly disappearing car.

"I'll get there soon," he called. "Just let them know I'm on my way," and he stood in the middle of the track, watching the car speed away with a sad expression.

After some moments he picked up the claw-bar and threw it spitefully into the ditch beside the track, as much as to say, "Lay there! You're the cause of all the trouble." Then he started slowly after the car.

After a few moments, he picked up the claw-bar and threw it angrily into the ditch beside the track, almost as if to say, "Stay there! You're the reason for all this trouble." Then he slowly started after the car.

In the meantime Adrian was flying as fast back [Pg 20] toward Pachuca as he had been flying away from it only a few minutes before. It could not have been more than ten minutes altogether since the wreck of the engine and Adrian figured that if the grade were steep enough the car might gain momentum enough to carry it back to the scene of the trouble; but he had little hope that it would.

In the meantime, Adrian was rushing back to Pachuca as quickly as he had been flying away from it just a few minutes earlier. It couldn’t have been more than ten minutes since the engine wreck, and Adrian thought that if the slope was steep enough, the car might pick up enough speed to get back to where the problem was, but he didn’t have much hope that it would.

When he shot through Pitahaya on his return trip, however, he saw that the car was going at a terrific rate of speed.

When he passed through Pitahaya on his way back, he noticed that the car was going really fast.

"What do you think?" he asked one of the Mexicans. "Do you think we'll get all the way back?"

"What do you think?" he asked one of the Mexicans. "Do you think we'll make it all the way back?"

"Cierto," was the reply. "When they first built this road they used to have mules haul the car to the top of this hill and then turn it loose and it would run almost to Pachuca. That was before it had any engines."

"Certainly," was the reply. "When they first built this road, they used to have mules pull the car to the top of this hill and then let it go, and it would coast almost to Pachuca. That was before it had any engines."

Adrian looked at the man and winked one eye very slowly.

Adrian glanced at the man and winked slowly with one eye.

"Señor, it is true," spoke up another. "I was a guard at the time."

"Sir, it’s true," another person interjected. "I was a guard at that time."

Adrian could scarcely believe the statement, but he afterward learned that the men spoke the truth.

Adrian could hardly believe what he heard, but later he found out that the men were telling the truth.

"Well, then," he said, "we had better look to our arms, for we may need them. There is no knowing how this affair has turned out."

"Alright then," he said, "we should check our weapons, because we might need them. There's no telling how this situation has ended up."

The advice was well taken, for as they drew near the scene of the wreck, they saw that they were badly needed. More than a dozen horsemen were in sight at some distance from the wreck and with [Pg 21] their long-range rifles were doing their best to pick off any one who showed his head.

The advice was appreciated, because as they got closer to the wreck, they realized their help was crucial. More than a dozen horsemen were visible some distance away from the wreck, and with their long-range rifles, they were doing everything they could to take out anyone who showed their face.

"Our party must be out of ammunition," suggested Adrian, "or they would give a better account of themselves."

"Our team must be out of ammo," suggested Adrian, "or they would be doing a better job of defending themselves."

"Our carbines would not carry that far," explained one of the guards.

"Our carbines can't shoot that far," explained one of the guards.

"Our Marlins will," replied Adrian, and as he spoke there were two simultaneous flashes from two of the car windows and two of the bandits fell, one shot from his horse and the other with his horse shot under him.

"Our Marlins will," replied Adrian, and as he spoke, there were two quick flashes from two of the car windows, and two of the bandits went down—one fell from his horse, and the other had his horse shot out from under him.

For a moment the other horsemen hesitated as to the course they should pursue and then, putting spurs to their horses, they dashed toward the train, just as the express car, having reached the end of the track, bumped onto the ties and came to a stop.

For a moment, the other riders hesitated about what to do next, and then, kicking their horses into action, they raced toward the train just as the express car, having reached the end of the track, slammed onto the ties and came to a stop.

"Now!" cried Adrian as the riders drew near, firing as they came, and four shots rang out.

"Now!" shouted Adrian as the riders approached, firing as they came, and four shots echoed.

The volley from so unexpected a quarter took the horsemen completely by surprise, and they pulled up with a jerk. The action proved their undoing, for as they stood thus for a moment, they gave those in the train the opportunity they desired and the volley that followed turned four more riderless horses upon the plain.

The unexpected gunfire took the horsemen completely by surprise, and they suddenly halted. This momentary pause led to their downfall, as it gave those in the convoy the chance they were waiting for, and the volley that followed sent four more horses galloping across the plain without riders.

It was more than flesh and blood could stand, and the seven or eight remaining horsemen turned and fled, followed by at least three whistling bullets from as many Marlins.

It was more than any human could handle, and the seven or eight remaining horsemen turned and ran, chased by at least three whistling bullets from just as many Marlins.

The fight was over and the bullion had been[Pg 22] saved, but what of Broncho Billie, who had been left at the top of the hill four miles away?

The fight was over and the gold had been[Pg 22] saved, but what about Broncho Billie, who had been left at the top of the hill four miles away?

That was the first question asked by Donald when he greeted Adrian two minutes later.

That was the first question Donald asked when he greeted Adrian two minutes later.

"Oh, he's all right," was the laughing reply. "He's just taking a little walk for his health."

"Oh, he's fine," was the laughing response. "He's just out for a little walk to stay healthy."

But when Billie failed to put in an appearance an hour later, the boys mounted their horses and started up the track to meet him, leading Billie's mount between them.

But when Billie didn't show up an hour later, the boys got on their horses and rode up the track to find him, bringing Billie's horse along with them.


CHAPTER III.

BILLIE LOSES HIS NERVE.

Broncho Billie was not a rapid walker. In fact, if there was any one thing in which Billie was not a success, it was walking. He could ride a horse all day, but when it came to depending upon his own legs as a means of locomotion, he was a dead failure.

Broncho Billie wasn’t a fast walker. In fact, if there was one thing Billie wasn't good at, it was walking. He could ride a horse all day, but when it came to using his own legs to get around, he completely failed.

Therefore he walked slowly along, counting the ties as he went.

Therefore he walked slowly along, counting the ties as he went.

"They certainly do lay 'em thick," he mused after some minutes. "Three hundred and one, three hundred and two, three hundred and three, three hundred and four, three hun——"

"They really do pile them on," he thought after a few minutes. "Three hundred and one, three hundred and two, three hundred and three, three hundred and four, three hun——"

He stopped short and looked behind him.

He suddenly stopped and looked back.

"I sure thought I heard some one," he muttered.[Pg 23] "It must have been a bird."

"I definitely thought I heard someone," he mumbled.[Pg 23] "It must have been a bird."

He turned and started forward.

He turned and moved ahead.

"Let's see, where was I? Oh, yes, three hundred and five, three hundred and six, three hundred and——"

"Let me think, where was I? Oh, right, three hundred and five, three hundred and six, three hundred and——"

Again he stopped, but did not turn around. Instead he stooped down as though to pick up a stone, which enabled him to look backward between his knees.

Again he stopped, but didn't turn around. Instead, he bent down as if to pick up a stone, which let him glance back between his knees.

He caught a movement in the grass at the edge of the right of way.

He noticed a movement in the grass at the edge of the path.

"I thought so," he muttered. "Now to find out who it is, and what he wants."

"I thought so," he said quietly. "Now I need to figure out who it is and what he wants."

He picked up a small stone and threw it at a tall cactus which grew near the track some distance ahead.

He picked up a small rock and tossed it at a tall cactus that was growing off the path a little ways ahead.

"Good shot," he said aloud as the stone hit the stalk. "I wonder if I could do it again."

"Nice shot," he said out loud as the stone struck the stalk. "I wonder if I can do it again."

He stooped down and picked up another stone, taking a good look backward from his stooping position. There was not a movement to indicate the presence of a living thing.

He bent down and picked up another stone, glancing back from his bent position. There wasn't a single movement to suggest the presence of any living thing.

"This is getting on my nerves," the boy mused as he picked up several small stones and again walked forward. "I don't mind being followed by a white man, but I'm a whole lot leary of these greasers. They're bad enough when they're friendly."

"This is getting on my nerves," the boy thought as he picked up a few small stones and kept walking. "I don’t mind being followed by a white guy, but I’m really wary of these greasers. They’re trouble even when they’re being nice."

Then aloud, as he threw a couple of stones: "I'll [Pg 24] never get anywhere if I don't make better time than this. I'll just sprint a few."

Then out loud, as he tossed a couple of stones: "I'll [Pg 24] never get anywhere if I don't move faster than this. I'll just sprint a bit."

Suiting the action to the word, he started on a run.

Suiting the action to the word, he took off running.

Almost immediately he was aware of a soft pat-pat in his rear. He had heard a similar sound in the wilds of Wyoming and he recognized it at once.

Almost immediately, he noticed a soft pat-pat behind him. He had heard a similar sound in the wilds of Wyoming, and he recognized it right away.

It was the footfall of a four-legged animal.

It was the sound of an animal walking on four legs.

"So!" he ejaculated. "I wonder what it is. If there were wolves down here I would say it was a wolf, but I don't believe there are." Then a minute later, "Well, whatever it is, I'm going to find out."

"So!" he exclaimed. "I wonder what that is. If there were wolves down here, I’d say it was a wolf, but I don't think there are." Then a minute later, "Well, whatever it is, I’m going to figure it out."

He whipped out his automatic and turned suddenly.

He pulled out his gun and turned quickly.

As before, not a single living thing was in sight, only in the grass a movement as before.

As before, there wasn’t a single living thing in sight, just the same movement in the grass.

Without a moment's aim, he fired a single shot at the spot. It was an act born of fear and Billie knew it, but for the life of him he could not have done otherwise, so nervous had he become.

Without thinking, he fired a single shot at the spot. It was an act of fear, and Billie knew it, but there was no way he could have done anything differently; he was too nervous.

The report was followed by a cry of pain and an instant later there came running directly toward him out of the tall grass a figure so weird that Billie stood as one paralysed.

The report was followed by a cry of pain, and a moment later, out of the tall grass, a figure came running directly toward him that was so strange it left Billie frozen in place.

The figure was that of a man not more than two feet high, with long arms and a head of diminutive size. While it stood upright at times, at others it came forward on all fours. To Billie it seemed a cross between a man and a monkey.

The figure was that of a man no taller than two feet, with long arms and a small head. While it sometimes stood upright, at other times it moved forward on all fours. To Billie, it looked like a mix between a man and a monkey.

Gathering his wits in an instant, Billie would have[Pg 25] fired again—in fact, raised his revolver to do so, when the strange creature fell to its knees and raised its hands in supplication.

Gathering his thoughts in a moment, Billie would have[Pg 25]shot again—in fact, he raised his revolver to do it, when the strange creature dropped to its knees and lifted its hands in surrender.

"By George!" exclaimed the lad as he stood with lowered weapon. "What kind of a thing is this? I wonder if it can talk?"

"Wow!" the kid exclaimed as he stood with his weapon lowered. "What is this thing? I wonder if it can talk?"

Then as he took a step toward it: "I'm not going to hurt you. Come here."

Then, as he took a step towards it, he said, "I'm not going to hurt you. Come here."

The creature arose to its feet and came slowly toward him. As it did so Billie noticed that blood was running from a wound in its scalp.

The creature got up and slowly walked toward him. As it did, Billie noticed blood dripping from a wound on its head.

"Poor thing," he said. "That must have been where the bullet hit him. It was a close shave."

"That poor guy," he said. "That must be where the bullet struck him. It was a close call."

"Can you talk?" he finally asked.

"Can you speak?" he finally asked.

The strange creature turned its head to one side and eyed him closely, but no sound came from its lips.

The strange creature tilted its head to one side and looked at him closely, but no sound came from its mouth.

"It must be an ape of some sort," mused the boy; "but how did it become so tame?"

"It must be some kind of ape," the boy thought; "but how did it get so tame?"

He slowly returned his automatic to its holster, thinking in the meantime how he could dress the creature's wound; but no sooner had his hand left his weapon than the ape sprang at him with the utmost fury. It landed on his shoulder, wound its legs about his neck, and with its long arms made a wild grab for the revolver.

He slowly put his gun back in its holster, while thinking about how he could treat the creature's injury; but as soon as his hand moved away from his weapon, the ape lunged at him with intense rage. It jumped onto his shoulder, wrapped its legs around his neck, and with its long arms, made a frantic reach for the revolver.

Then began a strange and terrible struggle for the possession of the weapon. Even as he fought the beast, Billie realized that in some manner the [Pg 26] ape had learned to fear firearms, but whether it had ever learned to use them he could not venture a guess. He felt certain if he could draw the weapon and point it at the ape, it would at once cringe in fear. What might happen if the ape should get possession of it, he could only imagine.

Then a strange and terrible struggle began for control of the weapon. Even as he battled the beast, Billie realized that somehow the [Pg 26] ape had learned to fear guns, but he couldn’t guess if it had ever figured out how to use one. He was sure that if he could pull out the weapon and point it at the ape, it would immediately cower in fear. He could only imagine what would happen if the ape got hold of it.

For a youth of eighteen, there were few whom Billie met that were his match physically, but this diminutive man-animal held him as in a vise. Billie exerted every ounce of his strength to free himself from the terrible hold, while the ape fought even more fiercely to retain its grip and to gain possession of the weapon.

For an eighteen-year-old, there were few people Billie met who matched him physically, but this small man-animal had him in a tight grip. Billie used every bit of his strength to break free from the terrifying hold, while the ape fought even harder to keep its hold and take possession of the weapon.

It was a weird and fearful struggle waged there in the stillness of the tropical woodland—a stillness broken only by the occasional wild scream of the ape, or the hoarse breathing of the boy as he fought to free himself from that horrible grasp.

It was a strange and terrifying fight happening in the quiet of the tropical forest—a quiet interrupted only by the occasional wild scream of an ape or the heavy breathing of the boy as he struggled to escape that awful grip.

The struggle must have lasted for two or three minutes—to Billie it seemed hours—when by a sudden wrench the lad managed to free his left arm sufficiently to get the beast by the throat. For an instant it loosed its hold on his right arm and that act decided the battle.

The struggle must have lasted for two or three minutes—though to Billie it felt like hours—when with a sudden twist, the boy managed to free his left arm enough to grab the beast by the throat. For a moment, it released its grip on his right arm, and that moment determined the outcome of the fight.

Finding his right arm free, Billie seized his revolver and without drawing it from the holster pulled the trigger.

Finding his right arm free, Billie grabbed his revolver and, without taking it out of the holster, pulled the trigger.

At the sound of the shot, the ape uttered a plaintive cry, relaxed its hold upon the lad and fell upon [Pg 27] its knees on the ground with its hands raised in supplication as previously.

At the sound of the shot, the ape let out a sorrowful cry, released its grip on the boy, and dropped to its knees on the ground with its hands raised in a plea, just like before.

"I ought to shoot you," declared the lad between his gasps for breath as he drew the weapon from its holster and pointed it at the animal, "but I won't. I'll take you with me and maybe I can sell you for enough to pay me for the scare you've given me. Now, march!"

"I should shoot you," the kid said between breaths as he pulled the gun from its holster and aimed it at the animal, "but I won't. I'll take you with me and maybe I can sell you for enough to cover the scare you've given me. Now, move!"

He pointed with his finger down the track, but the beast would not stir.

He pointed down the track, but the beast wouldn’t move.

"Don't you intend to do what I tell you?"

"Don't you plan to do what I'm telling you?"

The animal perked up his head and kept his eye upon the revolver.

The animal lifted its head and kept its eyes on the revolver.

"Well," exclaimed Billie as he drew a long breath, "this is the limit. I can't make you mind and I won't hurt you. I guess the only thing I can do is to go and leave you."

"Well," Billie said with a deep breath, "I've had enough. I can't get you to listen to me, and I don't want to hurt you. I guess the only thing I can do now is just leave."

Suiting the action to the word, Billie turned and started down the track, his revolver still in his hand.

Suiting the action to the word, Billie turned and started down the track, his revolver still in his hand.

He had not gone more than a dozen steps, before he heard the soft pat-pat behind him, and on looking back could see nothing but the waving grass to indicate the whereabouts of his erstwhile assailant.

He had taken only a few steps when he heard the soft pat-pat behind him, and when he looked back, he could see nothing but the swaying grass to show where his former attacker had gone.

"So I am to be followed, am I? Well, all right." Then, as an afterthought: "I wonder how I can catch him when I want him. I wonder if this will do," and he raised his weapon and pointed it toward the moving grass.

"So I’m supposed to be followed, huh? Fine by me." Then, as an afterthought: "I wonder how I can catch him when I need to. I wonder if this will work," and he raised his weapon and pointed it at the swaying grass.

With the same plaintive cry which Billie had come [Pg 28] to recognize as one of fear, the animal ran toward him and sank to his knees.

With the same sad cry that Billie had come [Pg 28] to recognize as a sign of fear, the animal ran toward him and dropped to its knees.

Billie smiled.

Billie smiled.

"It's all right, old chap. As long as I know how to handle you, why you can follow me right back to the train."

"It's okay, buddy. As long as I know how to deal with you, you can just follow me back to the train."

Again he started down the track at a brisk walk, it having just occurred to him that there might be something doing at the other end of his journey.

Again he started down the path at a quick pace, realizing that there might be something happening at the other end of his journey.

Twenty minutes later he reached the station at Pitahaya where he had expected to find Adrian and the three Mexicans awaiting him, but, as we know, they had gone on to the scene of the wreck. Not realizing just what had happened, but always on the alert for the unexpected, Billie, therefore, began an inspection of the station.

Twenty minutes later, he arrived at the station in Pitahaya, where he expected to find Adrian and the three Mexicans waiting for him. However, as we know, they had already gone to the wreck site. Not fully understanding what had occurred but always ready for the unexpected, Billie started inspecting the station.

It did not take him long to discover that Pitahaya was little more than a siding with a one-room building, which was used as a freight house and a waiting room. It did not even boast of a station master.

It didn't take him long to realize that Pitahaya was barely more than a siding with a one-room building that served as a freight house and waiting area. It didn't even have a station master.

"There must be some reason for having a building here," he mused. "There must be some sort of a settlement around somewhere. But what's that to me? I might as well be jogging along towards Pachuca."

"There has to be a reason for having a building here," he thought. "There must be some kind of settlement nearby. But what does that matter to me? I might as well be jogging along towards Pachuca."

Then he bethought him of the ape, which he had no mind to lose after his exciting experience. But the animal was nowhere to be seen.

Then he remembered the ape, which he didn't want to lose after his thrilling experience. But the animal was nowhere to be found.

"I wonder if I could raise him with a shot," soliloquized Billie.

"I wonder if I could lift him with a shot," Billie thought aloud.

He raised his weapon, which he still carried in[Pg 29] his hand, and fired aimlessly, while he turned his eyes in various directions, but there was nothing to be seen.

He raised the weapon he still held in[Pg 29] his hand and fired randomly, looking around in all directions, but there was nothing to be seen.

"Oh, well," he thought, "what's the difference? He'd just be a nuisance anyway. I might as well be trudging along."

"Oh, well," he thought, "what's the difference? He'd just be annoying anyway. I might as well just keep going."

He jumped off the station platform and proceeded down the track, filling the magazine to his automatic as he went. Then having finished the task, he returned it to his holster and once more began counting the ties.

He jumped off the station platform and walked down the track, loading the magazine for his automatic as he went. After finishing the task, he put it back in his holster and started counting the ties again.

"One, two, three, four, five, six——"

"One, two, three, four, five, six——"

Bing! And a stone whistled by his head.

Bing! And a stone flew past his head.

Billie turned, and as he did so a second stone from the same source struck him on the temple, and he fell to the ground.

Billie turned, and as he did, a second stone from the same source hit him on the temple, and he fell to the ground.

A second later the ape sprang from a palm beside the station and ran toward him, stopping every few feet to see if the lad would rise.

A second later, the ape jumped down from a palm tree next to the station and ran toward him, pausing every few feet to check if the boy would get up.

When within a few feet of the prostrate lad the animal made a leap and landed upon his body. In another instant it had gained possession of Billie's weapon, which it examined curiously for a moment, ere it sprang away and stationed itself some two rods distant, where it sat watching with the weapon aimed directly at him.

When it was just a few feet away from the lying boy, the animal jumped and landed on him. In an instant, it took hold of Billie's weapon, which it inspected curiously for a moment before it sprang away and settled about two rods away, where it sat watching with the weapon aimed right at him.

For perhaps five minutes the two retained their relative positions and then Billie began to regain [Pg 30] consciousness. Several times he moved uneasily and then he suddenly sat up and looked around.

For about five minutes, the two stayed in their positions, and then Billie started to come to. He moved around a few times restlessly and then suddenly sat up and looked around.

"I wonder what happened," he finally thought, and then he became conscious of a pain in his head.

"I wonder what happened," he finally thought, and then he became aware of a pain in his head.

He raised his hand to the aching spot and his fingers encountered a big lump.

He raised his hand to the sore spot and felt a big lump.

The truth came upon him like a flash. He dropped his hand to his holster, and sprang to his feet.

The truth hit him suddenly. He reached for his holster and jumped to his feet.

As he did so he caught sight of the ape and found himself looking into the business end of his own weapon.

As he did this, he noticed the ape and realized he was staring down the barrel of his own weapon.

With a yell he dropped to the ground as though the expected had happened.

With a shout, he dropped to the ground as if what he had been dreading had finally happened.

But when no shot followed, he began to regain his wits and lay still trying to figure out once more just how much the ape might know about the use of the weapon.

But when no shot came, he started to collect his thoughts and lay still, trying to figure out once again how much the ape might know about using the weapon.

He remembered the old saying that a gun was a dangerous weapon without lock, stock or barrel, because a man killed his wife with the ramrod; and so he figured that an animal which had intelligence enough to throw a stone and knock him senseless, might have sense enough to fire a revolver.

He recalled the old saying that a gun is a dangerous weapon without lock, stock, or barrel, because a man killed his wife with the ramrod; and so he thought that an animal smart enough to throw a stone and knock him out cold might also be clever enough to fire a revolver.

"If I only knew something about his history," soliloquized Billie, "I might be able to guess how much he knew. But he is a perfect stranger to me. I don't even know his name."

"If I only knew something about his background," Billie thought to himself, "I might be able to figure out how much he knows. But he’s a complete stranger to me. I don’t even know his name."

After several minutes and nothing had happened, Billie decided to make some effort to get away.

After several minutes of nothing happening, Billie decided to try to find a way to escape.

"I might as well be shot as to be prisoner to an [Pg 31] ape," he thought, and so he arose to a sitting posture and surveyed the scene.

"I might as well be shot than be a prisoner to an [Pg 31] ape," he thought, so he sat up and looked around at the scene.

There sat the ape as before, with the automatic pointed at Billie, but with a puzzled look upon its face. When the lad finally arose, the ape appeared still more puzzled and at length, turning the weapon away from Billie, looked into the muzzle.

There sat the ape as before, with the automatic aimed at Billie, but with a confused expression on its face. When the boy finally got up, the ape seemed even more confused and eventually, turning the weapon away from Billie, looked into the barrel.

"That settles it," exclaimed Billie. "He doesn't know how to fire it. I'll go and take it away from him."

"That's it," Billie shouted. "He doesn’t know how to use it. I'm going to go take it away from him."

He started toward the animal, which at once pointed the revolver in Billie's direction. There came a sharp report and a bullet whizzed by the boy's head.

He moved toward the animal, which immediately aimed the gun at Billie. There was a loud bang and a bullet zipped past the boy's head.

"Worse and more of it," exclaimed Billie. "He doesn't know how to use the thing, but he's liable to shoot me as long as I stay in range. I'll just make myself scarce."

"Worse and more of it," Billie exclaimed. "He doesn’t know how to use that thing, but he might accidentally shoot me as long as I’m within range. I’ll just keep my distance."

Stooping down, he picked up a good-sized stone and hurled it at the ape and then, without waiting to see the result of his throw, jumped into the jungle which lined both sides of the track, determined to make a detour and if possible lose his unpleasant companion.

Stooping down, he picked up a decent-sized stone and threw it at the ape. Then, without waiting to see what happened, he jumped into the jungle that lined both sides of the path, determined to take a detour and hopefully shake off his unwelcome companion.

He had not run far before he realized that the ape was following, but this he did not mind. There were plenty of trees between them, and he felt sure he would soon be able to reach some sort of a habitation, when he suddenly found himself on the edge [Pg 32] of a deep basin into which he plunged before he was able to gain his equilibrium.

He hadn’t run far before he noticed that the ape was following him, but he didn’t mind. There were plenty of trees between them, and he was sure he’d soon find some kind of shelter when he suddenly found himself at the edge [Pg 32] of a deep basin, into which he fell before he could steady himself.


CHAPTER IV.

THE ROSARIO VIEJO.

To be suddenly pitched head-foremost down a rocky declivity into a mass of prickly pear bushes and other tropical brambles is by no means pleasant; and as a result Billie was not in the best of humor when he picked himself up and looked to the top of the 60-foot embankment down which he had slid.

To be suddenly thrown headfirst down a rocky slope into a tangle of prickly pear and other tropical thorns is definitely not enjoyable; as a result, Billie wasn't in the greatest mood when he got up and looked back at the top of the 60-foot embankment he had just slid down.

"It's a wonder they wouldn't hang out a red light when they dig a hole like this," he declared angrily, "and not let a fellow most break his neck, to say nothing of scratching his eyes out! This is worse than a subway cave-in."

"It's amazing they don't put up a red light when they dig a hole like this," he said angrily, "and let someone almost break their neck, not to mention scratch their eyes out! This is worse than a subway collapse."

He pulled himself together and surveyed his surroundings.

He gathered himself and looked around at his surroundings.

The basin looked very much like an old quarry—so old that the shrubbery on the sides had grown into good-sized trees, and the whole place was covered with herbage of one sort or another. In one corner of the excavation, which must have covered some two acres, there was the ruin of an adobe house, while near the center was a stone structure made of four stone pillars about twenty feet apart [Pg 33] and roofed over with two huge stone slabs, set so as to form a gable roof. Except for its size, it had the appearance of the old-fashioned well houses, which were once so common in New England.

The basin resembled an old quarry—so ancient that the bushes on the sides had transformed into sizable trees, and the entire area was covered with various types of vegetation. In one corner of the excavation, which must have spanned about two acres, there was the remains of an adobe house, while near the center stood a stone structure made of four stone pillars spaced about twenty feet apart [Pg 33] and topped with two massive stone slabs arranged to create a gable roof. Aside from its size, it looked like the old-fashioned well houses that used to be common in New England.

"It's a tough-looking place, whatever it is," was Billie's comment. "I wish the fellows were here."

"It's a rough-looking place, whatever it is," Billie said. "I wish the guys were here."

And then for the first time in more than half an hour Billie bethought him of his companions. His strange experience with the ape had driven all other thoughts out of his mind.

And then, for the first time in over half an hour, Billie remembered his companions. His unusual encounter with the ape had pushed all other thoughts out of his mind.

"By George!" he exclaimed aloud, "I wonder how the fight with the bandits came out?"

"Wow!" he shouted, "I wonder how the fight with the bandits turned out?"

Almost as in answer to his words, there appeared upon the edge of the excavation into which he had fallen, but upon the opposite side from that on which he had taken his slide, ten horsemen, three of whom carried across the pommel of their saddles the bodies of three men. They halted and surveyed the basin critically. Then, single file, they slowly descended into the quarry.

Almost as if responding to his words, ten horsemen appeared at the edge of the pit he had fallen into, but on the opposite side from where he had slipped. Three of them were carrying the bodies of three men draped over the pommel of their saddles. They stopped and looked at the basin with scrutiny. Then, one by one, they slowly made their way down into the quarry.

Billie recognized them the minute he laid eyes upon them. They were the remnant of the bandit band, and the bodies carried across the pommels of the saddles were three of their wounded companions.

Billie recognized them the moment he saw them. They were the remains of the bandit group, and the bodies draped over the front of the saddles were three of their injured friends.

"This is no place for me," commented Billie as he kept himself well hidden behind a giant cactus. "It reminds me of Ali Baba and the forty thieves. I hope I have better luck than Ali Baba."

"This isn't the right place for me," Billie said, staying concealed behind a huge cactus. "It makes me think of Ali Baba and the forty thieves. I hope I have better luck than he did."

As though to carry out the trend of Billie's [Pg 34] thoughts, the horsemen halted near the ruin of the adobe house before mentioned and two of their number dismounted and entered. A minute later the rest of the band rode into the ruins and disappeared, followed by the riderless horses of the two dismounted men.

As if to follow the trend of Billie's [Pg 34] thoughts, the horsemen stopped near the ruins of the adobe house mentioned earlier, and two of them got off their horses and went inside. A minute later, the rest of the group rode into the ruins and vanished, followed by the riderless horses of the two men who had dismounted.

Billie rubbed his eyes.

Billie rubbed his eyes.

"I wonder if I'm getting dippy," he muttered. "Maybe that crack on the side of my head has made me see things."

"I wonder if I'm losing it," he muttered. "Maybe that bump on the side of my head has made me see things."

He sat down to think.

He sat down to reflect.

"If I only had some kind of a gun," he mused, "I wouldn't feel so everlasting helpless. Confound that ape! If I ever see him again I'll break his neck."

"If I just had a gun," he thought, "I wouldn't feel so endlessly helpless. Damn that guy! If I see him again, I’ll snap his neck."

Then, after a moment's thought: "I don't believe the beast would give up the chase. He's likely to show up at any minute. Something has to be done."

Then, after a moment's thought: "I don't think the beast will stop chasing us. He's probably going to show up any second. We need to take action."

The boy scanned the edge of the embankment, if perchance he might see anything of his persecutor. There was nothing in sight and he decided to go on a tour of inspection. As quietly as possible he stole along the side of the excavation toward the spot where the ruin stood, when once more he had that sense of being watched.

The boy looked along the edge of the embankment, hoping to catch a glimpse of his pursuer. There was nothing in sight, so he decided to check things out. He quietly crept along the side of the excavation toward the spot where the ruin stood, when he felt that familiar sense of being watched again.

Turning his head quickly, he saw the ape about twenty paces to one side aiming the revolver at him.

Turning his head quickly, he saw the ape about twenty steps to one side aiming the gun at him.

Then Billie lost his temper.

Then Billie got angry.

"This thing has got to stop," he exclaimed. "I'll [Pg 35] be doggoned if I'm going to stand for it any longer."

"This has to stop," he exclaimed. "I’ll be damned if I’m going to put up with it any longer."

He ran quickly toward the ape, and fell on his knees as he had seen the ape do, and raised his hands in supplication.

He ran quickly toward the ape, fell to his knees like he had seen the ape do, and raised his hands in a gesture of pleading.

The animal quirked its head and fairly beamed with pleasure as it slowly advanced and stood beside him.

The animal tilted its head and seemed to shine with happiness as it slowly approached and stood next to him.

But its simian smile was quickly turned to surprise, for like a flash Billie snatched the weapon from its hand and aimed it at the animal's head.

But its monkey-like smile quickly turned to surprise, for in a flash, Billie snatched the weapon from its hand and aimed it at the animal's head.

"Now," he said, "you come with me."

"Now," he said, "you’re coming with me."

The animal made no move.

The animal stayed still.

"We'll see whether you will come or not," said Billie, and stooping down he broke off a good-sized sprout from a live oak. "Now, march!" and he raised the whip.

"We'll see if you're coming or not," Billie said, bending down to break off a decent-sized sprout from a live oak. "Now, move!" he shouted as he lifted the whip.

It was the one thing needed. The beast had evidently felt the touch of a whip before, for it raised its arm and danced about as though going through some circus maneuver.

It was the one thing needed. The beast had clearly experienced a whip before, as it raised its arm and moved around as if performing some circus act.

"The first mystery is solved," laughed Billie. "Now for the second one. Come on, Ab," unconsciously naming his companion after the hero of Stanley Waterloo's famous story.

"The first mystery is solved," Billie laughed. "Now for the second one. Come on, Ab," he said, unknowingly naming his companion after the hero from Stanley Waterloo's famous story.

The ape seemed to know what was wanted and the two proceeded slowly and silently toward the ruin.

The ape appeared to understand what was needed, and the two moved quietly and gradually towards the ruins.

"I've been in a whole lot of queer scrapes," mused Billie as he crept along, "but this is surely the queerest—tramping [Pg 36] around with an ape to solve the disappearance of ten cutthroats. I hope I wake up pretty soon."

"I've been in a ton of crazy situations," Billie thought as he quietly moved along, "but this is definitely the craziest—wandering around with an ape to figure out the disappearance of ten ruthless killers. I hope I wake up from this dream soon."

But it was no dream, as Billie was soon to discover.

But it wasn't a dream, as Billie was soon to find out.

Arriving at the ruined building, Billie crawled along by the wall until he came directly under what had once been a window. Then, after listening a long time and hearing no sound, he ventured to raise his head and peep in.

Arriving at the ruined building, Billie crawled along the wall until he was right under what used to be a window. Then, after listening for a long time and hearing nothing, he decided to lift his head and peek inside.

The old ruin was as empty as though there were not a living person within fifty miles.

The old ruin was as empty as if there wasn't a single person within fifty miles.

"Great Scott!" gasped the boy. "What do you think of that! Now I know I'm dreaming!"

"Wow!" the boy exclaimed. "What do you think of that! Now I know I'm dreaming!"

He turned to the ape, waving his whip.

He turned to the monkey, waving his whip.

"Here you, Ab," he said, "go in there and see what you can find."

"Here you go, Ab," he said, "go in there and see what you can find."

He pointed to the window and the animal sprang lightly in and a minute later perched itself on one of the decaying rafters.

He pointed to the window, and the animal jumped in effortlessly, then settled on one of the rotting rafters a moment later.

"If there were any one around, they would certainly see Ab," reasoned Billie, "and would make some noise about it. I guess it's safe to go in."

"If anyone was around, they would definitely see Ab," Billie thought, "and they'd make some noise about it. I guess it's safe to go in."

He crawled around to the door and entered. There were the tracks of the horses, but the horses had disappeared as completely as though they had been swallowed up.

He crawled over to the door and went in. There were the horse tracks, but the horses had vanished as if they had been swallowed whole.

Billie called softly to Ab, who did not see fit to obey until he waved his whip. Then the animal [Pg 37] sprang lightly to the ground. Billie showed him the tracks.

Billie called softly to Ab, who didn’t feel like responding until he waved his whip. Then the animal [Pg 37] jumped lightly to the ground. Billie pointed out the tracks.

"Where do you suppose they went?" he asked.

"Where do you think they went?" he asked.

Ab blinked his eyes and, for the first time since Billie had become acquainted with him, made a noise in his throat, much like the voice of a child.

Ab blinked his eyes and, for the first time since Billie had met him, made a sound in his throat, similar to a child's voice.

Billie smiled in spite of himself.

Billie smiled anyway.

"I'm glad you've decided to become sociable," he said, "What do you make of this? You look as though you could think."

"I'm glad you've chosen to be more social," he said, "What do you think about this? You look like you have something on your mind."

Ab blinked his eyes stupidly and then suddenly became alert as though listening.

Ab blinked his eyes blankly and then suddenly perked up as if he were listening.

"What is it?" asked Billie, impressed by the ape's attitude.

"What is it?" Billie asked, impressed by the ape's attitude.

For a reply Ab sprang through the window and made straight for the structure in the middle of the quarry. In another instant he was on the roof.

For a response, Ab jumped through the window and headed directly for the building in the center of the quarry. In no time, he was on the roof.

Billie followed as fast as he could and as he stepped beneath the roof started back in the utmost amazement, for up through what looked like a huge well there came the distinct sound of human voices.

Billie rushed to keep up, and as he stepped under the roof, he stopped in utter amazement. Up through what seemed like a giant well, he could clearly hear the sound of human voices.

For several seconds he stood as one in a spell and then he started forward to peer into the well, but on a second thought did not.

For several seconds, he stood there as if enchanted, and then he moved closer to look into the well, but after some thought, he decided not to.

"I couldn't see anything if I did," he thought, "but any one looking up could see me. I'll do better by listening."

"I wouldn't be able to see anything anyway," he thought, "but anyone looking up could see me. I should listen instead."

The words came to him almost as distinctly as though he were in the same room with the speakers, and there was no longer any doubt that the voices were those of the Zapatistas who had attempted to[Pg 38] rob the train.

The words reached him clearly, almost as if he were sharing a room with the speakers, and there was no doubt that the voices belonged to the Zapatistas who had tried to[Pg 38] rob the train.

From their conversation Billie learned the outcome of the fight, and he was greatly amused at the attempt of the bandits to figure out who had betrayed them. Each one had a different theory, but all agreed that there must have been a traitor in the band. It was all the lad could do to prevent himself from calling out to them, just to see what effect his words would have.

From their conversation, Billie found out what happened in the fight, and he was really amused by the bandits trying to figure out who had betrayed them. Each one had a different theory, but they all agreed that there had to be a traitor among them. It was all he could do to stop himself from yelling at them, just to see how they would react.

After discovering from the conversation that the bandits felt themselves perfectly secure where they were and that they were likely to stay there for some time, he finally decided to get back to the railroad and thence to Pachuca and give the alarm.

After hearing in the conversation that the bandits felt completely safe where they were and would probably stay there for a while, he finally decided to return to the railroad and then to Pachuca to raise the alarm.

Acting upon the decision, he made his way across the basin to where he had slid down the embankment and slowly and laboriously climbed to the top, followed by Ab.

Acting on the decision, he made his way across the basin to where he had slid down the hill and slowly climbed to the top, with Ab following him.

Retracing his steps, he soon reached the railroad and looking down the track toward Pachuca gave a shout of delight as he saw his three chums approaching, leading a fourth horse between them.

Retracing his steps, he soon reached the railroad and looking down the track toward Pachuca shouted with joy as he saw his three friends coming, leading a fourth horse between them.

"Just in time," he said, as they drew near enough to exchange greetings.

"Just in time," he said, as they got close enough to say hello.

"Just in time for what?" queried the others as one.

"Just in time for what?" the others asked in unison.

"To capture the bandits that you let escape."

"To catch the bandits that you let get away."

"How do you know that we let any escape?" asked Adrian.

"How do you know that we let anyone escape?" asked Adrian.

"I'm a mind reader."[Pg 39]

"I'm psychic."[Pg 39]

The other three looked incredulous.

The other three looked shocked.

"Oh, it's a fact," declared Billie. "I can tell you all about the fight just as well as though I had been there," and he proceeded to prove his words.

"Oh, it's true," Billie said. "I can tell you all about the fight just as if I had been there," and he went on to prove his point.

"Some one told you," said Adrian.

"Someone told you," Adrian said.

"Sure," laughed Billie, thoroughly enjoying the perplexity of his companions. "My friend Ab. Come here, old man, and be introduced," and Billie waved his whip, which he still carried.

"Sure," laughed Billie, clearly enjoying the confusion of his friends. "My buddy Ab. Come here, old man, and meet everyone," and Billie waved his whip, which he still had.

With a little cry the ape sprang to his side, an act which only added to the amazement of the others.

With a small shout, the ape jumped to his side, which only increased the astonishment of the others.

"Allow me," said Billie with mock gravity, "to introduce my friend Mr. Ab from No-man's-land. Ab, these are the rest of the Broncho Rider Boys. How would you like to join the company?"

"Let me," said Billie with feigned seriousness, "introduce my friend Mr. Ab from No-man's-land. Ab, these are the other Broncho Rider Boys. How would you feel about joining us?"

Ab scratched his ear and looked wise.

Ab scratched his ear and looked thoughtful.

"Oh, come," interrupted Donald. "Tell us what's up and what we must do to capture the rest of this band of cutthroats."

"Oh, come on," interrupted Donald. "Tell us what's going on and what we need to do to catch the rest of this gang of criminals."

Thinking that he had carried the joke far enough, and realizing also that he might be wasting valuable time, Billie related his adventure, describing the place he had discovered.

Thinking he had taken the joke far enough, and also realizing he might be wasting valuable time, Billie shared his adventure, describing the place he had found.

"It is the Rosario viejo," said Pedro, as soon as Billie had finished his story.

"It’s the Rosario viejo," Pedro said, right after Billie finished his story.

"What's that?" asked Billie.

"What's that?" Billie asked.

"An abandoned mine. It is called the old Rosario to distinguish it from the new Rosario, which is now one of the most valuable mines in this region. [Pg 40] The station at Pitahaya was built especially to serve it."

"An abandoned mine. It's called the old Rosario to differentiate it from the new Rosario, which is now one of the most valuable mines in this region. [Pg 40] The station at Pitahaya was built specifically to serve it."

"I see," said Billie. "Where is the new mine?"

"I get it," said Billie. "Where's the new mine?"

"Down there," and Pedro pointed to a trail leading in the opposite direction. "It is just about as far from the station on that side of the railroad as the old Rosario is on this."

"Over there," Pedro said, pointing to a path going the other way. "It's almost as far from the station on that side of the tracks as the old Rosario is on this side."

"Don't you think we had better summon some assistance from the mine workers?" asked Adrian.

"Don't you think we should call for some help from the miners?" asked Adrian.

"They may be in cahoots with the bandits," laughed Donald. "I have lost my confidence in about every one in this bandit-ridden land."

"They might be working with the bandits," laughed Donald. "I've lost my trust in almost everyone in this bandit-infested territory."

"I don't blame you," said Pedro, "and I hope the day will soon come when all this trouble will be over."

"I don't blame you," Pedro said, "and I hope the day comes soon when all this trouble is behind us."

"Then you agree with me that we should tackle the bandits alone, do you?" asked Donald.

"Then you agree with me that we should take on the bandits ourselves, right?" asked Donald.

"It is the only safe way."

"It's the only safe choice."

"All right, then," exclaimed Billie. "Let's be off. If we use a little strategy, I'm sure we shall succeed."

"Okay, then," Billie said excitedly. "Let's get going. If we plan it out a bit, I'm sure we'll succeed."

He turned to mount the horse, which a minute before had been standing a few feet away, but it was gone.

He turned to get on the horse, which had just been a few feet away, but it was gone.

"Where's my horse?" he cried.

"Where's my horse?" he shouted.

The others turned in surprise.

The others turned in shock.

"It certainly was here a minute ago," declared Adrian.

"It was definitely here a minute ago," Adrian said.

"Then it can't be very far away," insisted Donald.

"Then it can't be too far away," insisted Donald.

"It's so far I can't see it," replied Billie.

"It's too far away for me to see it," Billie replied.

"There it goes!" shouted Pedro, who had jumped[Pg 41] his mount across the track as soon as he heard Billie's cry.

"There it goes!" shouted Pedro, who had jumped[Pg 41] his horse across the track as soon as he heard Billie’s shout.

The others looked in the direction indicated, and sure enough, there went the horse about a quarter of a mile away on a dead run and on its back was Billie's late acquaintance, Ab.

The others looked where he pointed, and sure enough, there was the horse about a quarter of a mile away racing at full speed, and on its back was Billie’s recent acquaintance, Ab.

"By George," exclaimed Billie angrily as he snatched a rifle from Donald's holster, "I've had enough of that ape. I'll put a stop to his foolishness," and he leveled the rifle.

"By George," Billie shouted angrily as he grabbed a rifle from Donald's holster, "I've had enough of that ape. I'm going to put an end to his nonsense," and he aimed the rifle.

But ere he could press the trigger, there was a report from another quarter and the horse and its rider hit the dust.

But before he could pull the trigger, there was a shot from another direction and the horse and its rider went down.


CHAPTER V.

WHEN THE OLD WAS NEW.

A cry of astonishment went up from the quartette and then they stood silent to see what would be the next move.

A gasp of surprise erupted from the four of them, and then they stood in silence, waiting to see what would happen next.

They did not have long to wait, for presently a tall, gaunt figure strode out of the brambles some yards from the fallen horse and uttered a hoarse shout, upon which Ab sprang from the spot where he had fallen and ran toward the newcomer, giving vent to shrill cries as he ran.

They didn’t have to wait long, because soon a tall, thin figure walked out of the bushes a few yards from the fallen horse and let out a rough shout, after which Ab jumped up from where he had fallen and ran toward the newcomer, letting out loud cries as he ran.

"That must be his master," muttered Billie. "I'm[Pg 42] glad I didn't shoot the little beggar."

"That must be his master," Billie whispered. "I'm[Pg 42] glad I didn't shoot that little guy."

"I'm more interested in the master than in the monkey," said Donald. "He is evidently not a Mexican. Who and what do you suppose he is?"

"I'm more interested in the master than in the monkey," Donald said. "He clearly isn't Mexican. Who do you think he is?"

"An animal trainer from a circus," replied Adrian.

"An animal trainer from a circus," Adrian replied.

"There are no circuses in this part of the world," commented Billie.

"There are no circuses around here," Billie said.

"If he only had a hand organ instead of a gun, I could place him," laughed Donald. "What do you make out of him, Pedro?"

"If he only had a hand organ instead of a gun, I could figure him out," laughed Donald. "What do you think of him, Pedro?"

"It's a saltimbanco."

"It's a street performer."

"What is that?"

"What's that?"

"A man who goes about making people laugh."

"A guy who goes around making people laugh."

"Oh!" from Adrian. "You mean a mountebank?"

"Oh!" Adrian exclaimed. "You mean a con artist?"

"I think so."

"I believe so."

"And this chap," ventured Billie, "isn't satisfied with making a monkey of himself, but carries a real one with him."

"And this guy," suggested Billie, "isn't satisfied with making a fool of himself, but actually carries a real monkey with him."

Pedro laughed. "That seems to be it."

Pedro laughed. "Looks like that's it."

"I'm sorry he killed the horse," said Donald. "We need him."

"I'm sorry he killed the horse," Donald said. "We need him."

"Perhaps he didn't," suggested Adrian. "Suppose we ride over and see."

"Maybe he didn't," Adrian suggested. "Why don't we ride over and check it out?"

Suiting the action to the word, the boys rode out into the open, much to the newcomer's surprise and consternation.

Suiting the action to the word, the boys rode out into the open, much to the newcomer's surprise and dismay.

"Señors," he exclaimed, as he came running [Pg 43] toward them, "I am sorry I had to hurt your horse; but I couldn't lose my brother."

"Guys," he shouted as he rushed toward them, "[Pg 43] I'm sorry I had to hurt your horse, but I couldn't let my brother go."

"Your what?" asked Billie.

"Your what?" Billie asked.

"My brother. My little brother. Could I, Ambrosio?" and he patted the ape on the cheek.

"My brother. My little brother. Could I, Ambrosio?" and he patted the monkey on the cheek.

"What do you call him?" asked Donald.

"What do you call him?" Donald asked.

"I call him Ambrosio because he is so sweet."

"I call him Ambrosio because he's so nice."

"Bah!" exclaimed Billie. "I called him Ab, but he ought to be named Diabolo. But how about the horse?"

"Bah!" Billie exclaimed. "I called him Ab, but he should really be named Diabolo. But what about the horse?"

"I am afraid I have rendered him quite useless for the present, Señor. I may have broken his leg."

"I’m afraid I’ve made him pretty much useless for now, sir. I might have broken his leg."

An examination of the fallen animal revealed the fact that while the leg was not splintered, it was so badly injured that the animal was quite useless.

An examination of the fallen animal showed that while the leg wasn't broken, it was so badly injured that the animal was pretty much useless.

"Have you far to go, Señors?" queried the mountebank.

"Do you have a long way to go, gentlemen?" asked the con artist.

"Only as far as the Rosario viejo for the present," answered Adrian. "After that——"

"Just as far as the Rosario viejo for now," Adrian replied. "After that——"

"After that," interrupted Billie, "we may not want to go anywhere."

"After that," Billie interrupted, "we might not want to go anywhere."

The mountebank looked at Billie questioningly.

The con artist looked at Billie with a questioning expression.

"That's what I mean," reiterated Billie. "We are going there to capture a band of cutthroats, but we may have a fight."

"That’s what I mean," Billie repeated. "We’re going there to take down a group of criminals, but we might have to fight."

The man made a grimace, which was intended for a smile.

The man forced a smile that came off as a grimace.

"I understand. Can I be of any service?"

"I get it. Can I help you with anything?"

Donald eyed him suspiciously.

Donald looked at him warily.

"What do you think?" he asked.

"What do you think?" he asked.

"You may have noticed how I stopped the runaway,"[Pg 44] he remarked.

"You might have seen how I stopped the runaway,"[Pg 44] he said.

"Very neatly."

"Very tidy."

"Sure," from Billie. "It was a short stop."

"Sure," Billie said. "It was a quick stop."

"I perceive that you are an American. I am also a fan."

"I see that you're American. I'm a fan too."

"What!" from the three Americans.

"What!" from the three Americans.

"True. I am even worse. I formerly shot the pill in one of the bush leagues. I aspired to a place in the box of one of the major league clubs, but instead I joined the Madero revolution. I had all the sport I wanted and finding my brother in this forsaken land, I joined him as a public entertainer. Shall we give you a sample of our performance?"

"True. I'm even worse. I used to play in one of the minor leagues. I wanted to be part of a major league team, but instead, I got involved in the Madero revolution. I had all the fun I wanted, and after finding my brother in this desolate place, I joined him as a performer. Want to see a sample of our act?"

"Not now," from Donald. "Let's go and round up this bunch of revolutionists first."

"Not now," said Donald. "Let's go gather these revolutionaries first."

"But why?" queried the mountebank. "To-morrow they may be the government."

"But why?" asked the con artist. "Tomorrow they could be the government."

The boys looked at each other with an expression that said as plainly as words: "True! We never thought of that."

The boys exchanged glances that clearly said: "Wow! We never thought of that."

"Now, I have a better plan," continued the mountebank. "Let's go and entertain the revolutionists. Let's be neutral."

"Now, I've got a better idea," the con artist said. "Let's go and entertain the revolutionaries. Let's stay neutral."

"I'm afraid we are already belligerents," laughed Adrian. "We have had one brush with them."

"I'm afraid we're already combatants," laughed Adrian. "We've had one encounter with them."

The mountebank heaved a sigh.

The con artist sighed.

"Of course, if you have declared war, we shall have to fight to a finish, unless," with a grin, "we can intrench."

"Of course, if you've declared war, we’ll have to fight until one of us wins, unless," with a grin, "we can dig in."

"It is they who are intrenched," explained Billie.[Pg 45] "They are at the bottom of the old mine, although I don't know how they got there."

"It’s them who are stuck," Billie explained.[Pg 45] "They're at the bottom of the old mine, but I have no idea how they ended up there."

"So," laughed the mountebank. "Suppose we go and find out."

"So," laughed the con artist. "Let's go see."

Arrived at the shaft house, for that is what the gable-roofed building was, the boys and their new-found friend approached and listened to the sound of voices which still arose to the top of the shaft.

Arrived at the shaft house, which is what the gable-roofed building was, the boys and their new friend approached and listened to the sounds of voices that still echoed up from the bottom of the shaft.

Evidently considering themselves free and safe, the bandits were preparing their evening meal, for it was now well on toward sunset. They were singing and joking as though they had not just lost half or two-thirds their number.

Evidently feeling free and safe, the bandits were getting ready for their evening meal, as it was nearing sunset. They were singing and joking as if they hadn’t just lost half or two-thirds of their group.

From a few remarks made now and then, it appeared that they proposed on the following day to recruit the band up to its former strength.

From a few comments made here and there, it seemed like they planned to bring the band back to its original size the next day.

"That is the thing we must prevent," declared Donald.

"That's what we need to stop," Donald declared.

"A very easy thing," said the mountebank, "if we had enough provisions to remain here for twenty-four hours, or more."

"A really simple thing," said the scam artist, "if we had enough supplies to stay here for twenty-four hours or more."

"How so?" asked Billie.

"How come?" asked Billie.

"Why, they will doubtless send out two or three to do the recruiting. We can capture them as they leave the ruins."

"Surely, they will probably send out two or three people to do the recruiting. We can catch them as they leave the ruins."

Billie glanced at the man from under his broad-rimmed sombrero as he asked: "How did you know they came out through the ruins?"

Billie looked at the man from beneath his wide-brimmed sombrero as he asked, "How did you know they came out through the ruins?"

The mountebank smiled.

The con artist smiled.

"Now, don't go to mistrusting me, young fellow,[Pg 46] for I'm on the level. But I've been in this place before, and I know that the only way to where your friends down there are camping is through the ruins."

"Now, don’t start doubting me, young man,[Pg 46] because I'm being honest. But I've been here before, and I know that the only way to reach your friends down there is through the ruins."

"Have you ever been down there?"

"Have you ever been down there?"

"Yes. They are only about sixty feet below the ground, in a chamber which was originally a gallery in the mine. The shaft over which this house is built is over two hundred feet deep."

"Yes. They're only about sixty feet below the ground in a chamber that was originally a gallery in the mine. The shaft this house is built over is over two hundred feet deep."

"I'd like to explore it," remarked Adrian.

"I want to check it out," said Adrian.

"Do you think you have the nerve?" and the stranger bent upon him a penetrating gaze.

"Do you think you have the guts?" the stranger said, fixing him with a penetrating stare.

Billie laughed softly.

Billie chuckled gently.

"Say, stranger," he finally said. "I guess you never heard of the Broncho Rider Boys. We've got the nerve to do anything that any other human being dare do."

"Hey, stranger," he finally said. "I bet you’ve never heard of the Broncho Rider Boys. We’ve got the guts to do anything that any other person dares to do."

"Then we'll get rid of these bandits in short notice," declared the mountebank emphatically. "You are just the chaps I have been looking for."

"Then we'll take care of these bandits quickly," the con artist announced with certainty. "You are exactly the guys I've been searching for."

He leaned over the mouth of the shaft and gave a shrill whistle.

He leaned over the edge of the shaft and let out a sharp whistle.

In an instant all was silent below.

In an instant, everything was quiet below.

Half a minute later he repeated the whistle thrice.

Half a minute later, he whistled three times.

There was a clatter below of arms and accoutrements.

There was a noise below of weapons and gear.

"Over behind those big cactus with you, quick," was the next command. "If you insist on fighting [Pg 47] these men later, you can. Now let's get rid of them."

"Go hide behind those big cacti with you, fast," was the next command. "If you want to fight these guys later, you can. For now, let's take care of them."

For just a moment the boys hesitated, but there was something in the man's manner that seemed to force obedience and they obeyed.

For a brief moment, the boys hesitated, but there was something about the man's demeanor that made them feel compelled to comply, and they did.

They were not a moment too soon, for they had no more than secreted themselves than the back wall of the ruin flew open and the men rode out. Of those who had been at the mouth of the shaft only a few moments before, only the mountebank with his ape was in sight.

They weren't a moment too soon, because as soon as they hid themselves, the back wall of the ruin swung open, and the men charged out. Of those who had just been at the entrance of the shaft, only the trickster with his monkey was visible.

"What is it?" asked one of the band, riding up to him.

"What is it?" asked one of the group, riding up to him.

"Guard the track at the summit. Let no train pass, even if you have to tear up the track."

"Guard the track at the top. Don't let any train pass, even if you have to rip up the tracks."

"By whose order?"

"Who ordered this?"

The mountebank made a mysterious sign with his left hand.

The con artist made a mysterious gesture with his left hand.

"Bueno!" from the horseman. "Close up the doors and care for the wounded," and putting spurs to his horse, he led the bandits from the basin.

"Good!" said the horseman. "Close the doors and take care of the wounded," and urging his horse forward, he led the bandits out of the basin.

As soon as they were out of sight, the mountebank summoned the boys to the shaft house by a wave of his hand.

As soon as they were out of sight, the con artist called the boys to the shaft house with a wave of his hand.

"Now," he said, "you'll have a chance to test your nerve, and we must work rapidly to get where we wish to go before dark."

"Now," he said, "you'll have a chance to test your nerves, and we need to move quickly to reach our destination before it gets dark."

He took from a crude knapsack which he wore upon his shoulders a coil of cord about half the size of a lead pencil, but evidently of much strength. [Pg 48] Then seizing the ape, he fastened one end of the cord to the belt about the animal's body, and despite its unwillingness to be thus treated began to lower it into the shaft.

He pulled out a thick cord about half the size of a pencil from a basic backpack he carried on his shoulders, but it looked very strong. [Pg 48] Then, grabbing the ape, he tied one end of the cord to its belt and despite the animal's resistance, he started to lower it down into the shaft.

Totally unable to account for his actions, the boys stood speechless, watching the operations.

Totally unable to explain their actions, the boys stood silent, watching what was happening.

After some minutes, the cord slackened.

After a few minutes, the cord loosened.

"He's reached the bottom," was the information vouchsafed. Then a moment later: "Help me to pull him up, one of you."

"He's at the bottom," was the news given. Then a moment later: "Someone help me pull him up."

Billie hastened to lend a hand and in a short time the head of the ape appeared above the edge of the shaft. In his hand he held one end of a good-sized rope, which the mountebank took and tied around one of the stone pillars which supported the roof.

Billie rushed to help, and before long, the ape’s head popped up over the edge of the shaft. In his hand, he had one end of a decent-sized rope, which the con artist took and tied around one of the stone pillars supporting the roof.

"Now, then," he said, "we are ready to descend into the old mine. Which one of you will go first?"

"Alright," he said, "we're ready to go down into the old mine. Who wants to go first?"

The boys looked at each other, but there was no reply until Donald asked:

The boys glanced at each other, but no one spoke until Donald asked:

"Why should we go down at all?"

"Why should we go down at all?"

"Why," was the somewhat quizzical reply, "to show your nerve."

"Why," was the somewhat puzzled response, "to show your courage."

"Unless there is some good reason other than that, there are plenty of ways to show our nerve without lowering ourselves to the bottom of an old mine."

"Unless there’s a good reason besides that, there are many ways to prove our courage without stooping to the depths of an old mine."

"There is a good reason," was the reply.

"There is a good reason," was the reply.

"Then tell us. If it is good, there can be no objection."

"Then tell us. If it's good, there’s no reason to object."

"The object of this descent," said the stranger [Pg 49] calmly, "is to see if we cannot solve the mystery of the abandonment of the mine."

"The purpose of this descent," said the stranger [Pg 49] calmly, "is to find out if we can solve the mystery of why the mine was abandoned."

"Have you ever been down?" asked Billie.

"Have you ever felt down?" asked Billie.

"Often."

"Frequently."

"There is no foul gas at the bottom?"

"There’s no bad gas at the bottom?"

"Not now, as you may see by the condition of Ambrosio, who has been clear to the bottom."

"Not now, as you can see by Ambrosio's condition, who has been completely transparent."

"Then I am willing to be the first to descend; but first I must know more about you than I do."

"Then I'm ready to go down first; but first I need to know more about you than I currently do."

"What difference does that make? You will have three friends here with me. They are all armed and I can see they know how to use their weapons. I cannot possibly harm you. I will be the third to descend. I assure you that the descent and the ascent are comparatively easy for athletic young chaps, as the sides of the shaft are very uneven. By the aid of this rope you can come up almost as easily as you would climb a ladder. The adventure is well worth your while."

"What difference does that make? You’ll have three friends here with me. They’re all armed, and I can see they know how to handle their weapons. I can’t possibly harm you. I’ll be the third to go down. I promise you that going down and coming back up are relatively easy for athletic young guys, as the sides of the shaft are quite uneven. With this rope, you can climb up almost as easily as you would a ladder. The adventure is definitely worth it."

"And you won't tell us who you are?"

"And you’re not going to tell us who you are?"

"I have already told you. I am an American soldier of fortune. My name, if that means anything to you, is Francis Strong, and I have assumed this character of a mountebank solely for the purpose of going about the country without being molested. What I hope to do, is of no interest to any one but myself."

"I've already told you. I'm an American mercenary. My name, if it matters to you, is Francis Strong, and I've taken on this persona of a con artist just to travel around the country without being bothered. What I plan to do is only important to me."

It was a straightforward statement and the boys saw no reason to doubt its truthfulness.

It was a simple statement, and the boys had no reason to question its truth.

"All right, then," exclaimed Billie. "Here goes!"

"Okay, then," said Billie. "Here we go!"

He grasped the rope and lowered himself over[Pg 50] the side. It was as Strong had said and in a very few minutes he found himself at the bottom. He could see nothing except the dim light at the mouth of the shaft.

He grabbed the rope and lowered himself over[Pg 50] the edge. Just like Strong had mentioned, within just a few minutes, he found himself at the bottom. He could only see the faint light at the entrance of the shaft.

Giving the rope a vigorous shake, as had been agreed upon, he saw another figure begin to descend, and in a short time Pedro stood beside him. Strong was next to descend, then came Ambrosio, and after him Adrian and Donald in the order named—Donald having determined to be the last, that he might be sure that everything was safe above ground.

Giving the rope a solid shake, as agreed, he watched another figure start to come down, and soon Pedro was next to him. Strong was next to come down, followed by Ambrosio, and then Adrian and Donald in that order—Donald choosing to be last to make sure everything was safe up top.

"I should have given you this," was Strong's first remark upon alighting at Billie's side, and he drew from his pocket an electric torch. "But it slipped my mind."

"I should've given you this," was Strong's first comment as he arrived at Billie's side, and he took an electric flashlight out of his pocket. "But I totally forgot."

"We all have them in our trunk in the City of Mexico," replied Billie, "but I doubt if either of us has one with him."

"We all have them in our trunk in Mexico City," Billie replied, "but I doubt either of us has one with us."

"This is sufficient, for I shall light some torches I have prepared as soon as we are ready for our work."

"This is enough because I'll light some torches I’ve gotten ready as soon as we’re set to start our work."

When Donald had descended, Strong led the way through a lateral about thirty or forty feet, at the end of which another vertical shaft had been sunk. Around the mouth of this Strong had set a number of torches, which he now proceeded to light. By their glare it was possible to see part way down the hole.

When Donald had come down, Strong took the lead through a passage about thirty or forty feet long, at the end of which another vertical shaft had been created. Around the opening of this shaft, Strong had placed several torches, which he now began to light. By their glow, it was possible to see partway down the hole.

"The thing I hope to find," explained Strong, "is[Pg 51] at the bottom of that hole, if it exists at all."

"The thing I'm hoping to find," said Strong, "is[Pg 51] at the bottom of that hole, if it even exists."

"What is that?" asked Billie.

"What’s that?" asked Billie.

"I think I can best answer your question," was the reply, "by reading you a translation of a paper which is said to have been found in the shaft above, where the bandits have made their rendezvous. How it came into my possession, matters not. I believe there are now enough of us here to prove or disprove its truthfulness, unless some one has been here before us."

"I think I can best answer your question," was the reply, "by reading you a translation of a paper that’s said to have been found in the shaft above, where the bandits have gathered. How I got it doesn’t matter. I believe there are enough of us here to confirm or deny its truth, unless someone got here before us."

Seating himself on a jutting boulder, Strong took from his pocket a paper, which he read as follows under the flickering torchlight:

Seating himself on a protruding boulder, Strong took a piece of paper from his pocket and read it as follows under the flickering torchlight:

"Being about to leave this world, I desire to obtain forgiveness for the great and only crime of my life, hence this confession.

"Before I leave this world, I want to seek forgiveness for the one great crime of my life, so I’m making this confession."

"There were five of us. Names do not matter. They were my fellow workmen. We had been entrusted with the output of the Rosario for the year and had promised to guard it with our lives. We heard the soldiers of Maximilian coming. We were not enough to withstand them. We determined to hide the treasure in the western shaft. We carried it to the edge and threw it in. My four companions went down to cover it over with dirt, which I brought from the other shaft and gave them, shovel by shovel. A mad idea seized me. If they were dead, no one but I would know the hiding place of [Pg 52] the treasure. I would kill them; but how? I glanced about. Great pieces of rock were on every hand. Without stopping to consider the foulness of the deed I rolled a huge piece to the mouth of the shaft and pushed it in. There was a cry of terror and I heard a voice call out to know what had happened. I said a piece of rock had broken loose and asked what damage it had done. Only one replied. The others had been stricken down. Madly I pushed over another rock and then another and still another. Then there was silence and I fled. The soldiers found me unconscious at the bottom of the shaft. Ere I became conscious, Maximilian was no more. When I returned hither, the mine had been abandoned. Here I have lived for years alone with my misery. Now I die. May God forgive me.

There were five of us. Names don’t matter. They were my coworkers. We had been entrusted with the output of the Rosario for the year and had promised to protect it with our lives. We heard Maximilian's soldiers approaching. We weren’t enough to fight them off. We decided to hide the treasure in the western shaft. We carried it to the edge and threw it in. My four companions went down to cover it with dirt, which I brought from the other shaft, handing it to them shovel by shovel. A crazy thought struck me. If they were dead, no one but I would know where the treasure was hidden. I would kill them; but how? I looked around. Big rocks were everywhere. Without thinking about how terrible the act was, I rolled a large rock to the mouth of the shaft and pushed it in. There was a scream of fear, and I heard a voice ask what had happened. I said a piece of rock had fallen and asked what damage it had caused. Only one replied. The others had been taken down. Madly, I pushed another rock, then another, and another. Then there was silence, and I ran away. The soldiers found me unconscious at the bottom of the shaft. Before I regained consciousness, Maximilian was gone. When I returned here, the mine had been abandoned. I have lived here for years, alone with my misery. Now I die. May God forgive me.

José Rodriguez.

José Rodriguez.




CHAPTER VI.

A FEARFUL EXPERIENCE.

"Well?" queried Donald when Strong had finished reading the paper, "what are we going to do about it?"

"Well?" Donald asked when Strong finished reading the paper. "What are we going to do about it?"

"We are going to find out, if we can, whether José Rodriguez told the truth, and if he did, whether any one else has tried to prove it."

"We're going to find out, if we can, whether José Rodriguez told the truth, and if he did, whether anyone else has tried to prove it."

"What do you think of it, Pedro?" asked Billie, indicating the opening at their feet.

"What do you think of it, Pedro?" Billie asked, pointing at the opening at their feet.

"Exactly."[Pg 53]

"Exactly." [Pg 53]

"Have you ever been down in it?" asked Adrian of Strong.

"Have you ever been in a rough spot?" asked Adrian to Strong.

"No! I did not feel equal to the task and I was afraid to ask help of any of these cutthroats."

"No! I didn't feel up to the task, and I was too scared to ask any of these cutthroats for help."

"What do you think of it, Pedro?" asked Billie, turning to the Mexican lad, who had made no comment whatever.

"What do you think about it, Pedro?" Billie asked, turning to the Mexican guy, who hadn't said anything at all.

"It's an old tale," was the reply, "this story of the Rosario viejo. I have heard it many times and I presume this shaft has been explored by every prospector in this section. In my opinion it is a huge hoax."

"It's an old story," was the reply, "this tale of the Rosario viejo. I've heard it countless times, and I assume this shaft has been checked out by every prospector in this area. To me, it's a massive scam."

At Pedro's words, Strong's face became ashen.

At Pedro's words, Strong's face turned pale.

"Are you telling the truth?" he asked hoarsely.

"Are you being honest?" he asked hoarsely.

"Indeed I am. My father knows of several who have searched the place and nothing has ever been found."

"Yes, I am. My dad knows several people who have looked around there, and nothing has ever been found."

Strong drew a long breath and passed his hand over his face.

Strong took a deep breath and rubbed his hand across his face.

"I have believed it true," he finally said, "ever since I first came into possession of this paper. There is something about it that rings true and I have counted upon finding sufficient wealth to enable me to achieve a long cherished plan. If what you say," turning to Pedro, "is true, my chance of attaining my ambition is very slim."

"I’ve believed it was true," he finally said, "ever since I got this paper. There’s something about it that feels real, and I’ve been counting on finding enough wealth to help me achieve a long-held dream. If what you’re saying," he said, turning to Pedro, "is true, my chances of reaching my goal are pretty slim."

"I'm sorry, sir, but if I had known for certain what your object was in coming down here I might [Pg 54] have saved you the trouble. Isn't there any other way you might obtain the money you wish?"

"I'm sorry, sir, but if I had known for sure what you were trying to achieve by coming down here, I could have saved you the trouble. Isn't there any other way for you to get the money you need?"

"If there is, I don't know it."

"If there is, I have no idea."

"Pedro may be right," spoke up Billie suddenly, "but I am in favor of making an inspection of our own, now that we are here. What do you say, Don?"

"Pedro might be right," Billie suddenly chimed in, "but I think we should do our own inspection now that we're here. What do you think, Don?"

"I'm with you." Then to Strong: "How are we to get to the bottom?"

"I'm with you." Then to Strong: "How do we get to the bottom?"

Strong reached over and from behind a nearby boulder produced another bundle of rope.

Strong reached over and pulled another bundle of rope from behind a nearby boulder.

"I had intended making a rope ladder," he said.

"I was planning to make a rope ladder," he said.

"All right, then," from Donald, "a rope ladder it shall be."

"Okay, then," Donald said, "a rope ladder it is."

The boys set to work and in the course of an hour had made a rope ladder more than fifty feet in length. Lowering it into the shaft, it seemed to reach to the bottom and Billie started to go down, but Strong prevented him.

The boys got to work and within an hour had made a rope ladder more than fifty feet long. They lowered it into the shaft, and it appeared to reach the bottom, but Strong stopped Billie from going down.

"I shall go first," he said. "If there is any danger from poisonous gas, or from reptiles, I shall take the risk. You boys have parents and homes. I have no one. If I should suffer any mishap, do not attempt to rescue me. It would not be worth while."

"I'll go first," he said. "If there’s any danger from toxic gas or snakes, I’ll take the risk. You guys have parents and homes. I don’t have anyone. If something happens to me, don’t try to save me. It wouldn’t be worth it."

"Nothing will happen," declared Adrian. "I have a hunch and my hunches are usually right."

"Nothing's going to happen," Adrian said. "I have a feeling, and my feelings are usually spot on."

The rope having been properly fastened and warded off the side by an ingenious arrangement of several large rocks, Strong began his descent. In his left hand he carried a flaming torch and Donald [Pg 55] leaned over the edge, looking down, with rifle sighted, to fire upon any reptile which might be brought to light by the torch's ruddy glare.

The rope was securely fastened and held in place by a clever setup of several large rocks. Strong started his descent. In his left hand, he carried a burning torch while Donald [Pg 55] leaned over the edge, peering down with his rifle aimed, ready to shoot at any reptile that might be revealed by the torch's bright light.

Step by step Strong went down, stopping every now and then to hold his torch below him, if perchance it might come into contact with fire damp or any other noxious gas.

Step by step, Strong made his way down, stopping occasionally to hold his torch below him, in case it might come into contact with fire damp or any other harmful gas.

He had descended at least three-fourths of the way, when, as he swung his torch below, he uttered a cry that was almost a shriek and the torch fell from his hand.

He had gone down at least three-quarters of the way when, as he swung his torch below, he let out a cry that was almost a shriek, and the torch fell from his hand.

At the same instant Donald gave vent to a loud exclamation and his rifle cracked.

At the same moment, Donald let out a loud shout, and his rifle went off.

"Hold on," he cried as he arose from the ground, "as you value your life, don't lose your hold."

"Wait," he shouted as he got up from the ground, "if you care about your life, don't let go."

"What is it?" asked the others in one voice.

"What is it?" the others asked in unison.

"Snakes! Dozens of them," replied Donald. "Climb up, Strong, as fast as you can."

"Snakes! Lots of them," Donald said. "Climb up, Strong, as quickly as you can."

"All right," came a feeble reply, followed almost immediately by a louder call of "Help!"

"Okay," came a weak reply, quickly followed by a louder shout of "Help!"

"Hold fast," called Donald. "I'm coming."

"Hold on," shouted Donald. "I'm on my way."

But before he could turn to step down the ladder, a chattering figure sprang past him and shot down the rope.

But before he could turn to descend the ladder, a chattering figure dashed past him and zipped down the rope.

It was the ape. He had heard his master's call and had gone to his assistance.

It was the ape. He had heard his owner’s call and had gone to help him.

A moment later came a joyful cry that told as plainly as words that Ambrosio had reached his master in time.

A moment later, a joyful shout rang out, clearly indicating that Ambrosio had reached his master just in time.

"Are you all right now?" called Donald.

"Are you okay now?" called Donald.

"Yes. I'll be up in a minute. Good old boy,"[Pg 56] the last remark evidently addressed to the ape.

"Yeah. I'll be there in a sec. Good old buddy,"[Pg 56] the last comment clearly directed at the ape.

When Strong's head appeared above the edge of the shaft a couple of minutes later he was as pale as a ghost and when he at length came into the full light of the torches, it was seen that his hair was as white as snow. The fright had completely changed its color.

When Strong's head came up over the edge of the shaft a few minutes later, he looked as pale as a ghost, and when he finally stepped into the full light of the torches, it was obvious that his hair had turned completely white. The fear had completely changed its color.

"Let's get out of here," he gasped as soon as he was helped to his feet. "I wouldn't go down into that place again for all the gold and silver in the world."

"Let’s get out of here," he panted as soon as he was helped up. "I wouldn't go back down there for all the gold and silver in the world."

"It was pretty rough for sure," admitted Donald. "I just caught a glimpse as the torch fell among them, but it was so quickly extinguished by the wriggling mass I only shot once for fear of hitting you."

"It was definitely tough," Donald admitted. "I just saw a flash when the torch landed among them, but it went out so fast because of the writhing crowd that I only fired once out of worry that I might hit you."

"It was the darkness that frightened me," Strong explained feebly. "If I hadn't let go my torch to hold on with both hands, I don't think I would have minded so much. But the darkness hid what was below and it just seemed as though they were right after me. I'd have been a goner sure if it hadn't been for good old Ambrosio," and he laid his hand affectionately on the ape's head.

"It was the darkness that scared me," Strong said weakly. "If I hadn't dropped my flashlight to grab on with both hands, I don’t think I would have cared as much. But the darkness covered up what was below, and it felt like they were right on my tail. I definitely would have been finished if it weren’t for good old Ambrosio," he said, putting his hand lovingly on the ape's head.

"Do you think you'll be able to climb out of the mine?" asked Billie as they reached the main shaft.

"Do you think you can climb out of the mine?" Billie asked as they got to the main shaft.

"Yes, with Ambrosio's aid; but I'm going out first. I don't think I have nerve enough left right now to be the last out."

"Yeah, with Ambrosio's help; but I'm going out first. I don't think I have enough nerve left to be the last one out."

The exit from the mine was much slower than the[Pg 57] descent had been, but in the course of an hour they were all once more out under the stars.

The exit from the mine took much longer than the[Pg 57] descent had, but after about an hour, they were all back out under the stars.

"What about the bandits?" queried Billie.

"What about the bandits?" Billie asked.

"Take my advice," said Strong, "and let them alone. This is none of your quarrel. If the Mexicans want to fight among themselves, let them. It's a family quarrel and you will only make matters worse by interfering. The time may come when these very men may prove your best friends."

"Take my advice," said Strong, "and leave them be. This isn’t your fight. If the Mexicans want to battle it out, let them. It's a family issue, and stepping in will only make things worse. There might come a time when these same men could become your best allies."

"That's the advice I gave when we first discovered them to-day. I wish now we had all followed it."

"That's the advice I gave when we first found them today. I wish now that we had all followed it."

"If we are not going to do anything," declared Adrian, "the quicker we get out of here the better."

"If we're not going to do anything," Adrian said, "the sooner we get out of here, the better."

"I consider that more good advice," laughed Billie, "especially as I am just reminded that I haven't had a bite to eat since noon. But I have no horse."

"I think that's pretty good advice," laughed Billie, "especially since I just realized I haven't eaten anything since noon. But I don't have a horse."

"That's easily remedied," replied Strong.

"That's an easy fix," replied Strong.

He went into the old ruin and in a few minutes returned with a very good animal, all saddled and bridled.

He went into the old ruins and, after a few minutes, came back with a really nice horse, fully saddled and bridled.

"It will not be missed," he said. "Now ride for your lives. Take the trail to the left and don't let moonlight catch you within five miles of here."

"It won't be missed," he said. "Now ride for your lives. Take the trail on the left and don't let the moonlight catch you within five miles of here."

"Aren't you coming with us?" asked Donald.

"Aren't you coming with us?" Donald asked.

"No! I am better off here."

"No! I'm better off here."

"How will you account for your white hair?"

"How will you explain your white hair?"

"I'll tell them it is a charm. They'll believe it [Pg 58] and it will make me that much more valuable. Now go!"

"I'll tell them it's a charm. They'll believe it [Pg 58] and it'll make me even more valuable. Now go!"

Without wasting more words the boys put spurs to their horses and were soon out of the basin and on their way to Pachuca.

Without wasting any more words, the boys kicked their horses into gear and quickly left the valley, heading towards Pachuca.

"It seems like a year since we came down here," remarked Adrian to Billie as they galloped along.

"It feels like we've been down here for a year," Adrian said to Billie as they rode along.

"It sure does," was the reply as Billie rubbed his stomach suggestively. "I'll never go out again as long as I'm in this revolutionary republic without a haversack full of grub."

"It really does," was the reply as Billie rubbed his stomach playfully. "I'll never go out again as long as I'm in this revolutionary republic without a backpack full of food."

"Who said grub?" called back Donald.

"Who said food?" called back Donald.

"What a question," laughed Adrian. "Who is it that's always hungry? It's all he thinks about."

"What a question," laughed Adrian. "Who's always hungry? That's all he thinks about."

"Oh, it is, eh?" from Billie. "Well, I'm thinking about something else now. There's the moon coming up over the valley and we're not three miles from the old Rosario. We'd better keep our eyes peeled and see that our shooting irons are in shape. We may have to fight our way home even yet."

"Oh, really?" Billie said. "Well, I'm focused on something else now. The moon is rising over the valley and we're only three miles from the old Rosario. We should stay alert and make sure our guns are ready. We might still have to fight our way home."

As though to verify the prediction there appeared at the moment the figure of a solitary horseman silhouetted against the rising moon.

As if to confirm the prediction, a lone horseman appeared right at that moment, outlined against the rising moon.

"You're a prophet of evil all right," said Adrian. "Now what?"

"You're definitely a prophet of doom," Adrian said. "What's next?"

"Just keep on riding."

"Just keep riding."

"But that chap is right in our way."

"But that guy is in our way."

"Then ride him down. He'll be worse scared than we are."

"Then chase him down. He'll be more scared than we are."

The advice seemed good and the boys spurred[Pg 59] forward.

The advice sounded solid, and the boys pushed[Pg 59] ahead.

"If you think he means us any harm," Donald remarked, "I might take a shot at him."

"If you think he wants to harm us," Donald said, "I might take a shot at him."

"I don't believe he does."

"I don't think he does."

Again Billie proved a good prophet as the rider rode directly toward them, waving his hat in his hand.

Again, Billie proved to be a good predictor as the rider approached them, waving his hat.

"It's Tony," exclaimed Pedro as the rider approached a little nearer.

"It's Tony," shouted Pedro as the rider came a bit closer.

Tony was one of Gen. Sanchez' servants.

Tony was one of General Sanchez's servants.

"Why, so it is," laughed Donald. "I suppose he is out looking for us."

"Yeah, I guess so," laughed Donald. "I bet he's out searching for us."

Which was exactly the case. The news of the fight had reached Pachuca along with the part the boys had played in saving the bullion, and Pedro's father had heard it along with the others.

Which was exactly the case. The news of the fight had reached Pachuca along with the role the boys had played in saving the bullion, and Pedro's father had heard it along with everyone else.

Later, word had been brought that one of the boys was missing and the others had gone to look for him. When none of them returned after all these hours, Gen. Sanchez had organized a searching party, of which Tony proved to be the advance guard.

Later, it was reported that one of the boys was missing, and the others had gone to search for him. When none of them returned after all this time, Gen. Sanchez organized a search party, with Tony acting as the front line.

A few minutes later, several horsemen dashed up and the boys were given a rousing reception.

A few minutes later, several riders came charging in, and the boys were warmly welcomed.

"The Jefe politico is waiting to greet you," Tony told the boys.

"The Jefe politico is waiting to meet you," Tony told the guys.

The jefe politico is the mayor.

The jefe politico is the mayor.

Billie smiled broadly and once more rubbed his stomach.

Billie smiled widely and rubbed his stomach again.

"This begins to look encouraging," he remarked[Pg 60] to Pedro. "I think I can taste the good things already."

"This is starting to look promising," he said[Pg 60] to Pedro. "I feel like I can already taste the good things."

Half an hour later the boys reached the city and were given a cheer as they passed through the main street and up to Gen. Sanchez' home, which was located half a block from the plaza. And in another ten minutes Billie was facing the mayor over a plate of steaming soup, while a mozo stood at his back waiting to serve the leg of a twenty-five pound turkey. Raising his eyes from the table, he caught sight of what was coming and gave Donald, who sat next to him, a dig in the ribs with his elbow.

Half an hour later, the boys arrived in the city and received cheers as they walked down the main street toward Gen. Sanchez's house, which was just half a block from the plaza. In another ten minutes, Billie found himself sitting across from the mayor with a plate of hot soup in front of him, while a waiter stood behind him ready to serve a leg of a twenty-five-pound turkey. As he looked up from the table, he noticed what was coming and nudged Donald, who was sitting next to him, in the ribs with his elbow.

"How's this for a prophet of evil?" he asked.

"How about this for a prophet of doom?" he asked.

Donald took a look at the great bird which was rapidly falling into pieces under Gen. Sanchez' skillful hand, and remarked with a wink:

Donald glanced at the big bird that was quickly falling apart under Gen. Sanchez's expert touch and said with a wink:

"Great!"

Awesome!


CHAPTER VII.

THE INSULT TO THE FLAG.

A week later, or, to be more exact, on April 10, 1914, the Broncho Rider Boys and their friend Pedro were back in the City of Mexico. During the two weeks they had been at Pachuca, many changes had taken place and on the morning in question they had just finished their coffee in the breakfast [Pg 61] room when Guadalupe, Pedro's sister, brought in the morning paper.

A week later, or more specifically, on April 10, 1914, the Broncho Rider Boys and their friend Pedro were back in Mexico City. During the two weeks they had spent in Pachuca, a lot had changed, and that morning they had just finished their coffee in the breakfast [Pg 61] room when Guadalupe, Pedro's sister, brought in the morning paper.

"What's the news?" asked Adrian.

"What's the update?" asked Adrian.

Guadalupe glanced at the paper and hid it behind her back without making any reply.

Guadalupe looked at the paper and tucked it behind her back without saying anything.

"Why, Sister!" exclaimed Pedro with all the dignity of his sixteen years. "How can you be so rude?"

"Why, Sister!" Pedro exclaimed with all the dignity of his sixteen years. "How can you be so rude?"

"She's only joking," laughed Billie, who was always found on Guadalupe's side when any argument took place. "Come, tell us! What is it?"

"She's just kidding," laughed Billie, who was always on Guadalupe's side during any argument. "Come on, tell us! What is it?"

Guadalupe shook her head.

Guadalupe shook her head.

"Oh, I can't," she replied in a pained voice.

"Oh, I can't," she said, her voice filled with pain.

"Why not?" from Billie.

"Why not?" from Billie.

"It says we are going to have war with the United States and I don't believe it."

"It says we're going to go to war with the United States, and I don't believe it."

"Of course you don't," replied Billie. "Neither does any one else."

"Of course you don't," Billie replied. "No one else does either."

"Let me see," said Pedro sternly.

"Let me see," Pedro said firmly.

Slowly the girl handed her brother the paper.

Slowly, the girl passed her brother the paper.

He opened it and read.

He opened it and read it.

"A party of American marines was arrested in Tampico yesterday for landing on Mexican soil with arms in their hands. They were marched through the streets under a heavy guard and lodged in jail. After a parley with the American Admiral, Mayo, the commandant of the city finally released them upon the assurance of the Admiral that it should not occur again."

"A group of American marines was arrested in Tampico yesterday for landing on Mexican soil armed. They were escorted through the streets under heavy guard and taken to jail. After discussions with American Admiral Mayo, the city's commander eventually released them after the Admiral assured that it wouldn’t happen again."

"Well, if it was only a mistake, that doesn't mean [Pg 62] war," laughed Billie, but Donald's face took on a more serious look.

"Well, if it was just a mistake, that doesn't mean [Pg 62] war," laughed Billie, but Donald's expression became more serious.

"That isn't all," said Pedro.

"That's not all," said Pedro.

"Well," from Billie, "let's have the rest of it."

"Well," Billie said, "let's hear the rest of it."

"The American Admiral has now declared that the men did not land on Mexican soil with arms in their hands, but that they were in their boat at the pier when arrested. He claims that they were taken from under the American flag——"

"The American Admiral has now stated that the men did not set foot on Mexican soil with weapons in their hands, but that they were in their boat at the dock when they were detained. He argues that they were taken from under the American flag——"

"What?" almost shouted Billie, springing to his feet. "Taken from under the American flag? Well, I'll bet that will mean war—unless," he added after a brief pause, "Gen. Huerta apologizes."

"What?" almost shouted Billie, jumping to his feet. "Taken from under the American flag? Well, I bet that will lead to war—unless," he added after a short pause, "Gen. Huerta apologizes."

"Why should he apologize?" asked Pedro.

"Why should he say sorry?" asked Pedro.

"For insulting the American flag."

"For disrespecting the American flag."

"That's what the American Admiral says," interrupted Guadalupe, "and he threatens to fire on the city."

"That's what the American Admiral says," interrupted Guadalupe, "and he's threatening to open fire on the city."

"And I'll bet he'll do it," said Adrian.

"And I'll bet he will," said Adrian.

"If he does we'll sink his ships," said Pedro.

"If he does, we'll sink his ships," Pedro said.

"What with?" asked Billie sarcastically. "Why, Admiral Mayo could blow Tampico out of the water."

"What with?" Billie asked sarcastically. "Admiral Mayo could blow Tampico out of the water."

"If he does, the Mexicans will march on Washington," from Pedro.

"If he does, the Mexicans will march on Washington," from Pedro.

"What?" from Donald. "March on Washington? Why, Huerta can't hardly keep Carranza out of the City of Mexico."

"What?" Donald said. "March on Washington? Huerta can barely keep Carranza out of Mexico City."

"But if your admiral fires on Tampico, Carranza will help Gen. Huerta," declared Pedro.

"But if your admiral attacks Tampico, Carranza will support Gen. Huerta," Pedro declared.

"Do you really think so?" asked Adrian.[Pg 63]

"Do you actually think that?" asked Adrian.[Pg 63]

"I know it. We may have our little family troubles down here in Mexico, but if the United States should interfere, we'd all turn in and fight her."

"I get it. We might have our minor family issues down here in Mexico, but if the United States were to interfere, we'd all band together and fight her."

Billie was about to reply when Gen. Sanchez entered the room.

Billie was about to respond when Gen. Sanchez walked into the room.

"I see you have been reading the news," he said calmly.

"I see you've been reading the news," he said calmly.

"And discussing it too," said Donald.

"And talking about it too," said Donald.

"Which we had better not at present," replied the General. "You boys are our guests and as long as you are, you are our friends; but I am afraid there is serious trouble coming and I think it will be much better if you make arrangements at once to return to the United States. As you know, I am not a favorite with the present administration and I might not be able to protect you."

"Which is probably not a good idea right now," replied the General. "You guys are our guests, and while you are, you’re our friends; but I’m afraid serious trouble is on the way, and I think it would be best if you make plans right away to return to the United States. As you know, I’m not exactly in good standing with the current administration, and I might not be able to keep you safe."

"We can ask the protection of the American Ambassador," said Donald.

"We can ask for the American Ambassador's help," said Donald.

Gen. Sanchez smiled kindly.

Gen. Sanchez smiled warmly.

"The American Ambassador may be asked to leave."

"The American Ambassador might be asked to leave."

The boys looked serious.

The guys looked serious.

"Do you really think it is as bad as that?" asked Adrian.

"Do you actually think it's that bad?" asked Adrian.

"I fear so. Later dispatches from Tampico state that the American Admiral has demanded a salute of twenty-one guns to the American flag. I know Gen. Huerta well enough to know that he will never order the salute."

"I’m afraid so. More recent reports from Tampico say that the American Admiral has asked for a twenty-one-gun salute to the American flag. I know General Huerta well enough to be sure that he will never give that order."

"Then what will happen?" asked Donald.[Pg 64]

"Then what will happen?" asked Donald.[Pg 64]

"No one can say. I understand that the American government has placed the matter in the hands of Admiral Fletcher, the ranking officer, who is in charge of the Atlantic fleet off Vera Cruz."

"No one can say. I understand that the American government has handed the situation over to Admiral Fletcher, the senior officer, who is in charge of the Atlantic fleet off Vera Cruz."

"Do you think we should go at once?" queried Billie.

"Do you think we should go right now?" asked Billie.

"Yes, I think it would be better. I will make such arrangements as I can for your transportation to Vera Cruz. In the meantime you had better go and register yourselves at the United States Embassy. I am never sure of Gen. Huerta."

"Yes, I think that would be better. I'll make whatever arrangements I can for your transportation to Vera Cruz. In the meantime, you should go and register at the United States Embassy. I'm never sure about Gen. Huerta."

Without further discussion the boys prepared to take Gen. Sanchez' advice, and, donning their hats, started for the embassy, leaving Pedro much chagrined and Guadalupe in tears.

Without further discussion, the boys got ready to take General Sanchez's advice, and, putting on their hats, headed for the embassy, leaving Pedro feeling upset and Guadalupe in tears.

"I can't see why there has to be war!" she declared. "Why can't men behave themselves?"

"I can't understand why we need to have war!" she said. "Why can't people just act decently?"

"What do girls know about war?" asked Pedro.

"What do girls know about war?" Pedro asked.

"They know it's terrible and takes their fathers and brothers, that's what they know, and they wish they didn't have to know that."

"They know it's awful and takes their dads and brothers, that's what they understand, and they wish they didn't have to know that."

Pedro made no reply, but went to his room, where he selected from among his most cherished belongings a gift for each of his guests—three beautiful opals—and laid them upon their respective suit cases.

Pedro didn't say anything but went to his room, where he picked out a gift for each of his guests from among his favorite belongings—three beautiful opals—and placed them on their respective suitcases.

When the Broncho Rider Boys arrived at the embassy they found a large crowd of Americans already assembled. Word had been circulated that it would be wise for all of them to leave Mexico and[Pg 65] those who could were going, while many men whose business detained them in Mexico were sending their families. All had come to the embassy for information and to register.

When the Broncho Rider Boys arrived at the embassy, they found a big crowd of Americans already gathered. News had spread that it would be a good idea for everyone to leave Mexico, and those who could were heading out, while many men whose work kept them in Mexico were sending their families away. Everyone had come to the embassy for information and to register.

As a result it was late in the afternoon before the boys returned to Gen. Sanchez' residence. But late as they were, the general had not yet come in. They went to their room and when they saw the gifts which Pedro had laid on each valise, they could not keep back the tears.

As a result, it was late in the afternoon by the time the boys got back to General Sanchez's house. Even though they were late, the general still hadn't arrived. They went to their room, and when they saw the gifts Pedro had placed on each suitcase, they couldn't hold back their tears.

"Well, there's one thing," declared Billie as he drew the back of his hand across his eyes, "we don't have to fight Pedro, no matter what comes. I'm going to hunt him up and tell him so."

"Well, there's one thing," Billie said as he wiped his eyes with the back of his hand, "we don’t have to fight Pedro, no matter what happens. I'm going to find him and say that."

And he did.

And he did.

It was some hours later when Gen. Sanchez returned and announced that it would be impossible for the boys to get transportation to Vera Cruz for two or three days, as the track had been torn up in the neighborhood of Cordoba, but that he had been promised that they would be given safe conduct as soon as the track was repaired.

It was a few hours later when Gen. Sanchez came back and said that it would be impossible for the boys to get a ride to Vera Cruz for two or three days, since the tracks had been damaged near Cordoba. However, he had been assured that they would be granted safe passage as soon as the tracks were fixed.

It was three days later, therefore, before the boys were able to leave, during which time they remained in the house at Gen. Sanchez' request to avoid any unpleasantness, which might make trouble for him.

It was three days later, then, before the boys could leave. During that time, they stayed in the house at Gen. Sanchez's request to avoid any issues that could cause trouble for him.

On the morning of the 13th the boys bade good-bye to their host and his family and were driven in an automobile to the station. Already there were [Pg 66] more than enough persons to fill four trains, and the guards were permitting only those to board the cars who had passes signed by the Mexican provost marshal.

On the morning of the 13th, the boys said goodbye to their host and his family and were driven by car to the station. There were already [Pg 66] more than enough people to fill four trains, and the guards were only allowing those with passes signed by the Mexican provost marshal to board the cars.

Thanks to Gen. Sanchez, our boys had been provided with such passes, but they were not allowed to take their rifles or revolvers aboard the train. They had no more than found seats and made themselves comfortable than the conductor shouted "Vamanos," and the train pulled slowly out of the shed.

Thanks to Gen. Sanchez, our guys had been given those passes, but they couldn't bring their rifles or revolvers on the train. They had barely found their seats and settled in when the conductor yelled, "Vamanos," and the train slowly rolled out of the station.

"Well," remarked Donald as they rolled slowly along, "this is a pretty tough ending to a friendly visit. I think I've seen about all I want of Mexico for some time to come."

"Well," Donald said as they drove slowly along, "this is a pretty rough ending to a friendly visit. I think I've seen about all I want of Mexico for a while."

"What do you suppose will happen?" asked Billie. "Do you think we'll really go to war with Mexico unless Gen. Huerta orders the salute?"

"What do you think will happen?" asked Billie. "Do you really think we'll go to war with Mexico unless Gen. Huerta gives the order for the salute?"

"I don't know," was Donald's cautious reply. "I hope not."

"I don't know," Donald replied cautiously. "I hope not."

"And I hope we do!" exclaimed a somewhat florid gentleman who sat in the seat ahead and who had overheard the conversation. "I'd just like an opportunity to come down here with an army and wipe the whole nation off the earth."

"And I hope we do!" shouted a rather colorful man sitting in the seat in front of us who had been listening to the conversation. "I'd love a chance to come down here with an army and wipe the whole nation off the map."

Donald made no reply, but Adrian asked sympathetically: "Have they treated you badly, sir?"

Donald didn't respond, but Adrian asked with concern, "Have they treated you poorly, sir?"

"Have they treated me badly? Well, I should say so. They wouldn't let me out of my hotel for two days and now they have refused to carry my [Pg 67] trunk and made me leave it with the express company. I guess they don't know who I am."

"Have they treated me badly? Absolutely. They kept me cooped up in my hotel for two days, and now they won’t carry my [Pg 67] trunk, forcing me to leave it with the express company. I guess they don’t realize who I am."

"I'm sure they do not, sir."

"I’m sure they don’t, sir."

"Well, I'll show them who I am as soon as I get to Vera Cruz and can see Admiral Fletcher. He'll know how to protect Americans!"

"Well, I'll show them who I am as soon as I get to Vera Cruz and can meet Admiral Fletcher. He'll know how to keep Americans safe!"

"I'm sure he will, sir."

"I'm sure he will, sir."

"And when the first marine lands, I want to be right there with a rifle to help drive the Mexicans off the earth."

"And when the first marine lands, I want to be right there with a rifle to help push the Mexicans off the land."

"It would be wise not to say too much," whispered Adrian. "I see that officer in the end of the car has his eye on you. He may speak English."

"It would be smart not to say too much," whispered Adrian. "I see that officer at the end of the car is watching you. He might speak English."

"I don't care who hears me," said the florid man angrily. "I mean it."

"I don't care who hears me," the flushed man said angrily. "I mean it."

At the same moment a guard who had approached from the other end of the car laid his hand upon the angry man's shoulder.

At the same time, a guard who had come from the other end of the car put his hand on the angry man's shoulder.

"If the Señor is not satisfied," he said, "we shall be pleased to send him back to the City of Mexico."

"If the Señor isn't satisfied," he said, "we'll be happy to send him back to Mexico City."

"Oh, no-no-no," was the stammering reply. "I am very well satisfied. All I want is to get out of the country."

"Oh, no-no-no," was the stammering reply. "I'm really satisfied. All I want is to leave the country."

"Let us hope there will be no trouble about that," was the polite response, and the florid man lapsed into silence.

"Let's hope there won't be any issues with that," was the polite reply, and the overly expressive man fell silent.

Ordinarily it is a pleasant day's journey from the City of Mexico to the seaport city of Vera Cruz; or if one prefers he may make a night ride of it in times of peace. The train which left the City of [Pg 68] Mexico that April morning made no such time. After a tiresome all-day ride with numerous aggravating stops, when darkness fell they were still on the plateau of Mexico, some miles west of Orizaba, running slowly for fear some stray bunch of Carranzistas or Zapatistas might have torn up a length or two of track.

Usually, it's a nice day trip from Mexico City to the port city of Veracruz; or if you prefer, you can take a night ride during peaceful times. The train that left Mexico City that April morning was not on schedule. After a long, tiring day with many frustrating stops, when night came, they were still on the plateau of Mexico, a few miles west of Orizaba, moving slowly to avoid any damaged tracks that might have been torn up by stray groups of Carranzistas or Zapatistas.

It was possibly an hour later that the engine gave a furious jerk, followed by a bump and another jerk, and then the train came to a dead stop.

It was probably an hour later when the engine suddenly jolted, followed by a bump and another jolt, and then the train came to a complete stop.

In a minute everybody was on his feet asking everybody else what had happened. As no one knew, there was a general movement for the doors, as it was too dark to see much from the windows.

In a minute, everyone was on their feet asking each other what had happened. Since no one knew, there was a collective rush toward the doors since it was too dark to see much from the windows.

"Sit down, everybody," ordered the guard. "There is no danger, but we have stopped on a high trestle."

"Sit down, everyone," the guard commanded. "There's no danger, but we've stopped on a high trestle."

The passengers obeyed, realizing the danger of leaving the coaches. There was a general round of conversation, and then as the train did not start, people settled back in their seats and tried to sleep.

The passengers complied, understanding the risk of getting off the coaches. There was a collective chatter, and then as the train didn’t move, people settled into their seats and attempted to sleep.

Some minutes later Billie gave Adrian a nudge with his elbow.

Some minutes later, Billie nudged Adrian with his elbow.

"Are you asleep?" he asked.

"Are you awake?" he asked.

"No. Why?"

"No. Why not?"

"I've just been looking out of the window. We're not on a trestle."

"I've just been looking out the window. We're not on a support beam."

"No? Well, what of it?"

"No? So what?"

"Only that the guard was lying. What did he do it for?"

"Only that the guard was lying. Why did he do it?”

"I don't know. Because he was a Mexican, I[Pg 69] guess. Go on to sleep."

"I don't know. Maybe it's because he was Mexican, I[Pg 69] guess. Just go to sleep."

"That isn't the answer, although it's pretty good. They have some scheme. I wouldn't be surprised if they were going to keep us prisoners somewhere around here."

"That's not the answer, but it's pretty close. They have some plan. I wouldn't be shocked if they were going to hold us captive somewhere around here."

"Nonsense. Go on to sleep."

"Nonsense. Go to sleep."

But Billie was not satisfied. He leaned over and tried to talk to Donald, but he was fast asleep.

But Billie wasn't satisfied. He leaned over and tried to talk to Donald, but he was sound asleep.

"I think I'll go on a little scouting expedition," he muttered. "I need some exercise."

"I think I'll go on a little scouting trip," he muttered. "I need some exercise."

He arose, stretched himself and walked slowly toward the door, which stood wide open.

He got up, stretched, and walked slowly toward the door, which was wide open.

"I wonder where the guard is?" he thought. "It's mighty funny he'd go and leave the coach like this."

"I wonder where the guard is?" he thought. "It's really strange that he would just leave the coach like this."

He stepped on to the coach ahead. The same condition existed.

He stepped onto the coach ahead. The same situation was present.

Billie's curiosity got the best of him and he jumped out onto the ground. It was pitch dark, but he had not advanced more than twenty steps before he discovered groups of men seated upon the grass. A second glance convinced him they were armed.

Billie's curiosity got the best of him, and he jumped down to the ground. It was pitch dark, but he had only taken about twenty steps before he noticed groups of men sitting on the grass. A second look convinced him they were armed.

He drew back and stood beside the coach, where he thought fast.

He stepped back and stood next to the carriage, thinking quickly.

"There's one of two things," he soliloquized. "We are either prisoners or else we are being guarded against an expected attack. Whichever it is, this is no time for the Broncho Rider Boys to be asleep. I'll go and tell the others."

"There's one of two things," he said to himself. "We are either prisoners or we're being watched for an expected attack. Either way, this is no time for the Broncho Rider Boys to be sleeping. I'll go tell the others."

He started to climb onto the car, but a guard [Pg 70] appeared on the platform and ordered him away at the point of his bayonet.

He began to climb onto the car, but a guard [Pg 70] showed up on the platform and told him to back off at the threat of his bayonet.

"I'm a passenger," explained Billie.

"I'm a passenger," Billie said.

"Go away!" was the reply, emphasized by a quick advance of the bayonet.

"Go away!" was the response, highlighted by a swift movement of the bayonet.

Seeing that it was no time to argue, Billie slid back into the darkness.

Seeing that it was not the time to argue, Billie slipped back into the darkness.


CHAPTER VIII.

TREACHERY FOILED.

Broncho Billie had been in too many unpleasant places to be at all worried over his predicament, but he was much concerned about the condition of the train and its passengers, practically all of whom were Americans and a large majority of whom were women and children.

Broncho Billie had been in too many tough situations to worry much about his own problems, but he was really concerned about the state of the train and its passengers, almost all of whom were Americans, and a large number of them were women and children.

"It would be fierce," he mused, "to have them held here, or in a detention camp as prisoners; and it would be worse if we should be attacked by an overwhelming force of revolutionists. I've just got to know the truth."

"It would be intense," he thought, "to have them kept here, or in a detention camp as prisoners; and it would be even worse if we were attacked by a huge force of revolutionaries. I just need to know the truth."

He glanced up at the coach with its dimly lighted windows.

He looked up at the coach with its dimly lit windows.

"I wish I could talk to old Don. He most always knows what to do. But how can I get at him?"

"I wish I could talk to old Don. He usually knows what to do. But how can I reach him?"

He sneaked out to where he could see the coach [Pg 71] platform. The guard was still there, as well as the guard on the other car.

He quietly slipped out to a spot where he could see the coach [Pg 71] platform. The guard was still there, along with the guard on the other car.

"Worse and more of it," he exclaimed.

"Worse and more of it," he exclaimed.

Then he examined the car, trying to determine at which window he had been seated. Several were open, and he determined to try and speak to some one.

Then he checked out the car, trying to figure out which window he had been sitting by. Several were open, and he decided to try and talk to someone.

"Our seats are not far from here," he thought as he stopped under the second one. "I'll try this."

"Our seats aren't far from here," he thought as he paused under the second one. "I'll give this a shot."

He picked up a stone about as big as an egg and tossed it into the window. A howl from a child followed the act and Billie ducked under the car. He could hear the mother pacifying it, but evidently she, too, had been asleep and had not discovered the stone.

He grabbed a stone roughly the size of an egg and threw it through the window. A child's scream followed, and Billie ducked under the car. He could hear the mother calming the child, but it was clear she had also been sleeping and hadn't noticed the stone.

"I think I know just which child it is," said Billie with a grin, "and this next open window must be ours."

"I think I know exactly which kid it is," Billie said with a grin, "and this next open window has to be ours."

He picked up another stone and tossed it in to his second choice, this time with better results.

He picked up another stone and threw it into his second choice, this time with better results.

Donald had just aroused from a nap, and, missing Billie, was looking for him. Not seeing him in the car, he was about to look out of the window when the stone hit him on the chin.

Donald had just woken up from a nap and, missing Billie, was searching for him. Not seeing him in the car, he was about to look out the window when a stone hit him on the chin.

"Ouch!" he exclaimed as he started back.

"Ouch!" he shouted as he recoiled.

Billie heard the exclamation and gave the familiar whistle.

Billie heard the shout and let out the familiar whistle.

Donald was on the alert in an instant. Looking up and down the car to be sure he was not being watched, he stuck his head out of the window.

Donald was on high alert right away. Checking to see if anyone was watching him, he poked his head out of the window.

"What is it?" he asked.[Pg 72]

"What is it?" he asked.[Pg 72]

"Trouble," was Billie's laconic reply. "Come out."

"Trouble," Billie replied briefly. "Come out."

"How can I? The guard is at the door."

"How can I? The guard is at the door."

"Jump out of the window."

"Jump out the window."

"They might see me."

"They might notice me."

Billie thought fast.

Billie thought quickly.

"Let Ad stand between you and the door."

"Let Ad stand between you and the door."

"Great," from Donald.

"Awesome," from Donald.

He aroused Adrian and told him the situation.

He woke Adrian and explained the situation to him.

"You stay in the train," he said, "and we'll keep you posted as to what is going on outside. If there is any real danger we will give the alarm."

"You stay on the train," he said, "and we'll keep you updated on what's happening outside. If there's any real danger, we'll sound the alarm."

He picked up his overcoat and pretended to be fixing a pillow. Adrian did the same. Then, while the guard's back was turned, he dropped out of the window.

He grabbed his overcoat and pretended to adjust a pillow. Adrian did the same. Then, while the guard's back was turned, he slipped out of the window.

Billie was beside him when he rose to his feet.

Billie was next to him when he stood up.

"This way, Don," he whispered. "Let's get out into the dark and hold a council of war."

"This way, Don," he whispered. "Let's get outside into the dark and have a war council."

They glided out into darkness, but where they could keep their eyes on the engine.

They moved out into the darkness, but where they could keep their eyes on the engine.

"Now tell me about it," said Don.

"Now tell me about it," Don said.

Billie told him what he had discovered.

Billie told him what he had found out.

"It does look strange," Donald admitted. "Have you any plan?"

"It does look weird," Donald admitted. "Do you have any plans?"

"I haven't an idea above an oyster," was the characteristic reply.

"I have no ideas at all," was the typical response.

Donald scratched his ear reflectively.

Donald scratched his ear thoughtfully.

"How would it do," he finally asked, "to sneak [Pg 73] over by the soldiers and see if we can't pick up some scrap of conversation that may give us a clue as to what is going on?"

"How about we sneak [Pg 73] over by the soldiers and see if we can catch some bits of conversation that might give us a clue about what's happening?"

"Fine. We must keep together, though. We might never find each other in the dark if we should become separated."

"Okay. We need to stick together, though. We might never find each other in the dark if we get separated."

Silently they crawled toward the spot where Billie had seen the soldiers. When they did not hear any sign of them after several minutes' crawling they stopped to listen.

Silently, they crept toward the place where Billie had spotted the soldiers. When they didn’t hear any indication of their presence after several minutes of crawling, they paused to listen.

"There surely was a squad here a few minutes ago," declared Billie. "They must have moved."

"There definitely was a group here just a few minutes ago," Billie said. "They must have left."

They remained silently thoughtful for several minutes, but all was as silent as a graveyard.

They stayed quietly deep in thought for several minutes, but everything was as silent as a graveyard.

"That's mighty funny," said Billie. "I know I was not mistaken. Let's go back by the train."

"That's really funny," said Billie. "I'm sure I wasn't mistaken. Let's go back by train."

They turned for that purpose and could see a group of figures at the platform of each coach.

They turned to look and saw a group of people on the platform of each train car.

"That's the answer," exclaimed Billie. "They have surrounded the train. Now let's see what will happen."

"That's it," Billie shouted. "They've surrounded the train. Now let's see what happens."

They had not long to wait as an officer shortly boarded each car and a minute later there was a commotion among the passengers.

They didn’t have to wait long as an officer quickly boarded each car, and a minute later, there was a stir among the passengers.

Drawing a little nearer, the boys could hear the officer in the car nearest them explaining that the passengers would be obliged to alight and change trains.

Drawing a little closer, the boys could hear the officer in the car closest to them explaining that the passengers would have to get off and switch trains.

"The track has been torn up ahead of us," he said, [Pg 74] "and we shall have to walk nearly a mile to where the train is that came up from Vera Cruz."

"The track has been destroyed up ahead," he said, [Pg 74] "and we'll have to walk almost a mile to reach the train that came in from Vera Cruz."

This had been quite the customary thing in Mexico for some months and the passengers prepared to obey.

This had been a regular occurrence in Mexico for several months, and the passengers got ready to comply.

"I don't believe it is true," said Billie to Donald.

"I don't think that's true," Billie said to Donald.

"We can soon find out," declared Donald. "Let's walk down the track a piece. We can easily keep ahead of the crowd."

"We can find out soon," said Donald. "Let's walk down the path for a bit. We can easily stay ahead of the crowd."

Avoiding the glare of the locomotive's headlight, the boys hurried down the track and when far enough away from the train to feel secure, they took the middle of the track.

Avoiding the bright light of the train's headlamp, the boys ran down the tracks, and when they were far enough from the train to feel safe, they took the center of the tracks.

"This is far enough ahead," said Donald, "to keep out of sight and the track is all right so far. I don't believe it is torn up at all."

"This is far enough ahead," Donald said, "to stay out of sight and the track looks good so far. I don't think it's damaged at all."

"Then what is up?"

"So, what's up?"

"That is what I've been trying to decide for nearly an hour," replied Billie. "It looks as though they intended to make all the Americans prisoners."

"That's what I've been trying to figure out for almost an hour," Billie replied. "It seems like they planned to take all the Americans as prisoners."

"But what for?"

"What's the point?"

"Why, for hostages, to be sure. Don't you remember how Cæsar took a lot of the Helvetians for hostages?"

"Well, it's for hostages, obviously. Don't you remember how Caesar took a bunch of the Helvetians as hostages?"

"By George!" from Donald. "I believe you are right. Do you suppose it is Huerta's orders?"

"Wow!" Donald said. "I think you're right. Do you think it's Huerta's orders?"

"I expect so. He hates Americans."

"I think so. He hates Americans."

While the boys had been talking the passengers had been taken from the train and were now coming toward them.

While the boys were talking, the passengers had been taken off the train and were now walking toward them.

"Let's keep just far enough ahead to see what[Pg 75] will happen," said Donald. "We must get in touch with Adrian somehow."

"Let's stay just far enough ahead to see what[Pg 75] will happen," Donald said. "We need to reach out to Adrian somehow."

They started ahead, but it speedily developed that the others were not following. Instead they had been halted a short distance from the locomotive, back from the track, and surrounded by soldiers.

They started off first, but it quickly became clear that the others were not following. Instead, they had been stopped a short distance from the train, away from the tracks, and surrounded by soldiers.

"There seems to be a hitch somewhere," Don finally remarked. "They don't seem to know just what they do want to do."

"There seems to be a problem somewhere," Don finally said. "They don't really know what they want to do."

"Come on back and find out," said Billie. "It's up to us to do something."

"Come back and see," Billie said. "It's our responsibility to take action."

Cautiously they crept back to where they could hear the conversation among the passengers and the questions they asked the guard. Some were laughing and more were expressing indignation. A few of the women were crying, but above all they could hear the voice of the florid-faced man telling what he would do as soon as he could get into touch with Admiral Fletcher.

Cautiously, they moved back to where they could hear the conversation among the passengers and the questions they were asking the guard. Some were laughing, while others were expressing anger. A few women were crying, but above all, they could hear the voice of the chubby-faced man explaining what he would do as soon as he could get in touch with Admiral Fletcher.

"Which won't be very soon, unless I'm mistaken," laughed Donald.

"That won’t be anytime soon, unless I’m wrong," laughed Donald.

Presently some one began to whistle a popular air, but in such a way that the boys recognized the well-known whistle of Adrian.

Currently, someone started to whistle a popular tune, but in such a way that the boys recognized the familiar whistle of Adrian.

"Do you hear that?" asked Billie. "Ad wants to know what we are doing."

"Do you hear that?" Billie asked. "Ad wants to know what we're doing."

"He'll have to want for the present," said Don, "but there go a couple of officers back to the train. Let's follow them."

"He'll have to wait for now," said Don, "but there go a couple of officers heading back to the train. Let's follow them."

The boys darted into the shadow of the coaches[Pg 76] and crept back only a few steps behind what proved to be the captain in charge of the company and his second lieutenant.

The boys rushed into the shadow of the coaches[Pg 76] and quietly moved back just a few steps behind what turned out to be the captain leading the group and his second lieutenant.

"If I only had my automatic, I'd soon settle this whole matter," declared Billie.

"If I only had my gun, I'd take care of this whole situation quickly," Billie declared.

"You wouldn't hurt anybody, would you?"

"You wouldn't hurt anyone, would you?"

"I'd capture the officer and make him take us to Vera Cruz."

"I’d grab the officer and make him take us to Vera Cruz."

"Of course," from Donald. "Why didn't I think of it before? Let's do it."

"Of course," Donald said. "Why didn't I think of that earlier? Let's go for it."

"But we have no weapons."

"But we don't have weapons."

"Then we must get some."

"Then we need to get some."

"How?"

"How?"

"Keep your eyes open. There must be some way."

"Stay alert. There has to be a way."

The officers kept on their way until they reached the first Pullman, where they stopped for a minute.

The officers continued on their path until they arrived at the first Pullman, where they paused for a moment.

"Are the orders in here?" asked the captain.

"Are the orders in here?" the captain asked.

"No; the conductor has them. He wouldn't stop the train without I gave them to him."

"No; the conductor has them. He wouldn't stop the train unless I give them to him."

"Carramba! Why didn't you tell me so before? Go and take them from him and bring them here at once."

"Wow! Why didn't you tell me that earlier? Go get them from him and bring them here right now."

"Bueno, Capitan! Will you wait here?"

"Alright, Captain! Will you wait here?"

"Yes, I'll go inside. Hurry."

"Yes, I’ll go in. Hurry."

The lieutenant turned and hurried back. The boys only saved themselves from being detected by throwing themselves flat on the ground.

The lieutenant turned and rushed back. The boys only avoided being caught by throwing themselves flat on the ground.

For a moment the captain remained looking after his companion and then turned and entered the car.

For a moment, the captain continued to watch his companion and then turned and got into the car.

"We must have that order," said Donald.[Pg 77]

"We need to get that order," said Donald.[Pg 77]

"We must!" echoed Billie.

"We have to!" echoed Billie.

"Then we'll get it," they exclaimed as one.

"Then we'll get it," they exclaimed in unison.

So alike were the thoughts that passed through their minds that they did not even feel obliged to speak the plan aloud.

So similar were the thoughts in their minds that they didn't even feel the need to say the plan out loud.

"Which one of us will stop him?" asked Donald.

"Which one of us is going to stop him?" asked Donald.

"You'd better. I'm heavier and I can handle him easier."

"You should. I'm heavier, and I can manage him more easily."

They walked back some ten feet, where Donald stopped, while Billie went about ten feet farther and drew off into the darkness.

They walked back about ten feet, where Donald stopped, while Billie went another ten feet and disappeared into the darkness.

A couple of minutes later they heard the lieutenant coming. He passed Billie without seeing him.

A couple of minutes later, they heard the lieutenant approaching. He walked past Billie without noticing him.

Then Donald advanced and met him as by chance.

Then Donald moved forward and encountered him as if by coincidence.

"Who comes there?" asked the lieutenant in a sharp tone, drawing his revolver.

"Who's there?" the lieutenant asked sharply, pulling out his revolver.

"Why, hello, lieutenant," said Donald as he came close to him. "What's happened?"

"Hey there, lieutenant," Donald said as he approached him. "What’s going on?"

The lieutenant eyed him suspiciously.

The lieutenant looked at him suspiciously.

"Where did you come from?" he asked.

"Where did you come from?" he asked.

"From the rear sleeper. I woke up and found myself all alone."

"From the back of the sleeper car. I woke up and realized I was all alone."

"Humph!" grunted the lieutenant. "You must have been overlooked. Come with me."

"Humph!" the lieutenant grunted. "You must have been missed. Come with me."

He started to replace his revolver in its holster when a slight noise behind him caused him to turn his head. As he did so, Billie's fist caught him under the chin and he fell in a heap without making a sound.

He began to put his revolver back in its holster when a faint noise behind him made him turn his head. As he did, Billie’s fist landed under his chin, and he dropped to the ground without making a sound.

"Good work!" muttered Donald as he picked up[Pg 78] the revolver which the lieutenant had let fall. "Now to business."

"Great job!" muttered Donald as he picked up[Pg 78] the revolver that the lieutenant had dropped. "Now, let’s get to work."


CHAPTER IX.

DONALD'S STRATEGY.

Lifting the unconscious man in their arms, they bore him into the darkness away from the train, where he was soon deprived of his coat, hat, and weapons. Then he was gagged and securely tied with his own sabretasche.

Lifting the unconscious man in their arms, they carried him into the darkness away from the train, where he was soon stripped of his coat, hat, and weapons. Then he was gagged and tightly bound with his own sabretasche.

Donald, being nearest the lieutenant's size, donned his uniform, buckled on his sword, and with the order in his hand hastily entered the car, closely followed by Billie, with the ready revolver in his hand.

Donald, being closest to the lieutenant's size, put on his uniform, strapped on his sword, and quickly entered the car with the order in his hand, closely followed by Billie, who had his revolver ready in his hand.

The captain had thrown aside his hat and was smoking a cigarette in one of the easy seats as the boys entered. He gave them only a hasty glance as he blew a cloud of smoke into the air, and the next minute he was covered by Billie's weapon.

The captain had tossed aside his hat and was smoking a cigarette in one of the comfy chairs when the guys walked in. He gave them a quick look as he exhaled a puff of smoke into the air, and the next moment, he was aimed at by Billie’s weapon.

"Up with your hands!" was the stern order.

"Hands up!" was the serious command.

The captain hesitated, but a sharp prick from Donald's sword sent the hands into the air.

The captain hesitated, but a quick jab from Donald's sword made the hands shoot up into the air.

In another minute the captain was disarmed.

In another minute, the captain was disarmed.

"Now," said Donald sternly, "we'll see what all this trouble is about."

"Now," Donald said with a serious tone, "let's figure out what all this trouble is about."

He opened the telegram he held in his hand and read:

He opened the telegram he had in his hand and read:



"American Admiral has given an ultimatum.[Pg 79] Hold train and passengers until further orders.

"American Admiral has issued an ultimatum.[Pg 79] Hold the train and passengers until further notice."

Maas."

Maas.



"Who is Maas?" asked Donald sternly.

"Who is Maas?" Donald asked firmly.

The captain shrugged his shoulders, but said nothing.

The captain shrugged but didn't say anything.

"You'll answer in just one minute, or you'll never have a chance to answer another question," said Donald, as he stood with drawn sword, while Billie covered the captain with his revolver.

"You've got one minute to answer, or you'll never get another chance," Donald said, standing there with his sword drawn, while Billie aimed his revolver at the captain.

"Would you murder an unarmed man?" asked the captain.

"Would you kill an unarmed man?" the captain asked.

"I wouldn't consider it murder. Answer."

"I wouldn't call it murder. Answer."

The look in Donald's eyes was not to be mistaken.

The look in Donald's eyes was unmistakable.

"Gen. Maas is in command of Vera Cruz," the captain said.

"Gen. Maas is in charge of Vera Cruz," the captain said.

"Good. I think I see it all. If it is decided not to accede to the ultimatum, it is proposed to hold the train load as hostages."

"Good. I think I see everything. If we decide not to accept the ultimatum, it's suggested we hold the train load as hostages."

The captain smiled.

The captain grinned.

"Now listen!" and Donald spoke very slowly so that every word might find lodgment. "You have one chance for your life. Can you guess what it is?"

"Now listen!" Donald said, speaking very slowly so that every word would stick. "You have one chance to save your life. Can you guess what it is?"

The captain shook his head.

The captain shook his head.

"To do just exactly as I bid. Just one little attempt to do differently, and you are a dead man."

"Just do exactly what I say. One little attempt to do it your way, and you’re a dead man."

The captain scowled, but made no reply.

The captain frowned but didn’t say anything.

"Put on your hat and come with me. Order the [Pg 80] passengers back on to the train and give your engineer instructions to cover just as much of the distance between here and Vera Cruz by daylight as he knows how!"

"Put on your hat and come with me. Get the [Pg 80] passengers back on the train and tell your engineer to cover as much of the distance from here to Vera Cruz by daylight as he can!"

The captain shrugged his shoulders as he arose from his seat.

The captain shrugged his shoulders as he got up from his seat.

"I see you think it will be easy to escape. Just put any such idea out of your mind. There is no possible chance."

"I see you think it will be easy to escape. Just forget about that idea. There’s no chance at all."

Donald turned to Billie.

Donald faced Billie.

"This is what must be done. We shall walk directly back to where the passengers are. The captain will give his order without any hesitation. Otherwise I shall shoot him through my pocket. You will keep right behind us. If I fire, you fire also. One of us will be sure to kill him."

"This is what we need to do. We will walk straight back to where the passengers are. The captain will give his order without any doubt. If he doesn’t, I’ll shoot him from my pocket. You need to stay right behind us. If I shoot, you shoot too. One of us is guaranteed to hit him."

Donald led the way from the car and Billie brought up the rear.

Donald drove ahead from the car and Billie followed behind.

Through the dark they marched, each with a hand on the captain, so they might feel his slightest tremor.

Through the darkness, they marched, each with a hand on the captain, so they could feel his slightest shiver.

Arriving at the engine the captain summoned the sergeant.

Arriving at the engine, the captain called for the sergeant.

"Order the passengers to board the train," was the brief command.

"Tell the passengers to get on the train," was the short command.

The sergeant hastened to obey.

The sergeant hurried to comply.

"Bueno!" said Donald, as the passengers rushed back.

"Good!" said Donald, as the passengers hurried back.

Then under his breath to Billie: "Call Adrian."

Then, quietly to Billie: "Call Adrian."

Billie did so.

Billie did that.

"Where are you?" Adrian called back.[Pg 81]

"Where are you?" Adrian called back.[Pg 81]

"Down near the engine."

"By the engine."

A moment later Adrian appeared coming through the crowd of hurrying passengers.

A moment later, Adrian emerged through the crowd of hurried passengers.

"Where's Don?" he asked as soon as he caught sight of Billie.

"Where's Don?" he asked as soon as he saw Billie.

"Not far. Stay here. We may need you."

"Not far. Stay here. We might need you."

Adrian's face showed some surprise, but he said nothing.

Adrian looked a bit surprised, but he didn't say anything.

"Now, captain," said Don quietly, "your orders to the engineer," and under cover of the darkness he pushed the point of his revolver into the captain's side, while Billie touched him significantly in the back.

"Now, Captain," Don said quietly, "your orders to the engineer," and under the cover of darkness, he pressed the tip of his revolver into the captain's side, while Billie nudged him pointedly in the back.

The captain gave the order as he had been instructed.

The captain gave the command as he had been told.

"Now for the conductor," ordered Donald.

"Now for the conductor," ordered Donald.

The order was given, but the conductor refused to obey.

The order was given, but the conductor wouldn't comply.

"I must have a written order," he said.

"I need a written order," he said.

"Why?" asked Donald, in his rôle of lieutenant.

"Why?" asked Donald, in his role as lieutenant.

"To countermand the order of Gen. Maas."

"To cancel the order of Gen. Maas."

"Captain," was Donald's quiet hint, "don't you think it would be well to place the conductor under arrest?" and again he poked his revolver into the captain's side.

"Captain," Donald quietly suggested, "don’t you think it would be a good idea to arrest the conductor?" He nudged his revolver into the captain's side again.

The order for the conductor's arrest was quickly given.

The order for the conductor's arrest was issued without delay.

"Now, then, vamose," called Adrian. Then to the engineer, "I will act as conductor."

"Alright, let’s go," called Adrian. Then to the engineer, "I’ll take over as conductor."

The guards and extra soldiers who had been detailed[Pg 82] for this special service, sprang aboard; the engineer pulled open the throttle and the train began to move.

The guards and additional soldiers assigned[Pg 82] for this special task jumped onboard; the engineer opened the throttle, and the train started to move.

"Aren't you going, too?" asked Adrian.

"Aren't you going, too?" Adrian asked.

"Yes," whispered Billie to Donald, "hurry aboard with your prisoner."

"Yeah," Billie whispered to Donald, "hurry up and get on with your prisoner."

The captain was evidently of the same mind, for he started to board the already moving train.

The captain clearly felt the same way, as he began to get on the moving train.

"No you don't," exclaimed Donald, pulling him back. "You're going to stay here with us!"

"No, you're not," Donald exclaimed, pulling him back. "You're staying here with us!"

"Do you mean it, Don?" asked Billie in surprise.

"Do you really mean it, Don?" asked Billie in surprise.

"Sure! What do you think he'd do to us as soon as it was light?"

"Sure! What do you think he would do to us as soon as it gets light?"

By this time the train was under headway; a second later the last coach passed them and in another minute the tail lights were disappearing in the darkness.

By this time, the train was moving; a moment later, the last car went by them, and in another minute, the tail lights were fading into the darkness.

"It looks to me," remarked Adrian with a long breath, "as though we were in the consommé."

"It seems to me," Adrian said with a deep breath, "that we’re in the consommé."

"Perhaps," was Donald's laconic reply, "but those women and children will be safe in Vera Cruz under the guns of Admiral Fletcher's fleet by daylight, or I'm greatly mistaken."

"Maybe," was Donald's brief reply, "but those women and children will be safe in Vera Cruz under the protection of Admiral Fletcher's fleet by morning, or I'm completely wrong."

"And what are we going to do with our friend the captain?" queried Billie.

"And what are we going to do with our friend the captain?" Billie asked.

"He'll have to accept our hospitality under the stars until morning and then we'll see."

"He'll have to take our hospitality under the stars until morning, and then we'll figure it out."

In telling about his experiences later Billie said it was the longest and the shortest night he ever knew. [Pg 83] It seemed a long time for daylight, but it seemed a short time for the train which was bearing his countrymen to safety.

In reflecting on his experiences later, Billie said it was both the longest and shortest night he ever knew. [Pg 83] It felt like a long wait for daylight, but it felt like a short time for the train that was taking his fellow countrymen to safety.

When day finally began to break, the first thing that became visible was the snow-tipped peak of Mt. Orizaba, against which the sun threw his brilliant rays long before he could be seen above the horizon. It was a beautiful sight and the boys voiced their admiration with many exclamations of delight. Then they turned their attention to the more serious thoughts for the day.

When day finally started to dawn, the first thing that came into view was the snow-capped peak of Mt. Orizaba, illuminated by the sun’s bright rays long before it rose above the horizon. It was a stunning sight, and the boys expressed their admiration with lots of excited exclamations. Then they shifted their focus to the more serious thoughts for the day.

The first thing they did was to release the lieutenant from his unpleasant predicament and restore to him his uniform.

The first thing they did was free the lieutenant from his uncomfortable situation and give him back his uniform.

"We should like to return you your arms also," said Donald, "but your government took ours from us and I think we shall have to keep yours in their place."

"We’d like to give you your weapons back too," said Donald, "but your government took ours, and I think we’ll need to keep yours instead."

Neither of the officers made any reply, but their dark looks boded no good for the boys.

Neither of the officers said anything, but their grim expressions didn't bode well for the boys.

"You might just as well look pleasant," laughed Billie. "All is fair in love and war."

"You might as well look good," laughed Billie. "Everything's fair in love and war."

"We'll make you sing a different song when we get you in Vera Cruz," said the captain.

"We'll have you singing a different tune when we get you to Vera Cruz," said the captain.

"And when do you think that will be, Captain?" queried Adrian.

"And when do you think that will be, Captain?" Adrian asked.

"As soon as the next train comes along."

"As soon as the next train arrives."

"Oh, that's it, is it?" said Donald. "That being the case, I guess we will not wait for another train. By the way, how far is it to Vera Cruz?"

"Oh, is that all?" said Donald. "In that case, I guess we won’t wait for another train. By the way, how far is it to Vera Cruz?"

"About a hundred kilometers."[Pg 84]

"About 100 kilometers."[Pg 84]

"That's about eighty-four miles, isn't it, Ad?"

"That's about eighty-four miles, right, Ad?"

"Just about."

"Almost."

"And it's down hill pretty much all the way, isn't it?"

"And it's mostly downhill from here, isn't it?"

"I should say so by looking down the valley."

"I can tell just by looking down the valley."

"A right nice little walk, Captain. Let's be going. We ought to make it easily in four days."

"A really nice little walk, Captain. Let's go. We should be able to make it in four days."

At this cordial invitation the captain lost his temper.

At this friendly invitation, the captain lost his temper.

"Carramba!" he exclaimed. "Am I a boy to be made sport of? I will not go. If you wish me to go you will have to carry me," and he deliberately laid himself down on the ground.

"Wow!" he exclaimed. "Am I just a kid to be made fun of? I’m not going. If you want me to go, you’ll have to carry me," and he purposely lay down on the ground.

In spite of themselves the boys were obliged to laugh.

In spite of themselves, the boys had to laugh.

"We carried the lieutenant last night, but we don't desire your company badly enough to carry you," laughed Billie. "If you don't want to go, I for one vote to leave you. We have to forage for something to eat and the fewer there are, the easier it will be. And speaking of eats, it seems to me I smell something cooking right now."

"We carried the lieutenant last night, but we don't want your company badly enough to carry you," Billie laughed. "If you don't want to come, I personally vote to leave you behind. We need to find something to eat, and the fewer people there are, the easier it will be. And speaking of food, I think I smell something cooking right now."

At Billie's words the others sniffed up their noses.

At Billie's words, the others wrinkled their noses.

"It's a fact as sure as you're born," declared Donald.

"It's a fact as certain as you being born," declared Donald.

"And I'm going to find out where the odor comes from," said Billie. "There must be a house around here somewhere."

"And I'm gonna figure out where the smell is coming from," Billie said. "There has to be a house nearby."

Again he sniffed the air and smiled jubilantly.

Again, he sniffed the air and smiled brightly.

"The wind's in the east," he laughed. "It must[Pg 85] be somewhere in this direction. Come on, Captain."

"The wind's blowing from the east," he laughed. "It has to be somewhere in that direction. Let’s go, Captain."

The captain refused to move, but Billie led the way, followed by the two boys. They had not gone many rods when through an opening in the trees they beheld a good-sized adobe house. Pushing hastily toward it, they soon reached a cleared space, and there, gathered about a bunch of some forty or fifty horses, were a dozen men, while through the open door of the house many more were to be seen seated at a table—eating.

The captain wouldn't budge, but Billie took the lead, trailed by the two boys. They hadn't gone far when they spotted a good-sized adobe house through a gap in the trees. Rushing toward it, they quickly arrived at a clear area, where about forty or fifty horses were gathered around a dozen men. Inside the house, they could see many more seated at a table—eating.

"Come on!" exclaimed Billie. "I'm going to have something to eat; I don't care who they are."

"Come on!" Billie exclaimed. "I'm getting something to eat; I don't care who they are."

"We might as well make the best of it," declared Donald. "We are discovered any way and the best thing we can do is to put on a bold front."

"We might as well make the most of this," Donald declared. "We've been found out anyway, and the best thing we can do is put on a brave face."

Without further words the three boys walked boldly toward the house.

Without saying anything more, the three boys walked confidently towards the house.


CHAPTER X.

A TIMELY RESCUE.

The minute the boys' presence became known, there was a commotion in the house and in the clearing surrounding it. Those in the yard sprang toward their guns and those in the house jumped from the table.

The moment the boys were spotted, chaos erupted in the house and in the clearing around it. People in the yard rushed for their guns, and those inside the house leaped up from the table.

"Don't move," called out Billie. "We are[Pg 86] friends."

"Don't move," Billie shouted. "We're friends."

But the men were not sure and at once surrounded the boys.

But the men were uncertain and quickly surrounded the boys.

They appeared to be soldiers, but their uniforms were of a great variety and many hues. Only the officer in command had anything the appearance of a real soldier.

They looked like soldiers, but their uniforms were all different and in many colors. Only the officer in charge had anything that resembled a real soldier.

"Who are you?" he demanded as he came forward.

"Who are you?" he asked as he stepped closer.

"Friends! Americanos!" replied Donald.

"Friends! Americans!" replied Donald.

"Yes; and hungry ones," added Billie with a gesture that brought a smile to the officer's face.

"Yeah, and they’re starving," added Billie with a gesture that made the officer smile.

"Where did you come from?" was the next inquiry.

"Where did you come from?" was the next question.

Donald explained that they had been left by a train that had stopped nearby. He did not think it necessary to enlighten the officer as to the circumstances.

Donald explained that they had been dropped off by a train that had stopped nearby. He didn’t think it was necessary to explain the situation to the officer.

"If you don't believe us," broke in Billie, "you can ask the officers we left back there by the track."

"If you don't believe us," Billie interjected, "you can ask the officers we left back there by the track."

Donald made a gesture of impatience, which Billie failed to understand, but which the officer was quick to interpret.

Donald shrugged in frustration, which Billie didn't get, but the officer quickly understood.

"Officers? Of which army?" he quickly asked.

"Officers? Which army?" he quickly asked.

"Gen. Huerta's."

"General Huerta's."

"Carramba!" exclaimed the officer in command. "Go quick, corporal, and bring them to me."

"Wow!" exclaimed the officer in charge. "Hurry, corporal, and bring them to me."

Then to Billie: "If you are telling me the truth you have done me a great favor."

Then to Billie: "If you’re being honest with me, you’ve really done me a solid."

The boys looked surprised.[Pg 87]

The guys looked surprised.[Pg 87]

"How is that?" asked Donald.

"How's that?" asked Donald.

"Do you not know that we are of the army of Gen. Carranza?" was the interrogative reply.

"Don't you know that we're part of General Carranza's army?" was the questioned response.

"Why, no!" exclaimed the boys in unison.

"Of course not!" the boys shouted together.

"It is true," said the officer. "I am Captain Lopez. Now tell me, who are you?"

"It’s true," said the officer. "I’m Captain Lopez. Now, tell me, who are you?"

Briefly Donald told of their acquaintance with Gen. Sanchez and of their adventures of the night before, at which the captain laughed heartily.

Briefly, Donald talked about their meeting with Gen. Sanchez and the adventures they had the night before, which made the captain laugh heartily.

"You are smart boys," he declared.

"You are smart guys," he said.

"And hungry ones," again added Billie.

"And the hungry ones," Billie added again.

"You must be. Here, Juan," calling a soldier to him. "Take these muchachos to the house and feed them. I'll have a look at these rebels."

"You have to be. Come here, Juan," he called to a soldier. "Take these kids to the house and get them something to eat. I'll check out these rebels."

"Rebels," said Adrian to Donald under his breath as they walked toward the house. "Now what do you think of that?"

"Rebels," Adrian said to Donald quietly as they walked toward the house. "What do you think about that?"

"That's his viewpoint," replied Don. "He thinks of the men who overthrew President Madero as rebels."

"That's his perspective," replied Don. "He sees the men who toppled President Madero as rebels."

By this time they were near enough the house for Billie to smell the aroma of the coffee and he quickened his pace.

By now, they were close enough to the house for Billie to smell the coffee brewing, and he picked up his pace.

"I'll talk politics after I've sampled the breakfast," he declared. "If the breakfast is good, I'll join the band."

"I’ll discuss politics after I’ve tried the breakfast,” he said. “If the breakfast is good, I’ll join in."

It was nearly half an hour later that the boys stood before the captain. With a good breakfast [Pg 88] under their belts they felt fit for anything that might offer.

It was almost half an hour later that the boys stood in front of the captain. After a solid breakfast [Pg 88], they felt ready for whatever might come their way.

"I'm afraid you boys are in a bad fix," said Captain Lopez. "I suppose you want to get to Vera Cruz and on to some ship that will take you to the United States; but I don't know how you are going to make it."

"I'm afraid you guys are in a tough spot," said Captain Lopez. "I guess you want to get to Vera Cruz and find a ship that will take you to the United States; but I have no idea how you're going to pull that off."

"Why, can't we get another train somewhere down the line?" asked Adrian.

"Why can't we catch another train somewhere ahead?" asked Adrian.

"There may not be any more trains for some time."

"There might not be any more trains for a while."

"How's that?"

"How's that?"

"We are here to stop them."

"We're here to stop them."

"Does that mean you are going out to tear up the track?"

"Does that mean you're going out to tear up the track?"

"Not right here, but a little nearer Vera Cruz. There is a much larger body of troops about five miles below."

"Not right here, but a bit closer to Vera Cruz. There's a much larger group of troops about five miles downstream."

Billie uttered a prolonged whistle.

Billie let out a long whistle.

"That does look bad, sure enough," he declared. Then, after a pause: "What's the matter with walking?"

"That really looks bad, for sure," he said. Then, after a moment: "What's wrong with walking?"

"It's a long ways and the mountains are full of our men."

"It's a long way, and the mountains are filled with our guys."

"Can't you give us a safe passage? You say we have done you a favor by turning these two officers over to you," suggested Donald, indicating with a nod of his head the captain and lieutenant of the train guard who were now held prisoners.

"Can't you give us a safe passage? You say we’ve done you a favor by handing over these two officers to you," Donald suggested, nodding toward the captain and lieutenant of the train guard who were now being held as prisoners.

"I'll do the best I can," was the reply, "but you [Pg 89] will have to remain with me to-day. We are on scout duty and shall not return to the main body until to-night."

"I'll do my best," was the reply, "but you [Pg 89] will need to stay with me today. We're on scouting duty and won't be back with the main group until tonight."

"That'll suit me all right," laughed Billie, "and if you don't mind I think I'll go into the house somewhere and take a nap."

"That works for me," laughed Billie, "and if you don't mind, I think I'll go find a spot in the house and take a nap."

"Bueno," laughed the captain. "You might as well all take a nap. If we have occasion to leave the neighborhood we will call you."

"Well," laughed the captain. "You might as well all take a nap. If we need to leave the area, we'll let you know."

Ten minutes later the three were fast asleep on a pile of Mexican blankets in the best room in the house.

Ten minutes later, the three of them were sound asleep on a stack of Mexican blankets in the best room of the house.

Three hours later they were awakened by a fusillade of shots.

Three hours later, they were jolted awake by a barrage of gunfire.

They sprang to their feet and looked around. For just a moment they could not remember where they were. Then they recalled their situation and became on the alert.

They jumped to their feet and looked around. For a brief moment, they couldn’t remember where they were. Then they remembered their situation and became vigilant.

"Trouble outside," was Don's laconic statement.

"There's trouble outside," Don said flatly.

He and Billie drew the revolvers they had captured the night before.

He and Billie pulled out the revolvers they had taken the night before.

"Put 'em up," advised Adrian. "We're not here to fight."

"Raise your fists," Adrian said. "We're not here to brawl."

"We might have to," from Billie.

"We might have to," said Billie.

"Not at all. If one side wins, we are safe. If the other side wins, we are prisoners and the attackers will be our rescuers."

"Not at all. If one side wins, we’re safe. If the other side wins, we’ll be prisoners, and the attackers will be our rescuers."

"Great head, Ad," was Billie's comment. "But I'd like to know what is going on," as another fusillade was heard.

"Nice job, Ad," Billie said. "But I’d like to know what’s happening," as another round of shots was heard.

"Better stay where we are till the shooting stops,"[Pg 90] said Don.

"Better to stay put until the shooting stops,"[Pg 90] said Don.

It was good advice and the boys waited as quietly as they could.

It was solid advice, and the boys waited as quietly as they could.

A few minutes later there was a volley and a shout, followed by the sound of rushing feet. Then there was quiet as the shots were heard receding.

A few minutes later, there was a burst of gunfire and a shout, followed by the sound of running feet. Then it fell silent as the shots faded away.

When none of their friends returned after a few minutes, the boys ventured to the door. There was no one in sight.

When none of their friends came back after a few minutes, the boys approached the door. There was nobody around.

"I wonder where they have all gone?" ventured Billie.

"I wonder where they all went?" Billie said.

"I expect that our friends have run away and some of Huerta's soldiers are chasing them."

"I think our friends have escaped and some of Huerta's soldiers are after them."

"If they do, they will run into an ambush," said Adrian.

"If they do, they'll run into an ambush," said Adrian.

Which is exactly what happened.

Which is exactly what occurred.

"That won't do us any good," said Don. "Now that we are alone, I vote that we get back to the railroad track. We won't get lost if we follow that and a train may come along."

"That won't help us," said Don. "Now that we're alone, I say we head back to the railroad track. We won't get lost if we stick to that, and a train might come by."

The advice seemed good and they started to go.

The advice sounded good, so they set off.

"Hold on," exclaimed Billie. "Let's see if we can't find some grub to take with us."

"Wait a second," Billie said. "Let's see if we can find some food to take with us."

"Great head!" laughed Adrian.

"Awesome head!" laughed Adrian.

"Great stomach, you mean," from Donald. "It never lets him forget."

"Great stomach, you mean," said Donald. "It never lets him forget."

The boys plundered through the house. The owners must have been scared away, for nothing had been disturbed. In the kitchen they found a [Pg 91] big plate of tortillas, half a baked kid, and some wheat bread. This they appropriated.

The boys ransacked the house. The owners must have gotten frightened off, because nothing was out of place. In the kitchen, they discovered a [Pg 91] big plate of tortillas, half a roasted goat, and some wheat bread. They took it all for themselves.

"We might as well have a blanket apiece," said Donald. "It is only another case of a fair exchange. The Mexicans have our suit cases."

"We might as well each get a blanket," said Donald. "It's just another example of a fair trade. The Mexicans have our suitcases."

Each took a blanket and Adrian was so fortunate after searching all over the house as to find a shotgun and a belt full of loaded shells that went with it.

Each grabbed a blanket, and Adrian was lucky enough to find a shotgun and a belt full of loaded shells after searching the entire house.

"If those shells were loaded with buckshot you'd be all right," said Billie. "They're the——"

"If those shells were loaded with buckshot you'd be fine," said Billie. "They're the——"

His speech was interrupted by a cry that fairly made their blood run cold.

His speech was interrupted by a cry that sent chills down their spines.

"What's that?" and the three stopped as though they had been paralysed.

"What's that?" The three stopped as if they had been frozen in place.

Again came the cry, and with a single bound the boys were out in the open, each with his weapon ready for instant use.

Again came the shout, and with a quick leap the boys were outside, each holding their weapon ready for immediate action.

They could see no one, but there was the sound of something crashing through the brush which hid the railroad from the house.

They couldn't see anyone, but they heard something crashing through the bushes that covered the railroad from the house.

"Sounded like a wild cat," declared Donald.

"Sounded like a wild cat," Donald said.

"Or a coyote," said Billie.

"Or a coyote," Billie said.

"I'm sure it was a human voice," remarked Adrian. "Do you remember the Zuñis?" referring to another adventure told in the story of the "Broncho Rider Boys Along the Border."

"I'm sure it was a human voice," Adrian said. "Do you remember the Zuñis?" referring to another adventure mentioned in the story of the "Broncho Rider Boys Along the Border."

Even as he spoke there emerged from the brush the figure of a woman carrying in her arms a small child. Winged by fear, she was bounding along like an antelope.

Even as he spoke, a woman appeared from the bushes, holding a small child in her arms. Driven by fear, she was jumping forward like an antelope.

A moment later, and not two rods behind her,[Pg 92] came forth a figure which the boys instantly recognized as a mountain lion.

A moment later, and not two rods behind her,[Pg 92] a figure appeared that the boys immediately recognized as a mountain lion.

How the woman had succeeded in escaping it even for a moment was a mystery.

How the woman managed to escape it, even for a moment, was a mystery.

In a second the three weapons spoke. The report was followed by a scream from the beast and a cry from the woman, both of whom fell lifeless to the earth—the beast dead and the woman in a swoon.

In an instant, the three weapons fired. The sound was followed by a scream from the beast and a shout from the woman, both collapsing lifeless to the ground—the beast dead and the woman unconscious.

"Take care of the woman, you two," said Adrian. "I'll examine the beast."

"Take care of her, you two," Adrian said. "I'll check out the beast."

No one stopped to question the order.

No one bothered to question the order.

Billie picked up the child which the woman had let fall, while Donald stooped down and felt the woman's pulse. Then he darted into the house and was back in a minute with a bucket half filled with water. With it he bathed the woman's temples and poured a little down her throat.

Billie picked up the child that the woman had dropped, while Donald bent down and checked the woman's pulse. Then he rushed into the house and returned a minute later with a bucket half filled with water. He used it to wash the woman's temples and poured a little down her throat.

In a couple of minutes she revived and looked around.

In a few minutes, she came to and looked around.

"Mi niña!" she gasped.

"My girl!" she gasped.

"She's asking for her child," said Donald.

"She's asking for her kid," said Donald.

Billie carried the little one over and stood it beside her.

Billie picked up the little one and set it next to her.

With a glad cry she snatched it in her arms and burst into tears.

With a joyful shout, she grabbed it in her arms and started to cry.

"She's all right," laughed Donald. "Now let's have a look at that animal."

"She's fine," laughed Donald. "Now let’s check out that animal."

They walked over to where Adrian was watching[Pg 93] the inanimate carcass.

They walked over to where Adrian was watching[Pg 93] the lifeless body.

"Where did we hit him?" asked Billie.

"Where did we hit him?" Billie asked.

"I can see three places and one is big enough to throw a baseball through it."

"I can see three openings, and one of them is big enough to throw a baseball through."

"That's from the shotgun," said Donald. "It's what did the business. Must have been buckshot and we were so close it didn't have a chance to scatter."

"That's from the shotgun," Donald said. "That’s what did the damage. It must have been buckshot and we were so close it didn’t have a chance to spread."

"I'd sure like that hide," said Adrian.

"I'd really like that hide," said Adrian.

"We'll be in luck if we save our own," remarked Billie. "Unless we can do something for the woman, we'd better be jogging along."

"We'll be lucky if we save ourselves," Billie said. "Unless we can help the woman, we should probably keep moving."

By this time the woman had risen to her feet and the boys could see that she was not a peon as they had supposed, but of the better class.

By this time, the woman had stood up, and the boys could see that she wasn't a common worker as they had thought, but from a higher social class.

"Where could she have come from?" queried Donald under his breath.

"Where could she have come from?" Donald muttered to himself.

"Suppose you ask her," laughed Adrian.

"Imagine you ask her," laughed Adrian.

Donald did so. At first she was too dazed to answer, but after Donald spoke a few words quietly and in his very best Spanish, she was able to answer his questions.

Donald did that. At first, she was too stunned to respond, but after Donald spoke a few words softly and in his best Spanish, she was able to answer his questions.

"Is this your house?" he asked.

"Is this your place?" he asked.

"No, Señor; my house is down the mountain."

"No, sir; my house is down the mountain."

"What are you doing here alone?"

"What are you doing here by yourself?"

She gave him a startled glance and then hugged the child closer to her breast.

She gave him a surprised look and then pulled the child closer to her.

"You need not fear us," were the reassuring words.

"You don't need to be afraid of us," were the comforting words.

"The soldiers came," she said slowly. "They had[Pg 94] already killed the others. They would have killed me."

"The soldiers came," she said slowly. "They had[Pg 94] already killed the others. They would have killed me."

"The soldiers?"

"The troops?"

"Yes. They were looking for my husband. They said he was hidden in the house; but he was not. He is with Gen. Carranza."

"Yeah. They were looking for my husband. They said he was hiding in the house, but he wasn’t. He’s with Gen. Carranza."

"When was this?"

"When was this happening?"

"Yesterday. I have been in the mountains all night. There was a fight a few minutes ago and I saw them pass. Then I came here, when the awful beast sprang out," and again she drew the child to her.

"Yesterday. I was in the mountains all night. There was a fight a few minutes ago, and I saw them go by. Then I came here when the terrible creature jumped out," and again she pulled the child close to her.

"Are you hungry?"

"Feeling hungry?"

"Si, señor!"

"Yes, sir!"

It was the child that answered.

It was the kid who answered.

In an instant Billie's hand was in his pack and he held out the tortillas, which both mother and child took and ate ravenously.

In a flash, Billie reached into his pack and handed out the tortillas, which both the mother and child eagerly took and devoured.

After their hunger had been appeased, they questioned the woman further, telling her they were going to Vera Cruz.

After they had satisfied their hunger, they asked the woman more questions, telling her they were heading to Vera Cruz.

"If you will come with me down the mountain, you can hide in my house," she said.

"If you come with me down the mountain, you can hide in my house," she said.

"We don't want to hide," laughed Billie. "We want to get to Vera Cruz. However, we'll see you home, if you don't mind."

"We're not trying to hide," laughed Billie. "We want to get to Vera Cruz. But we'll walk you home, if that’s okay with you."

Without more words the woman led the way, Billie insisting upon carrying the little girl.

Without saying anything more, the woman took the lead, while Billie insisted on carrying the little girl.

After a walk of more than two hours, the woman [Pg 95] stopped in a little clearing from which a view of the mountainside for miles could be gained.

After walking for over two hours, the woman [Pg 95] stopped in a small clearing where she could see the mountainside for miles.

"There is my house," she said, pointing to the roof of a really noble mansion constructed of stone. "But what is that flag I see on top of it?"

"There’s my house," she said, pointing to the roof of a really grand mansion made of stone. "But what’s that flag I see on top of it?"

The boys took one good look at it and then they let out a wild yell.

The boys took a good look at it and then they shouted wildly.

"Hurrah!" they cried. "It's the Stars and Stripes."

"Hooray!" they shouted. "It's the Stars and Stripes."

"I don't know what it means away out here," said Donald, "but wherever it is it means something. Come on!" and he dashed down the mountainside, followed by the others.

"I don't know what it means out here," said Donald, "but wherever it is, it means something. Let's go!" and he ran down the mountainside, followed by the others.


CHAPTER XI.

FRIENDS IN DISTRESS.

Half an hour later the boys stopped beside a ruined wall in which was a still more ruined gate.

Half an hour later, the boys stopped next to a crumbling wall that had an even more decayed gate.

It was the home of Gen. Luiz Blanco, whose wife and child it was that the boys had saved from the mountain lion.

It was the home of Gen. Luiz Blanco, whose wife and child the boys had rescued from the mountain lion.

Above the house, on a lofty turret, waved the American flag—a fact which caused the boys to enter the gate and approach the house without hesitation.

Above the house, on a tall turret, the American flag waved—a fact that made the boys walk through the gate and head toward the house without any hesitation.

But when they reached the great front door leading into the patio, they found it shut and barred.

But when they got to the big front door that led into the patio, they found it closed and locked.

Here they knocked loudly.[Pg 96]

Here they knocked loudly.[Pg 96]

For some minutes there was no reply, despite repeated knocks, but finally a voice called out in English:

For a few minutes, there was no answer, even with multiple knocks, but eventually, a voice responded in English:

"Who's there?"

"Who's there?"

"American boys in trouble."

"American boys in trouble."

"What?" was the surprised reply. "Say it again, till I see if it is true."

"What?" was the shocked response. "Say it again, so I can see if it's true."

"It's true all right, all right," said Billie. "If you don't believe it we'll sing the 'Star Spangled Banner,' or 'Hail Columbia'."

"It's true, for sure," said Billie. "If you don’t believe it, we’ll sing the 'Star Spangled Banner' or 'Hail Columbia'."

They could hear some one removing the bars and a moment later the gate swung open, and a huge, bewhiskered man in ragged garments and a Winchester rifle in his hand stood before them.

They could hear someone taking down the bars, and a moment later, the gate swung open, revealing a large, bearded man in torn clothes holding a Winchester rifle.

"Come in quick," he commanded, "and let's get this gate barred. There is no knowing when that band of robbers will be back."

"Come in quickly," he ordered, "and let's get this gate locked. We don't know when that group of thieves will be back."

"Robbers?" queried Billie, as he set the little girl on the ground and extended his hand to the man. "What robbers?"

"Robbers?" Billie asked, as he put the little girl down and reached out his hand to the man. "What robbers?"

"They call themselves soldiers," and the man seized Billie's hand and gave it a mighty grip, which made even Broncho Billie wince, "but what do we care for them? With four Americans we can defy a hundred of them." Then, as Donald and Adrian finished barring the gate: "It's certainly good for sore eyes to see such faces," and he grasped each boy in turn.

"They call themselves soldiers," and the man grabbed Billie's hand and gave it a strong grip that even made Broncho Billie wince. "But who cares about them? With four Americans, we can stand up to a hundred of them." Then, as Donald and Adrian finished closing the gate: "It's really nice to see such faces," and he shook hands with each boy in turn.

"Well, we're mighty glad to see you," replied[Pg 97] Donald. "We expected to find the place deserted."

"Well, we're really happy to see you," replied[Pg 97] Donald. "We thought we’d find the place empty."

"How did you know anything about the place?"

"How did you know anything about this place?"

"This lady told us it is her home."

"This woman told us it’s her home."

"What?" from the man. "Do you mean to tell me this is the Señora Blanco?"

"What?" said the man. "Are you telling me this is Señora Blanco?"

"Even so, Señor," replied the lady. "No one would recognize me in these rags and grief. Oh, Señor, had it not been for these brave Americans I should have been devoured by a lion."

"Even so, Sir," replied the lady. "No one would recognize me in these rags and sorrow. Oh, Sir, if it weren't for these brave Americans, I would have been eaten by a lion."

"You don't tell me. But I'd know they were the real thing. Their faces show it. But come, let's go into the house. You'll excuse me, Señora, for taking possession of your castle."

"You don’t have to say anything. I can tell they’re the real deal just by looking at their faces. But come on, let’s head inside the house. I hope you don’t mind, Señora, me taking over your castle."

"It is yours, Señor. Do with it as you will. But will you not do me the favor of your name?"

"It’s yours, Sir. Do whatever you want with it. But could you please do me the favor of telling me your name?"

"I beg your pardon, Señora. I had forgotten. I am Ebenezer Black, who owns the ranch across the valley. My daughter and I were out on a hunt for some lost cattle when we were waylaid by this so-called company of soldiers. I drove them off but my daughter was wounded and I made for this place. Finding no one at home, I took possession."

"I’m sorry, ma’am. I forgot to introduce myself. I’m Ebenezer Black, the owner of the ranch across the valley. My daughter and I were out searching for some lost cattle when we were stopped by this so-called group of soldiers. I managed to drive them off, but my daughter got hurt, so I came here. When I found no one home, I made myself at home."

"I am so glad, Señor. And where is your daughter now?"

"I’m so glad, Sir. And where is your daughter now?"

"Sitting in a big armchair, nursing a wounded arm."

"Sitting in a big armchair, tending to a hurt arm."

"Oh, let us hasten," cried the señora. "I may be of some assistance."

"Oh, let's hurry," exclaimed the señora. "I might be able to help."

They hurried into the house and into the great [Pg 98] library, now all in disorder and strewn with bits of cigars and cigarettes. In one of the big leather chairs sat a girl of some sixteen or seventeen, with her left arm in a sling, but in her right hand she held a glistening revolver. She was very slight, but dressed in a riding costume of unique design, and with a wealth of soft brown hair hanging just to her collar. With just a touch of pallor due to the wound, the boys thought her the most beautiful girl they had ever seen, not excepting Pedro's sister Guadalupe.

They rushed into the house and into the large [Pg 98] library, which was now a mess and scattered with bits of cigars and cigarettes. In one of the big leather chairs sat a girl who looked about sixteen or seventeen, with her left arm in a sling, but she was holding a shiny revolver in her right hand. She was quite petite, but wore a uniquely designed riding outfit, and had a beautiful flow of soft brown hair that fell to her collar. With a hint of pallor from her injury, the boys thought she was the most stunning girl they had ever seen, even more so than Pedro's sister Guadalupe.

That the girl was surprised at the addition to the party goes without saying. She looked first at her father, then at the newcomers and then back to her father, as much as to ask: "Who are they?"

That the girl was surprised by the new arrivals is obvious. She first glanced at her father, then at the newcomers, and then back at her father, as if to say: "Who are they?"

"This," said Mr. Black as the señora came forward, "is the lady of the house and her daughter. These are American boys, as you can see, although you haven't had a chance to know many American boys. I don't know their names, but names don't count. I'll vouch for them."

"This," said Mr. Black as the señora stepped forward, "is the lady of the house and her daughter. These are American boys, as you can see, although you haven't had the chance to meet many American boys. I don’t know their names, but names aren’t important. I can vouch for them."

"We are very highly complimented," laughed Donald, "but I shall be pleased to introduce us. I am Donald Mackay. Now that you know me, I will introduce my friends, Adrian Sherwood, ranch owner and good fellow, and William Stonewall Jackson Winkle, better known as 'Broncho Billie.' We are known as the Broncho Rider Boys."

"We really appreciate the compliments," laughed Donald, "but I’d be happy to introduce ourselves. I’m Donald Mackay. Now that you know me, let me introduce my friends, Adrian Sherwood, a ranch owner and a good guy, and William Stonewall Jackson Winkle, who you probably know as 'Broncho Billie.' We go by the name the Broncho Rider Boys."

"Oh, Father," exclaimed the girl, "I've read about them. I have a book some one sent me from [Pg 99] the United States telling about their adventures at the Keystone ranch."

"Oh, Dad," the girl said, "I've read about them. I have a book that someone sent me from [Pg 99] the United States describing their adventures at the Keystone ranch."

"You don't say so," from her father. "I didn't know they were such celebrities. Such being the case, young gentlemen, allow me to introduce my daughter, Josephine, commonly called Josie. Now then, how did you all come here?"

"You don't say," her father replied. "I didn't know they were such big deals. Given that, young gentlemen, let me introduce my daughter, Josephine, but everyone calls her Josie. So, how did you all end up here?"

As briefly as possible Adrian related their adventures since they left the City of Mexico the previous morning; told about the information contained in the telegram from Gen. Maas, and wound up by saying: "We may be at war with Mexico right now for all we know."

As briefly as he could, Adrian recounted their adventures since leaving Mexico City the day before; he talked about the details in the telegram from Gen. Maas and concluded by saying, "We could be at war with Mexico right now for all we know."

"Well, now what do you think of that?" exclaimed Mr. Black. "I just knew I had a reason when I hoisted that flag. It's one Josie always carries in her saddle bags. It makes her feel safer, she says."

"Well, what do you think about that?" exclaimed Mr. Black. "I just knew there was a reason I raised that flag. It's one Josie always has in her saddle bags. It makes her feel safer, she says."

"And I hope she is safer," exclaimed Billie, "with it waving over her to-day, than she would be without it."

"And I hope she's safer," Billie exclaimed, "with it waving over her today than she would be without it."

"At any rate she has more protection than she had a few hours ago," ventured the señora. "I shall never forget how I was protected."

"Anyway, she has more protection now than she did a few hours ago," the señora said. "I'll never forget how I was protected."

"I'd feel a whole lot better," said Donald, "if I had some other weapon. A Colt does very well in a tight place; but I certainly miss my Marlin."

"I'd feel a lot better," said Donald, "if I had another weapon. A Colt works great in close quarters, but I definitely miss my Marlin."

"We formerly had quite a supply of arms," was the explanation offered by the señora, "but when Gen. Blanco went to join Gen. Carranza he armed [Pg 100] all his men and it took about everything we had. However, there are a few weapons left—unless," she added as an afterthought, "the Huerta soldiers have discovered their hiding place."

"We used to have a good amount of weapons," the señora explained, "but when Gen. Blanco went to join Gen. Carranza, he equipped all his men and took almost everything we had. However, there are a few weapons left—unless," she added as an afterthought, "the Huerta soldiers have found where they're hidden."

She led the way to the cellar and pointed to a spot at one side.

She guided us to the cellar and pointed to a spot on one side.

"If you will brush away the dirt that covers the floor about there," she said, "you will find a large slab. This can be raised, and underneath there should still be several good rifles."

"If you clear away the dirt on the floor over there," she said, "you'll find a large slab. You can lift this, and underneath, there should still be several decent rifles."

Donald and Billie, who had accompanied her, while Adrian remained up stairs with the others, quickly followed her instructions. The edges of the slab were exposed to view and after some effort the opening was revealed. In it were four rifles and an old-fashioned cannon. The rifles were not of the latest make, but two were magazine rifles and were a decided improvement over revolvers in case it came to defending the house.

Donald and Billie, who had gone with her, while Adrian stayed upstairs with the others, quickly followed her instructions. The edges of the slab were visible, and after some effort, they revealed the opening. Inside were four rifles and an old-fashioned cannon. The rifles weren’t the newest models, but two were magazine rifles and were definitely an upgrade from revolvers in case they needed to defend the house.

"I suppose that old cannon might be mounted on the roof somehow and made effective," said Donald after he and Billie had inspected the other arms. Then to the señora: "Is there any ammunition?"

"I guess that old cannon could be put on the roof somehow and be useful," Donald said after he and Billie checked out the other weapons. Then he turned to the señora: "Is there any ammo?"

"There was powder in that wine cask," she replied, "but I don't know whether there is any left. The balls for the cannon are on the roof."

"There was powder in that wine cask," she replied, "but I'm not sure if there's any left. The cannonballs are on the roof."

The boys examined the cask and found it contained quite a quantity of powder. Then they all returned to the library and made their report.

The boys checked out the cask and discovered it held a significant amount of powder. Then they all went back to the library and reported their findings.

"Not a very heavy armament to withstand a siege, [Pg 101] is it?" was Mr. Black's comment. "Half a dozen rifles with about a hundred cartridges, an old cannon that might explode any minute, and four revolvers. It won't do."

"Not much firepower to hold off a siege, [Pg 101] is it?" Mr. Black remarked. "A few rifles with maybe a hundred rounds, a worn-out cannon that could blow up at any moment, and four handguns. That won't cut it."

"What else can we do?" asked Billie.

"What else can we do?" Billie asked.

"Why, now that there are four of us, we'll cross the valley to my house. It is just as well located to withstand a siege as this and it is thoroughly armed and provisioned."

"Now that there are four of us, let’s cross the valley to my house. It’s just as well located to hold up during a siege as this place is, and it’s fully stocked with weapons and supplies."

"Suppose we have to fight?"

"What if we have to fight?"

"Then we'll fight."

"Then we'll battle."

"But you forget your daughter and the señora and her child."

"But you forget your daughter and the lady and her child."

"I didn't forget Josie," was the reply, "and, wounded as she is, she can take care of herself; but I don't know about the others. They would be a handicap. Have you anything better to offer?"

"I didn't forget Josie," came the reply, "and, as hurt as she is, she can handle herself; but I’m not sure about the others. They would be a burden. Do you have anything better to suggest?"

Billie scratched his head.

Billie scratched his head.

"Not for the moment."

"Not at the moment."

"Well, I have," exclaimed Adrian.

"Well, I do," exclaimed Adrian.

"I thought it was about time Ad woke up," laughed Donald. "Let's have it."

"I figured it was time for Ad to wake up," laughed Donald. "Let's get to it."

"Captain Lopez told us that there was a large body of Carranza's troops down the railroad a short distance. If he meant by a short distance six or eight miles they can not be more than a couple of miles from where we now are. I feel sure that the skirmish we passed through has proved disastrous to the Huerta forces and I am willing to go out and find Captain Lopez and bring relief."

"Captain Lopez told us that there were a lot of Carranza's troops down the railroad a little way ahead. If by a little way he means six or eight miles, they can't be more than a couple of miles from where we are now. I'm sure that the skirmish we just went through has been a disaster for the Huerta forces, and I'm ready to go find Captain Lopez and bring help."

"And I'll go with you," said Billie.[Pg 102]

"And I'll go with you," Billie said.[Pg 102]

"I can do just as well alone. If I am not captured by the other side I shall make it easily, and," he added, "I am sure I shall not be captured, for I can lick any squad of peons that I'm likely to meet."

"I can do just as well on my own. If I’m not caught by the other side, I'll get through it easily, and," he added, "I’m sure I won’t be caught because I can take on any group of workers I’m likely to face."

"You are a brave boy," said Josie, a bit of praise which brought the color to Adrian's cheeks and was an added incentive for bravery.

"You’re a brave boy," said Josie, a little compliment that made Adrian's cheeks flush and motivated him to be even braver.

"But why shouldn't I go?" insisted Billie.

"But why can't I go?" insisted Billie.

"You may be needed here. This house is a marked place and if a small band of the Huerta forces has escaped, this will be one of the places where they will rally."

"You might be needed here. This house is a significant location, and if a small group of the Huerta forces has managed to escape, this will likely be one of the places where they regroup."

"Your friend is right," agreed Mr. Black. "I admire the pluck of all of you, but his plan is best. The sooner he goes the better and we will make the house as impregnable as we can. Let us hope he is successful."

"Your friend is right," Mr. Black agreed. "I admire all of your courage, but his plan is the best. The sooner he leaves, the better, and we will make the house as secure as we can. Let's hope he succeeds."

"You can bet on me," was Adrian's reply as he shouldered his rifle, looked to the fastening of his belt, and descended to the gate, where Mr. Black let him out.

"You can count on me," Adrian replied as he slung his rifle over his shoulder, checked his belt, and walked down to the gate, where Mr. Black opened it for him.

After Adrian had gone the others inspected the house and its approaches for the purpose of determining where they might mount the cannon. They finally decided upon a spot in an angle of the roof, where a chimney offered some protection and from which it commanded the main approach to the house.

After Adrian left, the others examined the house and its surroundings to figure out where they could position the cannon. They ultimately chose a spot at an angle of the roof, where a chimney provided some cover and they had a clear view of the main approach to the house.

"I'm not sure we will be able to get the cannon [Pg 103] up there," laughed Billie as they passed through the library on their way to the cellar, "but we'll do the best we can."

"I'm not sure we can get the cannon [Pg 103] up there," laughed Billie as they walked through the library heading to the cellar, "but we'll give it our best shot."

"Don't worry," was Josie's reply. "You don't know how strong Dad is."

"Don't worry," Josie replied. "You have no idea how strong Dad is."

The boys thought they could guess, but when they saw Mr. Black pick up the cannon as though it had been a log of cord wood and carry it upstairs they concluded that Josie was right.

The boys thought they could figure it out, but when they saw Mr. Black pick up the cannon like it was just a piece of firewood and carry it upstairs, they decided that Josie was right.

"When I was a young man," was Mr. Black's only comment, "I was considered the strongest man in our county. I reckon if it came to a pinch I'd be a pretty hard man to handle even yet."

"When I was young," was Mr. Black's only comment, "I was seen as the strongest man in our county. I guess if it came down to it, I’d still be a pretty tough guy to deal with."

The boys had no doubt of it.

The boys were completely sure of it.

By the time the cannon was mounted and loaded the sun was nearing the top of the mountains behind them and a few minutes later it sank from sight.

By the time the cannon was set up and loaded, the sun was almost at the top of the mountains behind them, and a few minutes later, it disappeared from view.

"It won't be long now until we shall have to depend upon our ears instead of our eyes for our protection," said Donald. "Where is the best place to watch?"

"It won't be long until we have to rely on our ears instead of our eyes for our safety," said Donald. "Where's the best spot to keep an eye out?"

"I'll tell you what I think," said Billie. "Let one watch from the roof and the other down by the gate. The one on the roof can hear noises from a distance. The one by the gate can hear any one who may be sneaking around."

"I'll tell you what I think," Billie said. "One person should watch from the roof and the other by the gate. The one on the roof can pick up sounds from far away. The one by the gate can hear anyone who might be sneaking around."

"I'll watch on the roof," said the señora. "I know the chirp of every bird that belongs here. I shall know in a minute if anything happens that is unusual."

"I'll keep an eye on the roof," said the señora. "I recognize the chirp of every bird that lives here. I'll know right away if something unexpected happens."

"And I'll watch by the gate," declared Donald.[Pg 104]

"And I'll stand guard by the gate," declared Donald.[Pg 104]

"Only till midnight," said Billie, "when I'll relieve you."

"Only until midnight," Billie said, "when I’ll take over for you."

"And I'll relieve the señora," said Josie.

"And I'll take over for the lady," said Josie.

"Where do I come in?" queried Mr. Black.

"Where do I fit in?" asked Mr. Black.

"You are the general, Dad. You can be everywhere."

"You’re the general, Dad. You can be anywhere."

Sentry duty is always nerve-racking business. If you have ever been obliged to sit alone in the dark and watch with your ears, you will understand this and you will understand how Donald felt sitting alone by the barred gate in the dark, 3,000 miles from home and in the midst of a war-stricken country.

Sentry duty is always stressful. If you’ve ever had to sit alone in the dark and listen intently, you’ll get it, and you’ll understand how Donald felt sitting by the barred gate in the dark, 3,000 miles from home in the middle of a war-torn country.

Even the north star looked unfamiliar, so close was it to the northern horizon. Once in a while he fancied he could hear the señora weeping, but for at least three hours this was all he heard.

Even the North Star looked strange, it was so close to the northern horizon. Every now and then, he thought he could hear the señora crying, but for at least three hours, that was all he heard.

Then he heard a distinct "S-s-s-s," which was the signal agreed upon between him and the señora if she heard anything unusual.

Then he heard a clear "S-s-s-s," which was the signal they had agreed upon between him and the señora if she noticed anything unusual.

In an instant he was on the alert. Yes, he was sure he heard footsteps near the gate, without. Then there were some minutes of silence, then the hiss of a fuse and a moment later an explosion which blew the gate from its hinges.

In a flash, he was on high alert. Yes, he was sure he heard footsteps by the gate outside. Then there were a few minutes of silence, followed by the sound of a fuse hissing, and a moment later, an explosion that blew the gate off its hinges.


[Pg 105]

CHAPTER XII.

A NIGHT ATTACK.

Realizing in an instant that the hiss of the fuse, like the rattle of the snake, betokened danger, Donald drew hastily back into the patio in time to be out of reach of the explosion which splintered the gate and tore it from its hinges.

Realizing in an instant that the hiss of the fuse, like the rattle of a snake, meant danger, Donald quickly stepped back into the patio just in time to avoid the explosion that shattered the gate and ripped it from its hinges.

Then, with finger on trigger, he awaited the coming of the foe.

Then, with his finger on the trigger, he waited for the enemy to arrive.

It was a tense moment and the boy's heart beat fast. He had been in many trying situations, but never in one where the safety of so many others seemed to depend upon him.

It was a tense moment, and the boy's heart raced. He had been in many tough situations, but never in one where the safety of so many others seemed to rely on him.

He heard the sound of oncoming feet and intuitively threw himself upon the ground behind a little stone paling which surrounded a dismantled fountain.

He heard the sound of footsteps approaching and instinctively dropped to the ground behind a small stone wall that surrounded a broken fountain.

The act undoubtedly saved his life, for an instant later there was a scattering volley and he could hear the bullets hit against the stone wall of the house behind him.

The action clearly saved his life because just a moment later, there was a burst of gunfire, and he could hear the bullets striking the stone wall of the house behind him.

In an instant he pressed the trigger and a yell which followed gave evidence that the bullet found a mark.

In an instant, he pulled the trigger, and the shout that followed confirmed that the bullet hit its target.

He fired again, but evidently without effect, and a minute later a light at one side of the patio told [Pg 106] him that the enemy, or a part of them at least, were inside the gate.

He shot again, but clearly with no impact, and a minute later a light on one side of the patio indicated to him that the enemy, or at least some of them, were inside the gate.

As the light flared up Donald fired again, but again without avail; but a moment later the cannon on the roof spoke.

As the light flashed, Donald shot again, but once more without success; just a moment later, the cannon on the roof went off.

"So," he thought, "Billie and Mr. Black are at last awake."

"So," he thought, "Billie and Mr. Black are finally awake."

At the report of the cannon the light went out and there was the rush of scurrying feet, followed by a shout.

At the sound of the cannon, the light went out, and there was a rush of hurried footsteps, followed by a shout.

The shout indicated that those within the patio had withdrawn to the other side of the gate.

The shout indicated that the people in the patio had moved to the other side of the gate.

Feeling sure that the patio was now free of the enemy for a time at least, Donald retreated in the dark to the house and was soon inside. At the first landing he encountered Josie, sitting on a step with a ready revolver. He was able to see her by the dim light of an oil lamp which hung from the ceiling.

Feeling confident that the patio was clear of the enemy for at least a little while, Donald made his way back to the house in the dark and was soon inside. On the first landing, he came across Josie, sitting on a step with a revolver at the ready. He could see her by the faint light of an oil lamp hanging from the ceiling.

"Where are the others?" he asked.

"Where is everyone else?" he asked.

"On the roof. They are trying to locate the enemy."

"On the roof. They are trying to find the enemy."

Donald ascended to the roof.

Donald went up to the roof.

"I have a plan," he said, "which will enable us to get in another shot. Load with shrapnel and I will see if I can't make some sort of a light outside the gate. Be ready on the instant."

"I have a plan," he said, "that will let us take another shot. Load with shrapnel, and I’ll see if I can create some kind of light outside the gate. Be ready immediately."

He ran downstairs and again crept out into the dark patio. He had noticed in the afternoon that there were several bundles of straw in the stable.

He ran downstairs and quietly stepped out into the dark patio again. He had noticed earlier in the afternoon that there were several bundles of straw in the stable.

Taking one of these under his arm, he approached[Pg 107] the angle in the wall near the outer gate. He lighted a match and as the flame caught the straw he flung the bundle over the wall, at the same time darting inside the stable.

Taking one of these under his arm, he approached[Pg 107] the corner in the wall near the outer gate. He lit a match, and as the flame caught the straw, he tossed the bundle over the wall while quickly slipping inside the stable.

He had hardly found a safe position when the cannon spoke again and evidently with telling effect.

He had barely secured a safe spot when the cannon went off again, clearly causing significant impact.

But before those inside the walls had time to think, the enemy rushed in, determined to capture the place.

But before those inside the walls had a chance to react, the enemy charged in, determined to take the place.

In the dark they rushed to the house, but once under the gallery which extended all around the inside of the patio, they produced a light which enabled them to find the doors.

In the dark, they hurried to the house, but once they reached the gallery that wrapped around the inside of the patio, they turned on a light that helped them find the doors.

The light also enabled Donald to see those at the door and he fired from the stable.

The light also allowed Donald to see the people at the door, and he fired from the stable.

For a moment the fire in the rear disconcerted the enemy and several fled, but others took possession of the doorway and forced their way in.

For a moment, the fire in the back threw the enemy off guard, and several ran away, but others took control of the doorway and pushed their way inside.

The first one who entered fell by a bullet from Josie's revolver; but realizing her weakness she jumped and fled to the floor above, where she met her father coming down.

The first person who went in was shot by Josie's revolver; but realizing her vulnerability, she jumped and ran up to the next floor, where she ran into her father coming down.

"They have gained possession of the house," Mr. Black told Billie as he and the señora also descended from the roof. "We must now guard the stairway. We should be able to hold it indefinitely."

"They've taken control of the house," Mr. Black told Billie as he and the woman also came down from the roof. "We need to defend the stairs. We should be able to keep it secure for as long as we need."

This prediction seemed correct, as the first four or five men who attempted to reach the second [Pg 108] story never got more than their heads above the floor.

This prediction turned out to be accurate, since the first four or five men who tried to get to the second [Pg 108] story never managed to get more than their heads above the floor.

After several trials of this sort, they withdrew and held a council of war. The result was that a few minutes later a voice called out from below:

After several attempts like this, they pulled back and held a strategy meeting. A few minutes later, a voice called out from below:

"If you will surrender, your lives will be spared."

"If you give up, your lives will be saved."

In reply Mr. Black shouted: "If you do not withdraw and leave us in peace you will meet a fearful punishment."

In response, Mr. Black shouted, "If you don't step back and let us be, you'll face a severe punishment."

His reply was greeted with jeers.

His response was met with laughter and mockery.

"I wonder how many of them there are?" queried Billie.

"I wonder how many of them there are?" asked Billie.

"Quite a bunch from the sound." Then, a moment later, "They seem to be going out."

"Sounds like quite a crowd." Then, a moment later, "They seem to be heading out."

"Maybe they think we will come down," said Josie.

"Maybe they think we'll come down," said Josie.

"But we must not," exclaimed the señora. "They would kill us. Surely our friend must bring us aid soon."

"But we can't," the señora exclaimed. "They would kill us. Our friend must be bringing us help soon."

"Let us hope so," was Mr. Black's reply.

"Let's hope so," Mr. Black replied.

And hope was the best they could do.

And hope was all they had.

There was no further attack, although they could hear the sound of voices in the patio below.

There was no more attack, although they could hear voices in the courtyard below.

After a long period of quiet Mr. Black ventured the assertion that they were waiting for daylight, and his surmise proved correct.

After a long period of silence, Mr. Black suggested that they were waiting for daylight, and his guess turned out to be right.

No attempt was made to force an entrance until the first faint light of day began to appear. Then there was renewed activity below and a few minutes later the sound of a single shot.

No one tried to break in until the first light of day started to show. Then there was a burst of activity below, and a few minutes later, a single gunshot was heard.

"I wonder what that was," exclaimed Billie.[Pg 109]

"I wonder what that was," Billie exclaimed.[Pg 109]

No one could answer, but had Billie been where he could see, he would have known that it was Donald who fired.

No one could answer, but if Billie had been able to see, he would have known it was Donald who fired.

As the light came, Donald, peering through a crack in the stable, had seen a man climbing up the side of the house toward the roof. Without a moment's hesitation he fired and the man dropped, shot through the right hand.

As the light emerged, Donald, looking through a crack in the stable, saw a man climbing up the side of the house toward the roof. Without hesitating, he fired, and the man fell, shot through the right hand.

But the shot was Donald's undoing. The flash of his gun was detected and half a dozen men rushed his hiding place and took him prisoner.

But the shot was Donald's downfall. The flash from his gun was spotted, and a group of six men quickly rushed to his hiding spot and captured him.

He was at once taken before the captain of the band and questioned as to the number of defenders and as to the whereabouts of Gen. Blanco.

He was immediately brought in front of the band leader and asked about the number of defenders and the location of Gen. Blanco.

To all the questions Donald gave an evasive answer.

To all the questions, Donald gave a vague answer.

"If you will tell me where Gen. Blanco is," said the captain, "I will give you your freedom."

"If you tell me where Gen. Blanco is," said the captain, "I'll give you your freedom."

"That's easy," was Donald's reply. "He is with Gen. Carranza."

"That's easy," Donald replied. "He's with Gen. Carranza."

"I don't believe it."

"I can't believe it."

"Well, I can't help that, nor does what you believe make any difference. It is the truth and what you may believe has nothing whatever to do with it."

"Well, I can't change that, and what you believe doesn't matter. It is the truth, and your beliefs have nothing to do with it."

The captain scowled.

The captain frowned.

"Who is it then, that is defending the house?"

"Who is it that's defending the house?"

"Americans. You had better let us go, or it will [Pg 110] be the worse for you. We had a safe conduct from Gen. Huerta, but we were betrayed."

"Americans. You better let us go, or you’ll regret it. We had safe passage from Gen. Huerta, but we were betrayed."

"If I had my way," said the captain, "I'd shoot every American in the whole of Mexico."

"If I had my way," the captain said, "I'd shoot every American in all of Mexico."

"I don't see why," from Donald. "We have nothing against you."

"I don't see why," Donald said. "We have nothing against you."

"Take him away," ordered the captain, "and see that he does not escape. Now let us capture the others."

"Take him away," the captain commanded, "and make sure he doesn't get away. Now let's catch the others."

There was a rush for the house as Donald was led back to the stable.

There was a rush for the house as Donald was taken back to the stable.

Billie and Mr. Black heard them coming.

Billie and Mr. Black heard them approaching.

"Go to the roof," commanded Mr. Black, speaking to the two females, "and keep yourselves and the little girl out of sight. We will hold them back here as long as we can and then we will also come to the roof."

"Go to the roof," Mr. Black instructed the two women, "and make sure you and the little girl stay out of sight. We'll keep them back here for as long as possible, and then we'll join you on the roof."

The command had hardly been obeyed than the Mexicans began to crowd up the stairs. They were met with shot after shot, but at last all the weapons were empty.

The order had barely been followed when the Mexicans started streaming up the stairs. They were met with gunfire after gunfire, but eventually, all the weapons were out of ammo.

"Run for the roof," said Mr. Black as he arose to his feet and with his heavy boot kicked a head which was just coming up the stairs.

"Run for the roof," said Mr. Black as he got up to his feet and, with his heavy boot, kicked a head that was just coming up the stairs.

Billie obeyed and a minute later the fugitives had gathered upon the last place of safety left.

Billie did as told, and a minute later, the fugitives had gathered at the last safe spot left.

"If we only had some ammunition," moaned Billie. "Can't we do something?"

"If only we had some ammo," Billie complained. "Can't we do something?"

Then, as in answer to his own query, he picked up a twelve-pound cannon ball that lay on the roof [Pg 111] and, raising it above his head with both hands, hurled it through the opening upon those below.

Then, as if responding to his own question, he picked up a twelve-pound cannonball that was on the roof [Pg 111] and, lifting it above his head with both hands, threw it through the opening at those below.

This unexpected attack caused the besiegers to draw back, but only for a moment. Then they came on again. In his desperation, Mr. Black, with almost superhuman strength, picked up the cannon itself, just as Billie had picked up the ball, and hurled it down the stairs.

This sudden attack made the attackers hesitate, but only for a moment. Then they charged forward again. In his desperation, Mr. Black, with almost superhuman strength, lifted the cannon itself, just like Billie had lifted the ball, and threw it down the stairs.

Half a dozen men fell beneath its weight, while the others, frightened at such an exhibition of strength, fell back in dismay.

Half a dozen men collapsed under its weight, while the others, terrified by this display of strength, stepped back in shock.

A shout from the captain urged them forward, but ere they could gather their courage for another rush there came the sound of a volley in the patio below and a minute later Adrian rushed up the stairs, followed by Captain Lopez and a squad of his soldiers.

A shout from the captain pushed them forward, but before they could muster the courage for another charge, they heard a shot in the courtyard below, and a minute later, Adrian came rushing up the stairs, followed by Captain Lopez and a group of his soldiers.

Taken in the rear and entirely by surprise, the Huerta forces threw down their arms and cried for mercy, and in less than five minutes after the arrival of Captain Lopez and his men, the entire force, or as many as remained, were prisoners.

Taken by surprise from behind, the Huerta forces dropped their weapons and pleaded for mercy. In less than five minutes after Captain Lopez and his men arrived, the entire force, or what was left of them, were captured.


CHAPTER XIII.

A NARROW ESCAPE.

Two days later the three boys sat on the verandah of Mr. Black's commodious house awaiting the call [Pg 112] to breakfast. Under escort of Captain Lopez' men they had crossed the valley between Mr. Black's and Gen. Blanco's the day after the night attack and had spent the time since in getting a much needed rest.

Two days later, the three boys sat on the porch of Mr. Black's spacious house waiting for the call to breakfast. Accompanied by Captain Lopez's men, they had crossed the valley between Mr. Black's and General Blanco's after the night attack and had spent the time since getting some much-needed rest. [Pg 112]

"It's less than four days since we left the City of Mexico," remarked Donald, "but it seems like a month. I wonder how matters stand at Vera Cruz?"

"It's been less than four days since we left Mexico City," Donald said, "but it feels like a month. I wonder how things are going in Veracruz?"

"From that telegram from Gen. Maas, that we took from the lieutenant, Admiral Fletcher may have taken the city," said Billie.

"Based on that telegram from Gen. Maas that we got from the lieutenant, Admiral Fletcher might have taken the city," Billie said.

"I hope not," from Adrian.

"I hope not," Adrian said.

"Why?" asked both the others.

"Why?" both of the others asked.

"'Cause I'd like to be there when it happens."

"'Cause I want to be there when it happens."

"Yes, so would I," echoed Billie.

"Same here," Billie replied.

"If he has taken it," ventured Donald, "we may have difficulty getting through the Mexican lines."

"If he has taken it," Donald suggested, "we might have trouble getting past the Mexican lines."

"Well, the best thing we can do," asserted Adrian, "is to get somewhere and find out what is going on just as soon as we can."

"Well, the best thing we can do," Adrian said, "is to find a place and figure out what's happening as soon as possible."

The call to breakfast interrupted their conversation, but as soon as they were seated at the table, they broached the matter to Mr. Black.

The call to breakfast interrupted their conversation, but as soon as they sat down at the table, they brought up the topic with Mr. Black.

"I expect you are right," he said, "but I'd like to have you stay with me a while. It's mighty lonesome here for Josie and me."

"I think you’re right," he said, "but I’d really like you to stay with me for a bit. It’s really lonely here for Josie and me."

"If we are at war with the Mexicans," remarked Billie, "this will be an unhealthy place for an American, I imagine. I should think you would want to take your daughter away from here."

"If we're at war with the Mexicans," Billie said, "this will be a dangerous place for an American, I guess. I would think you'd want to get your daughter out of here."

"Oh, Josie and I are not afraid, are we, Josie?"[Pg 113]

"Oh, Josie and I aren’t scared, are we, Josie?"[Pg 113]

"No indeed, Dad. We are a match for a regiment of Mexicans when we are on our own ground."

"No way, Dad. We're a match for a whole regiment of Mexicans when we're on our own territory."

But in spite of the assertion made by Mr. Black he admitted to the boys after breakfast when Josie was not present that he wished his daughter was safe in Vera Cruz.

But despite what Mr. Black said, he admitted to the boys after breakfast, when Josie wasn't around, that he wished his daughter was safe in Vera Cruz.

"Why don't you go with us?" asked Adrian. "We should be pleased to act as an escort."

"Why don't you come with us?" Adrian asked. "We'd be happy to be your escort."

"Yes," echoed Billie. "We'll see you through."

"Yeah," Billie replied. "We'll support you."

"I'll tell you what I had thought of doing," said Mr. Black. "It's only a good day's ride a-horseback to Moreno. We have many friends there with whom I could leave her. If you boys would act as an escort that far you would be no farther from Vera Cruz than you are now and I believe you would have a better chance in reaching the port over the Tierra Blanca division than on the main line."

"I'll tell you what I was thinking of doing," Mr. Black said. "It’s just a full day’s ride on horseback to Moreno. We have a lot of friends there who I could leave her with. If you guys would act as an escort that far, you wouldn't be any further from Vera Cruz than you are now, and I believe you'd have a better chance of reaching the port via the Tierra Blanca route than on the main line."

"Whether we would or not," replied Adrian, "we should be glad to act as your escort."

"Whether we want to or not," Adrian replied, "we'd be happy to be your escort."

"There is another thing in favor of that route," continued Mr. Black. "The farther we keep from the main line of railroad, the less likely we are to fall in with the Huerta forces. The southern territory as far as Santa Lucrecia is practically in the hands of Carranza."

"There’s another advantage to that route," Mr. Black continued. "The further we stay away from the main railroad line, the less likely we are to encounter the Huerta forces. The southern region all the way to Santa Lucrecia is basically under Carranza's control."

"From what you say," was Donald's comment, "it is greatly to our advantage to do as you wish. Let's consider the matter settled and start at once."

"Based on what you’re saying," Donald replied, "it’s definitely in our best interest to go along with what you want. Let’s consider this settled and get started right away."

"It's too late in the day to start now," was Mr. [Pg 114] Black's reply. "We shall wait until to-morrow morning and be on our way by daylight. I don't want to be riding through the mountains after dark. There are wild animals that are worse than the soldiers."

"It's too late to start now," Mr. [Pg 114] Black replied. "We'll wait until tomorrow morning and head out at dawn. I don't want to be riding through the mountains after dark. There are wild animals that are scarier than the soldiers."

"As the Señora Blanco can testify," laughed Billie. "Every time I think of what a close shave she had, it gives me a chill."

"As Señora Blanco can confirm," laughed Billie. "Every time I think about how close she came, it gives me chills."

That afternoon Mr. Black brought out half a dozen horses for the inspection of his guests.

That afternoon, Mr. Black brought out six horses for his guests to check out.

"A day's ride on a strange horse isn't always an easy task," he explained, "and I thought you might amuse yourself trying these. You can each pick out the one that suits him best."

"A day's ride on an unfamiliar horse isn't always a simple task," he explained, "and I thought you might enjoy trying these. You can each choose the one that fits you best."

It was a task which suited the boys better than any they had undertaken in days, and as they had not only Mr. Black, but Josie and the General's wife for spectators, they were more than pleased to show their dexterity after true cowboy fashion.

It was a job that suited the boys better than anything they had done in days, and since they had not only Mr. Black but also Josie and the General's wife watching, they were more than happy to show off their skills in true cowboy style.

The remainder of the afternoon was therefore spent in riding, throwing the lariat and in shooting, much to the gratification of Mr. Black, who declared he had never seen a better exhibition of its kind.

The rest of the afternoon was spent riding, roping, and shooting, much to the delight of Mr. Black, who said he had never seen a better display of its kind.

As a result of their experience, the boys picked out three medium-sized horses, which Mr. Black emphatically stated showed their good judgment of horse flesh, as completely as their riding had proved their horsemanship.

As a result of their experience, the boys chose three medium-sized horses, which Mr. Black strongly pointed out demonstrated their good judgment in horse selection, just as their riding had showcased their skills.

They were all in the saddle early the following [Pg 115] morning, Josie's wound having healed sufficiently to permit her to ride without danger.

They were all on horseback early the next morning, as Josie's injury had healed enough for her to ride safely.

Early morning in the tropics is the pleasantest time of the day, and although the road from Mr. Black's hacienda to Moreno would take them from an altitude of over four thousand feet down to about two thousand feet above sea level, they would be sufficiently up in the mountains to make riding fairly comfortable.

Early morning in the tropics is the nicest time of the day, and even though the road from Mr. Black's hacienda to Moreno would take them down from an altitude of over four thousand feet to about two thousand feet above sea level, they would still be high enough in the mountains to make riding quite comfortable.

The route chosen took the little party first to the headquarters of the Carranza force operating in that section. They were warmly greeted by General Dorantes, the commanding officer, who furnished them with a guard of four men and passes through the lines, "if," he added as he bade them good luck, "you should find it necessary to pass our lines. If my reports are correct, we are in possession of all the territory to the south."

The route they took first led the small group to the headquarters of the Carranza force in that area. They were warmly welcomed by General Dorantes, the commanding officer, who provided them with a guard of four soldiers and passes to get through the lines. "If," he said as he wished them good luck, "you need to cross our lines. If my reports are accurate, we control all the land to the south."

For hours the cavalcade rode on without incident, stopping only long enough to partake of a mid-day meal at the hacienda of Don Alvaro Flores, a friend of Mr. Black's. Late in the afternoon, however, when about six miles from their destination, there came to their ears the sound of heavy firing—of field pieces mingled with the occasional roll of a machine gun.

For hours, the group rode on without any problems, stopping only briefly to have lunch at the hacienda of Don Alvaro Flores, a friend of Mr. Black. Late in the afternoon, however, when they were about six miles from their destination, they heard the sounds of heavy gunfire—cannons mixed with the occasional burst of a machine gun.

They stopped and listened intently.

They paused and listened closely.

"Which direction do you make the firing to be?" asked Mr. Black of the corporal in command of the escort.

"Which way do you want the firing to go?" asked Mr. Black to the corporal in charge of the escort.

"In the direction of Tierra Blanca, sir. It sounds[Pg 116] as though our forces might have been attacked."

"In the direction of Tierra Blanca, sir. It sounds[Pg 116] like our forces might have been attacked."

"How will that affect our journey?"

"How will that impact our journey?"

"Hard to tell, sir. If we win, as we shall, the enemy may fall back toward Santa Lucrecia, or they may retreat toward Moreno. If you will take my advice, you will halt here until the action is over."

"Hard to say, sir. If we win, which we will, the enemy might pull back toward Santa Lucrecia, or they could retreat toward Moreno. If you ask for my advice, I recommend you stay here until the fighting is done."

The advice seemed most excellent and the cavalcade came to a halt and the riders dismounted to give themselves a much-needed rest.

The advice sounded really good, so the procession stopped, and the riders got off their horses to take a much-needed break.

The firing lasted something like twenty minutes, then suddenly ceased, with the exception of an occasional "Boom!"

The gunfire lasted about twenty minutes, then suddenly stopped, except for an occasional "Boom!"

"It sounds as though we had beaten them off," said the corporal.

"It sounds like we drove them away," said the corporal.

"Is there any way that we can tell in which direction they have retreated?"

"Is there any way we can figure out which direction they went?"

"Only by a reconnoiter."

"Only through a reconnaissance."

"Which is our long suit," declared Billie. "You just stay here with the guard, Mr. Black, and we three will soon have a report."

"That's our strength," Billie said. "You just stay here with the guard, Mr. Black, and the three of us will have a report for you soon."

Looking to their arms, with which they had been well supplied by their host before leaving the hacienda, the boys rode forward toward an elevation something like a mile distant. From this they hoped to get a view of the country.

Looking at the weapons their host had generously provided before they left the hacienda, the boys rode ahead toward a rise about a mile away. From there, they hoped to get a look at the landscape.

There was a fairly level road and they dashed along at a good rate despite their long ride. The horses were as hard as iron and the boys did not know the meaning of the word tired.

There was a pretty flat road, and they raced along at a good speed despite their long journey. The horses were as tough as nails, and the boys didn't know what being tired felt like.

Reaching the top of the hill, they found a space,[Pg 117] from which they could see clear across the valley through which ran the railroad from Santa Lucrecia to Vera Cruz. To the right, some miles away, they could see a good-sized little city which their common sense told them must be Tierra Blanca. To the left, but nearer, was the smaller town of Moreno, for which they were headed.

Reaching the top of the hill, they found a spot,[Pg 117] from where they could see all the way across the valley that the railroad ran through, connecting Santa Lucrecia to Vera Cruz. To the right, a few miles away, they could see a decent-sized city that they figured had to be Tierra Blanca. To the left, but closer, was the smaller town of Moreno, which was their destination.

Between the two towns, and coming directly toward them, was a band of galloping horsemen, probably one hundred or more in number.

Between the two towns, and heading straight for them, was a group of galloping horsemen, likely a hundred or more in total.

"Great Scott!" was Billie's ejaculation as he caught sight of the horsemen, "they're coming right at us."

"Great Scott!" Billie exclaimed as he spotted the horsemen, "they're coming straight for us."

"I believe you are right," from Donald. "They seem to be on this very road."

"I think you're right," Donald said. "They seem to be on this exact road."

"What would you take them to be?" was Billie's next question.

"What do you think they are?" was Billie's next question.

"Give it up," replied Donald.

"Quit it," replied Donald.

"I'll bet I can make a good guess," said Adrian. "They are a flying column of Huerta cavalry, sent out to test the Carranza lines. They have paid their respects to Tierra Blanca and now they are headed for Cordoba."

"I'll bet I can take a good guess," said Adrian. "They're a mobile unit of Huerta cavalry, sent out to test the Carranza lines. They've paid their respects to Tierra Blanca and now they're on their way to Cordoba."

"They'll never get there," said Billie. "They'll run into General Dorante's men."

"They're never going to make it," Billie said. "They're going to run into General Dorante's soldiers."

"But if it's a surprise, they'll cut their way through."

"But if it's a surprise, they'll find a way through."

"It's up to us to see that it is not a surprise!" [Pg 118] cried Donald. "Come on!" and he turned and dashed back the road they had come.

"It's our responsibility to make sure it doesn't catch us off guard!"[Pg 118] cried Donald. "Let's go!" and he turned and raced back down the road they had just traveled.

In less than five minutes they were where they had left their companions. In another two minutes they had told their story and in another minute the corporal and his men were on their way back toward General Dorante's headquarters.

In under five minutes, they were back where they had left their friends. In another two minutes, they had shared their story, and in just a minute, the corporal and his men were heading back toward General Dorante's headquarters.

"It's only a question of whose horses are the best," said Mr. Black. "And now let us to cover."

"It's just about whose horses are the best," said Mr. Black. "Now let's get moving."

Leaving the highway, the Americans turned sharply to the left and dashed for the shelter of a piece of woodland something like a half a mile away. Pell-mell they went over rocks and shrubs, regardless of themselves or their horses, and succeeded in reaching the friendly cover just about three minutes before the cavalry came into sight over the hill.

Leaving the highway, the Americans quickly turned left and rushed toward a wooded area about half a mile away. They barreled over rocks and bushes, not caring about themselves or their horses, and managed to reach the protective cover just three minutes before the cavalry appeared over the hill.

"We're all right now," said Mr. Black, "if the troopers will stick to the road, but if they should take it into their heads to scatter, we might have trouble."

"We're good for now," said Mr. Black, "as long as the troopers stay on the road, but if they decide to wander off, we could run into some trouble."

With eager eyes the boys watched the oncoming horsemen, prepared to flee for their lives if they should be discovered, as they realized how useless would be any resistance.

With wide eyes, the boys watched the approaching horsemen, ready to run for their lives if they were spotted, knowing that any attempt to fight back would be pointless.

Nearer and nearer they came until the leaders were at the very spot they had just left, and then with a rush they passed by, turning neither to the right nor to the left.

Nearer and nearer they came until the leaders were at the exact spot they had just left, and then with a rush they zoomed past, turning neither to the right nor to the left.

Every one in the party heaved a deep sigh of[Pg 119] relief.

Every person at the party let out a big sigh of[Pg 119] relief.

"It's a wonder some of them didn't stop," said Billie.

"It's a miracle some of them didn't stop," Billie said.

"Oh, I don't know," laughed Adrian. "Look yonder," and he pointed to the brow of the hill, where another, but much smaller body of horsemen had appeared. "They evidently didn't intend to have their mission interfered with by fighting a rear-guard skirmish."

"Oh, I have no idea," laughed Adrian. "Look over there," and he pointed to the top of the hill, where another, but much smaller group of horsemen had appeared. "They clearly didn’t plan to let a rear-guard skirmish get in the way of their mission."

"I think the best thing we can do," said Mr. Black, "is to surrender ourselves to the pursuers. They are evidently Carranzistas and our passes will protect us."

"I think the best thing we can do," Mr. Black said, "is to just give ourselves up to the pursuers. They are clearly Carranzistas, and our passes will keep us safe."

Breaking off a piece of bamboo, Mr. Black tied a handkerchief to it and raising it above his head the little party rode out of the woods. They were sighted at once and a party of horsemen dashed toward them, and surrounded them.

Breaking off a piece of bamboo, Mr. Black tied a handkerchief to it and raised it above his head as the small group rode out of the woods. They were spotted right away, and a group of horsemen rushed toward them and surrounded them.

It was as they had expected and Gen. Dorantes' passes were immediately recognized by the officer in command. He was much pleased at the information given him concerning the corporal and thanked the boys in the name of Gen. Carranza for their good offices. He furthermore detached an escort of a dozen men to see that they reached Moreno in safety and commended them to the care of the jefe politico, with the verbal instruction that the boys be allowed to proceed on their way to Vera Cruz at their will.

It was exactly what they had anticipated, and General Dorantes' passes were quickly recognized by the officer in charge. He was very pleased with the information provided about the corporal and thanked the boys on behalf of General Carranza for their assistance. He also assigned a dozen men as an escort to ensure they reached Moreno safely and entrusted them to the care of the local leader, giving verbal instructions that the boys could continue on their journey to Vera Cruz whenever they wanted.


[Pg 120]

CHAPTER XIV.

APRIL TWENTY-ONE.

"Boys," said Mr. Black the following morning as they were preparing to pay a visit to the jefe politico, "I want you to do me a favor."

"Boys," Mr. Black said the next morning as they got ready to visit the town leader, "I need you to do me a favor."

The boys looked at him in surprise.

The boys stared at him in shock.

"Well, what is it?" asked Donald, when Mr. Black did not immediately continue.

"Well, what is it?" Donald asked when Mr. Black didn't continue right away.

"I want you to accept, as a mark of my appreciation of your bravery and good services, the horses upon which you are mounted and the accoutrements."

"I want you to accept these horses you're riding and their gear as a sign of my gratitude for your bravery and valuable service."

The look of surprise on the faces of the boys deepened.

The look of surprise on the boys' faces grew stronger.

"I am sure, sir," replied Donald, speaking for the others, "we should be pleased to accept them if we were expecting to remain in the country. We hope, however, to leave Vera Cruz in a very few days."

"I’m sure, sir," Donald replied for the others, "we’d be happy to accept them if we were planning to stay in the country. However, we hope to leave Vera Cruz in just a few days."

"Boys," and Mr. Black's face was most serious, "there is no knowing when you will reach Vera Cruz; much less leave it."

"Boys," Mr. Black said, his expression very serious, "there's no way to tell when you'll get to Vera Cruz, let alone when you'll leave."

"What do you mean?" from Billie.

"What do you mean?" asked Billie.

"I had a long talk with my friend, Don Ramon, last night after you were in bed and he tells me that the railroad between here and Vera Cruz is in the hands of Gen. Maas, the other side of Guayabo, and [Pg 121] there is almost no chance of your being allowed to pass through the lines."

"I had a long conversation with my friend, Don Ramon, last night after you went to bed, and he told me that the railroad between here and Vera Cruz is under the control of Gen. Maas, on the other side of Guayabo, and [Pg 121] there is almost no chance that you'll be allowed to cross the lines."

"Why not?" from Adrian.

"Why not?" said Adrian.

"Well, you see, since we have heard anything, relations between the two countries have become more and more strained and the United States has practically declared a blockade on Vera Cruz. The entire Atlantic fleet is assembled outside and there is liable to be a clash at any time."

"Well, you see, since we haven’t heard anything, relations between the two countries have gotten more and more tense, and the United States has basically declared a blockade on Vera Cruz. The entire Atlantic fleet is gathered outside, and there's likely to be a conflict at any moment."

"Then we'll accept the horses, Mr. Black," spoke up Donald, "and we'll ride to Vera Cruz. It can't be more than fifty miles."

"Then we'll take the horses, Mr. Black," Donald said, "and we'll ride to Vera Cruz. It can't be more than fifty miles."

"Forty-six by rail," said Mr. Black. "I kind of thought you might like to try and make it, is why I want to give you the horses," and the speaker smiled knowingly.

"Forty-six by rail," said Mr. Black. "I figured you might want to try and make it, which is why I’m offering you the horses," and the speaker smiled knowingly.

"The sooner we start the better, I expect," said Adrian.

"The sooner we start, the better, I expect," said Adrian.

"Yes; after you pay your respects to the mayor."

"Sure; after you say hi to the mayor."

The foregoing conversation explains how it happened that on the morning of April 21, 1914, the Broncho Rider Boys looked down from a little hill, the top of which was covered by tropical foliage, upon the harbor of Vera Cruz, with the American fleet in the offing.

The previous conversation explains how it happened that on the morning of April 21, 1914, the Broncho Rider Boys looked down from a small hill, the top of which was covered in tropical plants, at the harbor of Vera Cruz, with the American fleet offshore.

By a circuitous route and by two nights of riding, hiding in the day, the boys had reached this spot about an hour after sunrise.

By taking a roundabout way and riding for two nights, hiding during the day, the boys arrived at this spot about an hour after sunrise.

"Whew!" was Billie's exclamation as he looked out across the harbor at the men-of-war flying the [Pg 122] American flag. "There's a bunch of them, isn't there?"

"Whew!" Billie exclaimed as he looked out across the harbor at the warships flying the [Pg 122] American flag. "There are a lot of them, aren't there?"

"Sure is," from Adrian, "and they look peaceable, too."

"Sure is," Adrian said, "and they look calm, too."

"You never can tell by the looks of a toad how far it will jump," laughed Donald. "But peaceable or warlike, I'd like mighty well to be on board one of them."

"You can never tell just by looking at a toad how far it will jump," laughed Donald. "But whether it’s calm or aggressive, I’d really like to be on one of those."

"Here, too," from Billie. "I wonder how we're going to make it."

"Here, too," said Billie. "I wonder how we're going to get through this."

"How would it do for one of us to try and get into town and find the American consul?" queried Adrian.

"How about one of us trying to get into town and find the American consul?" Adrian asked.

"Fine," from Donald, "if he succeeded; but bad if he did not."

"Fine," said Donald, "if he succeeded; but not so great if he didn't."

"Then what had we better do?"

"What should we do now?"

"Give it up. Suppose we wait here a while and something may turn up."

"Let it go. How about we hang around here for a bit and see if something comes up?"

"I'd like to know what can turn up?" asked Billie.

"I want to know what can come up?" asked Billie.

"I don't know; but I was thinking that one of the ships might happen to send a boat ashore for something. If we saw it coming, we could ride quickly into town."

"I don't know; but I was thinking that one of the ships might send a boat ashore for something. If we saw it coming, we could quickly ride into town."

Adrian laughed. "I reckon it would be just as hard to get through the Mexican lines then as now. No! I'm going out to reconnoiter."

Adrian laughed. "I think it would be just as tough to get past the Mexican lines then as it is now. No! I'm going out to scout."

It was an hour later when he returned.

It was an hour later when he got back.

"I've found a way," he said as he threw himself on the ground and fanned himself vigorously with [Pg 123] his hat. "It's down by the water works. There are several Americans down there."

"I've found a way," he said as he dropped to the ground and fanned himself energetically with [Pg 123] his hat. "It's by the waterworks. There are a few Americans down there."

"Good," said Billie. "Let's go. I'm getting mighty hungry."

"Good," Billie said. "Let's go. I'm really hungry."

"Now don't be in a rush," cautioned Adrian. "There's a picket between here and there. We'll have to ride easy. You put the saddles on the horses. I'm pretty well tired. I want to tell you it's hot."

"Now don't hurry," warned Adrian. "There's a fence between here and there. We'll need to ride slowly. You put the saddles on the horses. I'm pretty worn out. I just want to mention that it's really hot."

Billie was busy with the horses when Don suddenly pointed out toward the American men-of-war.

Billie was occupied with the horses when Don suddenly pointed toward the American warships.

"Look!" he exclaimed. "There's something doing."

"Check it out!" he said. "Something’s happening."

And sure enough there was.

And sure enough, it was there.

Out from behind two of the largest vessels there suddenly darted a number of launches loaded with blue-jackets and marines.

Out from behind two of the largest ships, a bunch of launches suddenly zipped out, loaded with sailors and marines.

In another instant they had headed for the shore, while out behind them trailed the American flag.

In a moment, they made their way to the shore, with the American flag waving behind them.

The boys sprang to their feet and watched the approaching boats with the utmost interest.

The boys jumped up and watched the approaching boats with great interest.

"There must be a thousand of them!" exclaimed Billie.

"There must be a thousand of them!" Billie exclaimed.

"More than that," said Donald, as his eyes ran over the oncoming boats. "There's nearer fifteen hundred."

"More than that," Donald said, looking over the approaching boats. "There's closer to fifteen hundred."

"And look there," cried Adrian. "See those two smaller ships moving in toward shore."

"And look there," shouted Adrian. "Check out those two smaller ships heading toward the shore."

"What do you suppose they are going to do?" asked Billie, all in a tremor of excitement.

"What do you think they're going to do?" asked Billie, shaking with excitement.

"Looks to me," replied Donald, "like they were[Pg 124] going to capture the town."

"Looks to me," replied Donald, "like they were[Pg 124] going to take over the town."

"Why, that's war!" from Adrian.

"That's war!" from Adrian.

"Well, isn't that what we've been expecting? I wish I knew what it all means."

"Well, isn't that what we've been anticipating? I wish I understood what it all means."

As some of the readers may not know what was the cause of the action it may be explained that a German steamship had arrived the night before loaded with arms for Huerta's army. Admiral Fletcher had no right to seize the German ship, so he determined to seize the port of Vera Cruz. Then if the arms were landed they would be in the hands of the Americans.

As some readers might not be aware of the reason behind the actions, it can be explained that a German steamship arrived the night before, loaded with weapons for Huerta's army. Admiral Fletcher had no authority to take the German ship, so he decided to take control of the port of Vera Cruz. That way, if the weapons were offloaded, they would end up in American hands.

"Well," declared Adrian, "whatever else it means, it means business."

"Well," said Adrian, "whatever else it means, it means business."

"Do you suppose the Mexicans will try to prevent the landing?" asked Billie.

"Do you think the Mexicans will try to stop the landing?" Billie asked.

"We'll know in a minute, for they are most ashore," said Donald.

"We'll know soon, since they're mostly on land now," said Donald.

Donald was right and in another minute a shot rang out followed by a rattle of musketry.

Donald was right, and in just a minute, a shot fired, followed by a series of gunshots.

"Flash! Flash! Bang! Bang!" spoke the howitzers in the foremost of the launches.

"Flash! Flash! Bang! Bang!" shouted the howitzers in the front of the launches.

Boom! Boom! Boom! came the sound of three guns from the ship nearest the city, which proved to be the Prairie.

Boom! Boom! Boom! came the sound of three guns from the ship closest to the city, which turned out to be the Prairie.

The crash of the six-inch shells as they struck in the city could be heard above the rattle of the rifle fire which had now become continuous.

The sound of six-inch shells crashing into the city could be heard over the constant rattle of rifle fire that had now taken on a relentless rhythm.

"It's a sure enough battle," cried Billie. "Come [Pg 125] on! Let's go down!" and he flung himself onto his horse.

"It's definitely a fight," shouted Billie. "Come on! Let's go!" and he jumped onto his horse.

"What would you do?" cried Donald, seizing Billie's horse by the bridle. "You'd be killed by the fire from our own guns. This is the best place we could be in while the firing is going on. As soon as our men have driven the Mexicans out of town, then we can go in."

"What are you going to do?" shouted Donald, grabbing Billie’s horse by the reins. "You’d be shot by our own guns. This is the safest spot we can be while the fighting is happening. Once our guys have pushed the Mexicans out of town, then we can move in."

"But I want to take a hand in the fun," said Billie.

"But I want to join in on the fun," said Billie.

"It's no fun, as you'll find after it's all over. No knowing how many of our boys are being lost, to say nothing of the Mexicans."

"It's not enjoyable, as you'll realize once it's all done. There's no way of knowing how many of our guys are getting lost, not to mention the Mexicans."

"Look!" cried Adrian, who had not taken his eyes from the scene in the harbor. "There are a couple of other ships going into action."

"Look!" shouted Adrian, who hadn't taken his eyes off the scene in the harbor. "There are a couple of other ships getting ready to engage."

Billie turned at sound of Adrian's words. Sure enough, there came flashes from more guns, as the Chester and San Francisco moved up into striking distance, although at that time the boys did not know the vessels' names.

Billie turned at the sound of Adrian's words. Sure enough, there were flashes from more guns as the Chester and San Francisco moved into striking distance, although at that time the boys didn't know the names of the vessels.

"What show will the Mexicans have against those guns!" exclaimed Donald. "They'll be driven out of town in short order."

"What a fight the Mexicans will put up against those guns!" exclaimed Donald. "They'll be run out of town in no time."

Once more Donald was right and after some minutes of firing, the boys realized that the rifle fire was becoming less.

Once again, Donald was right, and after a few minutes of shooting, the boys noticed that the gunfire was starting to decrease.

"If they retreat, which way do you suppose they will go?" queried Adrian.

"If they pull back, which direction do you think they'll take?" Adrian asked.

"I was just thinking about that," was Donald's[Pg 126] reply. "What do you think, Billie?"

"I was just thinking about that," Donald replied. "What do you think, Billie?"

"I should think along the main line of railroad."

"I should consider the main railroad line."

"And I imagine they'll retreat in every direction," said Adrian.

"And I bet they'll pull back in every direction," said Adrian.

"In which case," advised Donald, "we'd better be prepared to make a dash through."

"In that case," Donald suggested, "we should be ready to make a quick run through."

"Look here," from Billie. "Can't you see that the shots are all aimed at one particular place? I'm sure if we come around by the south, we can get in behind our men some way. It's a good deal better chance than to stay here to be shot down by the retreating Mexicans."

"Look," Billie said. "Can't you see that the shots are all aimed at one specific spot? I'm sure if we circle around to the south, we can find a way to get behind our guys. It's a much better chance than just sticking around here to get shot by the retreating Mexicans."

The others were forced to admit the wisdom of Billie's advice and they proceeded to follow it.

The others had to acknowledge that Billie’s advice was smart, so they went ahead and followed it.

Mounting their horses, they rapidly retraced their steps for a couple of hundred yards and then headed for the harbor.

Mounting their horses, they quickly rode back for a couple of hundred yards and then made their way to the harbor.

They had not gone more than half a mile when they caught a glimpse of foot soldiers forming in line on what appeared to be a parade ground.

They hadn't gone more than half a mile when they saw some infantry lining up on what looked like a parade ground.

"This is no place for us," exclaimed Donald. "Back to the woods."

"This isn’t the right place for us," Donald shouted. "Let’s head back to the woods."

"I'm afraid it's too late," from Adrian.

"I'm sorry, but it's too late," Adrian said.

"I hate to run for it," was Billie's comment, "but it's the best we can do. I have no mind to fall into Mexican hands right now."

"I really don't want to run for it," Billie said, "but it's the best option we have. I definitely don't want to end up in Mexican hands right now."

He put spurs to his horse and dashed through a little clump of trees which grew by the way, closely followed by the other two.

He kicked his horse into a sprint and raced through a small group of trees lining the path, closely followed by the other two.

They seemed to have done just the right thing and[Pg 127] were congratulating themselves upon their lucky escape, when they heard horses coming from the other way.

They appeared to have made the right choice and[Pg 127] were patting themselves on the back for their fortunate escape, when they heard horses approaching from the opposite direction.

Billie drew his horse up with a sudden turn.

Billie suddenly turned his horse to a stop.

"It looks as though we'd have to fight for it, boys! If we do let's give a good account of ourselves."

"It seems like we're going to have to fight for it, guys! If we do, let's make sure we represent ourselves well."

They drew their Winchesters for instant use.

They pulled out their Winchesters for immediate use.

The sound of hoofbeats drew nearer and then there burst into sight from around a turn in the road a sight which caused the boys nearly to fall from their horses with laughter.

The sound of hoofbeats got closer, and then around a bend in the road came a sight that almost made the boys fall off their horses with laughter.

Riding on a mule and followed by several peons on burros was the florid-faced gentleman whom they had met on the train the day they left the City of Mexico. He was bare-headed and his coat tails streamed out in the breeze. He had no saddle and was clinging onto the mule by grasping him around the neck.

Riding a mule and followed by several workers on donkeys was the rosy-cheeked man they had met on the train the day they left Mexico City. He had no hat on and his coat tails flapped in the wind. He wasn't using a saddle and was holding onto the mule by wrapping his arms around its neck.

"Help! Help!" he cried as he caught sight of the boys. "I surrender. I surrender."

"Help! Help!" he shouted as he spotted the boys. "I give up. I give up."

Seeing the boys' horses directly in his path, the mule came to a sudden stop, with both feet stuck out before him. The result was that the florid-faced gentleman, who wished to head a company of marines to drive the Mexicans off the earth, shot forward over the mule's head and landed in a cactus bush.

Seeing the boys' horses right in front of him, the mule suddenly stopped, with both feet sticking out in front. As a result, the red-faced gentleman, who wanted to lead a group of marines to drive the Mexicans out, flew over the mule's head and landed in a cactus bush.

Now a cactus is not a pleasant thing to sit upon, [Pg 128] even when the greatest care is used; but to be shot into it as from a catapult is more than any one can bear.

Now, sitting on a cactus isn't exactly comfortable, [Pg 128] even with the utmost caution; but being launched into it like from a catapult is more than anyone can handle.

With a yell that might have been heard half a mile, had it not been for the noise of the guns, the man scrambled to his feet and darted away down the hill, while the peons stopped at the unexpected sight of the boys.

With a yell that could have been heard half a mile away, if it weren't for the sound of the guns, the man jumped to his feet and rushed down the hill, while the workers paused at the surprising sight of the boys.

"Americanos!" they cried, and, tumbling off their burros, fell on their knees in abject terror, as though expecting that their end had come.

"Americans!" they shouted, and, sliding off their donkeys, dropped to their knees in total fear, as if they believed their time had come.


CHAPTER XV.

THE INSULT AVENGED.

Perceiving that the advantage was on their side, the boys did not hesitate to profit by it.

Seeing that they had the upper hand, the boys didn't hesitate to take advantage of it.

"Do as we bid," ordered Donald sternly, "and your lives will be saved. Disobey and we will not answer for the consequences."

"Follow our orders," Donald commanded firmly, "and you will be safe. Disobey, and we won't be responsible for what happens next."

The kneeling peons uttered never a word, but raised their eyes with a look of surprise.

The kneeling workers didn’t say a word, but they looked up with expressions of surprise.

"Get up," was the next command.

"Stand up," was the next command.

The peons obeyed.

The workers complied.

"Now conduct us to the water front by a route where there are no Mexican soldiers."

"Now take us to the waterfront by a way that avoids any Mexican soldiers."

"Do you think you can trust them?" asked Billie.

"Do you think you can trust them?" Billie asked.

"At any sign of treachery, our first shot will be[Pg 129] for them." Then to the peons: "Now march."

"At any sign of betrayal, our first shot will be[Pg 129] for them." Then to the workers: "Now march."

Without a word the peons, five in number, started back over the route by which they had come but a minute before.

Without saying a word, the five workers turned around and started back the way they had come just a minute earlier.

"Where did the other American come from?" asked Billie of the peon nearest him as they rode along.

"Where did the other American come from?" asked Billie to the closest worker next to him as they rode along.

"Quien sabe, señor," was the hesitating response. "We saw him riding by and we followed him."

"Who knows, sir," was the uncertain reply. "We saw him riding by and followed him."

"That's the way with loud talkers," remarked Adrian. "When the test comes they usually weaken."

"That's how it is with people who talk a lot," Adrian said. "When it really counts, they usually back down."

The firing, which had somewhat subsided for a few minutes, suddenly began again with renewed vigor, especially on the part of the ships.

The gunfire, which had calmed down for a few minutes, suddenly started up again with more intensity, especially from the ships.

"Our boys are getting ready for another advance," said Billie, and his manner became greatly excited. "Let's get there in time to take part."

"Our guys are gearing up for another push," said Billie, becoming really pumped up. "Let's make sure we get there in time to join in."

"I'm willing," declared Adrian. "Come on!"

"I'm in," declared Adrian. "Let's go!"

The two boys dug their spurs into their horses and dashed forward, upsetting a couple of the peons in their flight.

The two boys kicked their horses and raced ahead, knocking over a couple of the workers in their path.

"Hold on!" called out Donald. "You'll get into trouble."

"Wait!" Donald called out. "You'll get in trouble."

Billie and Adrian paid no attention to his cry, whereupon he also put spurs to his horse, leaving the peons gaping with astonishment in the middle of the road.

Billie and Adrian ignored his shout, and then he urged his horse on, leaving the onlookers staring in shock in the middle of the road.

And now the boys came into sight of the water [Pg 130] front where the fighting was going on. It was at the instant that the order had been given to clear the space around the custom house, and the boys saw the marines advance on the double quick.

And now the boys saw the water [Pg 130] front where the fighting was happening. It was right when the order was given to clear the area around the customs house, and the boys watched the marines rush forward quickly.

The Mexicans gave way, but volley after volley was poured down upon the advancing Americans from the roofs of houses and from nearby church towers.

The Mexicans retreated, but waves of gunfire kept raining down on the advancing Americans from the rooftops and nearby church towers.

There were several shots in rapid succession from the Chester, which had drawn in more closely, every one of which struck a tower where a large force of Mexicans had gathered.

There were several shots fired in quick succession from the Chester, which had moved in closer, each one hitting a tower where a large group of Mexicans had assembled.

The tower toppled and fell, carrying many with it.

The tower collapsed and came down, taking many along with it.

"Hurrah!" cried Billie. "Give it to them!" and, firing his rifle as he went, he rode right down into the main street.

"Hurrah!" shouted Billie. "Let’s give it to them!" and, shooting his rifle as he rode, he charged straight into the main street.

"He'll be killed by our own men!" cried Donald.

"He'll be killed by our own people!" shouted Donald.

But he was not. Instead he dashed into the open space in front of the custom house, just as the marines swept by, his hat off and his rifle cracking as fast as he could fire.

But he wasn’t. Instead, he rushed into the open area in front of the customs house, just as the marines passed by, his hat flying off and his rifle firing as quickly as he could pull the trigger.

Seeing that the danger from the marines was past, Donald and Adrian fell in behind Billie, just as an officer came around the corner at the head of another company.

Seeing that the danger from the marines had passed, Donald and Adrian fell in behind Billie, just as an officer came around the corner leading another company.

Espying the boys, he halted his command.

Seeing the boys, he stopped his command.

"What are you doing here?" he demanded.

"What are you doing here?" he asked.

"We just came to town," replied Billie, "and we're trying to help avenge the insult to the flag."

"We just got to town," replied Billie, "and we're trying to help get back at the insult to the flag."

"Good!" was the emphatic reply. "Fall in behind[Pg 131] us. You may be of service."

"Good!" was the enthusiastic response. "Fall in behind[Pg 131] us. You might be helpful."

The boys obeyed and followed the company as it swept up the street. Presently they came to a barricade, behind which the marines had taken a stand. The boys expected the command to halt, but instead they passed the barricade and pushed onward toward the outskirts of the city.

The boys listened and trailed behind the group as it moved up the street. Soon, they reached a barricade, where the marines had set up their position. The boys thought they would be told to stop, but instead, they went past the barricade and continued on toward the edge of the city.

All the time there was a continuous fire upon them by men secreted on the roofs of houses.

All the time, there was a constant barrage of fire from men hidden on the rooftops.

"I'd clean out those snipers if I were in command," said Donald to his companions.

"I'd take out those snipers if I were in charge," said Donald to his friends.

The words were hardly out of his mouth ere another company of marines made its appearance and the men dashed into the houses on either side of the street.

The words were barely out of his mouth when another group of marines showed up, and the men rushed into the houses on either side of the street.

"Somebody has the same idea, Don," was Billie's comment as they rode along.

"Someone has the same idea, Don," Billie said as they rode along.

Two blocks farther came the order to halt and entrench. A minute later the officer called the boys toward him.

Two blocks later, the order came to stop and set up camp. A minute after that, the officer motioned for the guys to come over.

"Would you rather lend us your horses, or act as orderlies?" he asked.

"Would you prefer to lend us your horses, or serve as orderlies?" he asked.

"If it's all the same to you," was the reply, "we'll serve as orderlies."

"If you're okay with it," was the reply, "we'll act as orderlies."

"Very well. Will you," turning to Adrian, "go back to the custom house and tell Captain Rush that we have reached our position. You," to Billie, "ride with all speed to the landing and say that the enemy has retreated toward the water works. They [Pg 132] should not be allowed to stop long enough to do any damage."

"Sure. Will you," turning to Adrian, "head back to the customs office and inform Captain Rush that we've arrived at our location? You," to Billie, "hurry to the landing and let them know that the enemy has pulled back toward the waterworks. They [Pg 132] shouldn't be allowed to linger long enough to cause any harm."

The two boys were off like the wind to carry the orders.

The two boys took off like a shot to deliver the orders.

"Anything for me?" asked Donald.

"Got anything for me?" asked Donald.

"Not for the present. Better dismount and get behind something."

"Not right now. It's best to get off and take cover."

Two minutes later Adrian pulled up in front of the Custom House and delivered his message, while Billie kept on to the water's edge.

Two minutes later, Adrian parked in front of the Custom House and delivered his message while Billie continued to the water's edge.

"Do you know where the water works are?" asked the officer to whom Billie gave his order.

"Do you know where the waterworks are?" asked the officer to whom Billie gave his order.

"Yes, sir!"

"Yes, sir!"

"Then lead us to it."

"Then show us where it is."

Without a word Billie obeyed and the Jackies followed on the run.

Without saying a word, Billie followed the orders, and the Jackies ran after her.

The information was evidently received none too soon, for they encountered quite a force of Mexicans, guarding the works.

The information was clearly received just in time, as they faced a strong group of Mexicans guarding the site.

A volley from the bluejackets was returned by a scattering fire and the Mexicans turned and fled.

A burst of gunfire from the sailors was met with some scattered shots, causing the Mexicans to turn and run.

But the volley had been sufficient to lose Billie his mount, as his horse came to his knees with a bullet in his shoulder.

But the shots were enough to make Billie lose his horse, as his mount went down on its knees with a bullet in its shoulder.

Without waiting to see the cause of Billie's fall any more than to ask if he was hit, the Jackies pushed on toward the water works, leaving Billie to look out for himself as best he could until the work in hand was completed.

Without waiting to find out what caused Billie's fall or even asking if he was hurt, the Jackies moved on toward the waterworks, leaving Billie to fend for himself as best as he could until the job was finished.

"This is sure enough tough luck," was Billie's [Pg 133] comment as he helped the horse to his feet and examined the wound. "It will lay him up for a week."

"This is definitely some bad luck," was Billie's [Pg 133] comment as he helped the horse to its feet and looked at the wound. "It will keep him out of action for a week."

He took the horse by the bridle and led him slowly back toward the Custom House, where he reported to an officer and hunted up Adrian.

He took the horse by the reins and led him slowly back to the Custom House, where he reported to an officer and searched for Adrian.

"What had we better do now?" he asked. "I'd like to find a place to tend to my horse."

"What should we do now?" he asked. "I'd like to find a place to take care of my horse."

"The fighting seems about over," was Adrian's reply, "and I reckon the horse will be given attention by some one."

"The fighting seems to be almost over," Adrian replied, "and I think someone will take care of the horse."

"Oh, I don't want to make any trouble, Ad! If nobody objects, suppose we go hunt a stable."

"Oh, I don't want to cause any trouble, Ad! If no one has a problem with it, how about we go find a stable?"

They were about to leave when a sergeant stopped them.

They were about to leave when a sergeant stopped them.

"You're to follow me to the Captain," he said. "Here," to a marine who stood by, "take charge of these horses and see that the lame one is cared for."

"Come with me to the Captain," he said. "Here," he said to a marine nearby, "take care of these horses and make sure the injured one gets looked after."

"I wonder if they will take our horses away from us?" muttered Adrian as they followed the sergeant.

"I wonder if they're going to take our horses away?" Adrian murmured as they followed the sergeant.

"Give it up. I wonder what he wants of us?"

"Just give it up. I’m curious about what he wants from us?"

It did not take them long to find out.

It didn't take them long to figure it out.

"Are you the boys that brought the messages from Lieutenant Blunt?" asked Captain Rush.

"Are you the guys who brought the messages from Lieutenant Blunt?" asked Captain Rush.

"Yes, sir."

"Yes, sir."

"Will you undertake another mission?"

"Will you take on another mission?"

"With pleasure," replied Adrian.

"Sure thing," replied Adrian.

"Same here, sir," from Billie, "but my horse has been wounded."

"Same here, sir," Billie said, "but my horse has been injured."

"That's bad. However, I guess we can find another."[Pg 134]

"That's not great. But I guess we can look for another one."[Pg 134]

"Sure, sir. I can borrow Don's."

"Sure, I can borrow Don's."

"Who is Don?"

"Who's Don?"

"He's the other one of us, sir. He is still out with Lieutenant Blunt."

"He's the other one of us, sir. He's still out with Lieutenant Blunt."

"Well," said the Captain, "either two of you will do. What I want is to find out to just what point the Mexican army is falling back. Do you think you can find out?"

"Well," said the Captain, "either one of you will do. I need to figure out how far the Mexican army is retreating. Do you think you can find that out?"

"Sure."

"Of course."

"Very well. My compliments to Lieutenant Blunt and give him this order. He will pass two of you through the lines. The other can remain with him. Sergeant, their horses."

"Okay. Please give my compliments to Lieutenant Blunt and hand him this order. He'll take two of you through the lines. The other can stay with him. Sergeant, their horses."

Five minutes later, both astride Adrian's horse and leading the other, they appeared at the outpost and delivered the order.

Five minutes later, both on Adrian's horse and leading the other, they arrived at the outpost and delivered the order.

"Which two shall it be?" laughed the lieutenant as he looked the boys over.

"Which two do you want?" laughed the lieutenant as he checked out the boys.

"I guess it will have to be Adrian and Don," replied Billie ruefully. "I've had glory enough for one day. The insult to the flag has been avenged and the Stars and Stripes are floating over Vera Cruz."

"I guess it has to be Adrian and Don," Billie said with a sigh. "I've had enough glory for one day. The insult to the flag has been avenged, and the Stars and Stripes are flying over Vera Cruz."

"I think it's only fair that Don, as you call him, should share in the adventure," said the lieutenant, "and the sooner you go the better. It is almost sundown now."

"I think it's only fair that Don, as you call him, should be part of the adventure," the lieutenant said, "and the sooner you leave, the better. It's almost sunset now."

Then as Donald and Adrian started on their mission:[Pg 135]

Then as Donald and Adrian began their mission:[Pg 135]

"Success to you and report here when you return."

"Good luck, and let us know when you're back."

"Is there any place near here where I can care for my horse?" asked Billie as soon as the others had passed out of sight.

"Is there anywhere nearby where I can take care of my horse?" Billie asked as soon as the others were out of sight.

"Why, yes. There are stables in almost any of these houses. Here, try this one," and the lieutenant indicated the one before which they were standing.

"Sure, there are stables in almost any of these houses. Here, give this one a try," and the lieutenant pointed to the one in front of them.

Billie knocked on the big door, but there was no reply.

Billie knocked on the large door, but there was no response.

"Knock louder," laughed the lieutenant. "Use your boot."

"Knock harder," laughed the lieutenant. "Use your boot."

Billie used his foot and with such vigor that the gate flew open.

Billie kicked the gate open with such force that it swung wide.

When no one appeared to answer his summons, he stuck his head inside the patio and called lustily.

When no one came to respond to his call, he stuck his head into the patio and shouted enthusiastically.

"Must be deserted," he finally remarked. "Such being the case, lieutenant, I reckon I might as well take possession."

"Must be abandoned," he finally said. "Since that's the situation, lieutenant, I guess I might as well take over."

"Sure. Go ahead. If every one has gone, I may join you later."

"Sure. Go ahead. If everyone else has left, I can join you later."

Billie led his horse within and looked around. It was a large house and the patio was the most elaborate Billie had ever seen. He had thought that Pedro's home in Mexico City was fine, but this was much finer.

Billie brought his horse inside and looked around. It was a big house, and the patio was the most impressive Billie had ever seen. He had thought that Pedro's place in Mexico City was nice, but this was way nicer.

"They must be swells," was the lad's comment. [Pg 136] "I reckon they became frightened and have run away with General Maas."

"They must be really something," was the kid's comment. [Pg 136] "I guess they got scared and took off with General Maas."

He started to lead the horse to the stable and then stopped.

He began to lead the horse to the stable but then stopped.

"I might as well shut this big gate," he thought. "I'll leave the little gate open so the lieutenant can come in."

"I might as well close this big gate," he thought. "I'll leave the small gate open so the lieutenant can come in."

He pushed the big gate together and dropped the bolt in its place.

He closed the big gate and secured it with the bolt.

"Now to do something for the horse," and he turned to the animal which stood patiently by.

"Now to do something for the horse," he said, turning to the animal that stood patiently nearby.

Then he stopped and stood in mute astonishment at what his eyes beheld.

Then he stopped and stood in silent astonishment at what he saw.

In the center of the patio, with rifle in hand, aimed squarely at his head, stood a figure he had last seen on the banks of the Rio Grande more than a year before—the figure of a man whom he had known only as Santiago.

In the middle of the patio, with a rifle in hand, aimed directly at his head, stood a figure he had last seen on the banks of the Rio Grande over a year ago—the figure of a man he had only known as Santiago.

The recognition was mutual, but instead of the friendliness which had always before marked the attitude of the strange man, there was now upon his face a look of the most bitter hatred.

The acknowledgment was mutual, but instead of the warmth that had always characterized the strange man's demeanor, there was now a look of intense hatred on his face.


CHAPTER XVI.

SHADOWING AN ARMY.

When Donald and Adrian left the city they rode slowly along for some distance without any sign [Pg 137] of the retreating Mexicans, except the occasional sight of some camp utensil which had been thrown aside as too heavy to carry. Occasionally they met peons or women, who looked at them curiously, but all of whom were more than willing to tell of the army that had so recently passed.

When Donald and Adrian left the city, they rode slowly for a while without seeing any sign of the retreating Mexicans, except for the occasional camp utensil that had been tossed aside as too heavy to carry. Every now and then, they encountered peons or women who looked at them with curiosity, but all of them were eager to share what they knew about the army that had just passed through.

"How many men do you suppose General Maas has?" queried Adrian.

"How many men do you think General Maas has?" Adrian asked.

"The lieutenant said it was supposed he had about seven thousand. It may be more, and it may be less."

"The lieutenant said he was supposed to have around seven thousand. It might be more, or it might be less."

"Well, they're certainly light-footed," laughed Adrian. "Don't you think we ought to get closer?"

"Well, they're definitely light on their feet," laughed Adrian. "Don't you think we should get closer?"

"If we can without being seen."

"If we can do it without being noticed."

They put spurs to their horses and for a mile or more galloped along at a fair speed.

They kicked their horses into gear and galloped for a mile or more at a good speed.

Then from a little eminence they saw the rear guard of the retreating army.

Then from a small rise, they saw the back of the retreating army.

"This is near enough," cautioned Donald.

"This is close enough," warned Donald.

They halted and watched the marching men.

They stopped and watched the marching soldiers.

"How far would you say we are from town, Don?"

"How far do you think we are from town, Don?"

"At least seven or eight miles."

"At least seven or eight miles."

"Do you know what towns are in this direction?"

"Do you know which towns are in that direction?"

"Not the slightest idea. That's the next thing we must find out."

"Not a clue. That's the next thing we need to figure out."

The enemy having by this time passed out of sight, they again spurred forward, but holding their distance.

The enemy had now disappeared from view, so they urged their horses forward again, but kept a safe distance.

Darkness had now fallen and the boys were[Pg 138] obliged to pick their way more carefully.

Darkness had now fallen and the boys were[Pg 138] forced to navigate more carefully.

For half an hour they rode silently and then Donald spoke:

For thirty minutes, they rode in silence, and then Donald said:

"They certainly will not march all night. They must have some place in mind."

"They definitely won't march all night. They must have somewhere specific in mind."

"So I think," from Adrian. "But there seems no sign of a halt."

"So I think," said Adrian. "But there doesn't seem to be any sign of stopping."

Ten minutes later, however, they caught sight of a fire light.

Ten minutes later, though, they spotted a campfire.

"That looks like it might be a camp," suggested Adrian.

"That looks like it could be a camp," suggested Adrian.

They rode cautiously forward.

They rode carefully ahead.

"It surely is," affirmed Donald a couple of minutes later. "We'd better dismount and do a little reconnoitering on foot."

"It definitely is," Donald confirmed a few minutes later. "We should get off and check things out on foot."

The suggestion was immediately put into effect.

The suggestion was immediately put into action.

Leaving their horses tethered beneath a giant palm, which would serve as a landmark, the boys crept stealthily forward. In a few minutes they were near enough to see figures about the fire.

Leaving their horses tied under a giant palm, which would act as a landmark, the boys quietly moved forward. In a few minutes, they were close enough to see people around the fire.

"They are evidently getting ready to pass the night," said Donald.

"They're clearly getting ready to spend the night," said Donald.

"Yes," from Adrian, "and there is another fire off yonder," and he pointed to the right.

"Yeah," said Adrian, "and there's another fire over there," and he pointed to the right.

"They are getting ready to post their pickets," explained Donald.

"They're getting ready to put up their pickets," Donald explained.

"Then we'd better get busy, Don. There must be some way of finding out where the army is going to stop."

"Then we should get to work, Don. There has to be a way to find out where the army is going to halt."

As with one accord they drew still nearer the[Pg 139] camp, they could smell the coffee and their appetites began to assert themselves.

As they all moved closer to the[Pg 139] camp, they could smell the coffee and their appetites started to kick in.

"Wish I had some," whispered Adrian.

"Wish I had some," Adrian whispered.

"You'll get to be as bad as Billie first thing you know," was the retort. "But, hush! There comes some one."

"You'll end up being as naughty as Billie before you know it," was the reply. "But, shh! Someone's coming."

They lay flat on the ground and listened.

They lay flat on the ground and listened.

Whoever it might be was coming directly toward them.

Whoever it was was walking straight toward them.

Not a move did the boys make, hoping that they might not be discovered, but ready to act if they were.

Not a single move did the boys make, hoping they wouldn't be found out, but ready to spring into action if they were.

When within ten feet of them the footsteps halted and they heard a voice say:

When they were within ten feet of them, the footsteps stopped, and they heard a voice say:

"This will be far enough. You are the end man on the line."

"This will be far enough. You’re the last person in line."

"Bueno, caporal!"

"Alright, corporal!"

"Keep a close watch," cautioned the corporal. "You never know what these Americans may do."

"Stay alert," warned the corporal. "You never know what these Americans might do."

"Si, Señor. How far are we from Vera Cruz?"

"Yes, sir. How far are we from Veracruz?"

"About four leagues" (twelve miles). "General Maas will make a stand at Tejeria, about a league further on."

"About four leagues" (twelve miles). "General Maas will set up a position at Tejeria, about a league further on."

Then as he moved away. "Remember now, no sleeping. This is a real war."

Then, as he walked away, he said, "Just remember, no sleeping. This is a real war."

"Bueno, mi caporal. I understand."

"Okay, my foreman. I understand."

The corporal departed and the sentry, shouldering his rifle, began pacing his station.

The corporal left, and the sentry, with his rifle slung over his shoulder, started walking back and forth at his post.

A minute later Donald gave Adrian a dig with [Pg 140] his elbow as a signal, and they slowly crawled away.

A minute later, Donald nudged Adrian with his elbow as a signal, and they slowly made their way out.

"That's the information we are after," whispered Donald when they were out of earshot. "Now to get back to Vera Cruz as quickly as possible."

"That's the info we need," whispered Donald when they were out of earshot. "Now let's head back to Vera Cruz as fast as we can."

They rose to their feet and ran swiftly but silently toward the palm tree, where their horses were tethered.

They got up and quickly but quietly ran toward the palm tree, where their horses were tied.

Suddenly Adrian stopped and grabbed Donald by the arm.

Suddenly, Adrian stopped and grabbed Donald by the arm.

"What is it, Ad?" asked Donald.

"What is it, Ad?" Donald asked.

"Can't you see! There is some one there with the horses."

"Can’t you see! There’s someone over there with the horses."

They both peered through the darkness and Donald quickly perceived that Adrian was right.

They both looked through the darkness, and Donald quickly realized that Adrian was right.

Then as by one impulse they drew a few steps nearer.

Then, almost like they were all moved by the same feeling, they took a few steps closer.

In the dim starlight they were able to make out the figures of several men.

In the faint starlight, they could see the shapes of several men.

"Do you think they are soldiers?" whispered Don.

"Do you think they're soldiers?" whispered Don.

Adrian shook his head.

Adrian shook his head.

"Camp followers. Thieves," he whispered.

"Camp followers. Thieves," he said.

Donald nodded his head in acquiescence.

Donald nodded his head in agreement.

The boys lay down upon the ground and put their heads together.

The boys lay down on the ground and put their heads close together.

"It wouldn't be any trick at all," whispered Donald, "if it were not for the pickets. But any noise will bring down upon us a couple of hundred men. Maybe more. We have simply got to dispose of that outfit without noise. But how?"

"It wouldn't be a problem at all," whispered Donald, "if it weren't for the guards. But any noise will bring a couple of hundred men down on us. Maybe more. We just have to deal with that group quietly. But how?"

"Bad job," was Adrian's only reply.[Pg 141]

"That was a bad job," was Adrian's only reply.[Pg 141]

"If the horses were only our Wyoming cow ponies, they'd come at our call."

"If the horses were just our Wyoming cow ponies, they'd come when we called."

"But they're not," replied Adrian.

"But they're not," Adrian replied.

For several minutes neither spoke, but lay silently watching the movements of the men about the horses.

For several minutes, neither of them spoke, but lay silently watching the men move around the horses.

"How many can you make out, Ad?"

"How many can you see, Ad?"

"Five."

"5."

"I don't see but four."

"I only see four."

Adrian pointed to the left, about ten or twelve feet, to one who stood alone.

Adrian pointed to the left, about ten or twelve feet, at someone who was standing alone.

"What's he doing there?"

"What’s he doing here?"

"Give it up." Then a moment later: "I have it!"

"Give it up." Then a moment later: "I've got it!"

"Well, what is it?"

"What's going on?"

"He's watching for us to return. That's what they're all waiting for. They think we'll be a great catch."

"He's keeping an eye out for us to come back. That's what everyone is waiting for. They believe we'll be a big catch."

"That's just it," from Donald. "Let's fool them!"

"That's exactly it," Donald said. "Let's trick them!"

"Well, first, let's capture the one yonder. We'll show them a Wyoming Indian trick."

"Alright, first let's catch the one over there. We'll show them a Wyoming Indian trick."

Slowly and silently the boys wiggled their way to where the lone robber stood. Then as silently as a ghost Donald arose, while Adrian bent on his knees.

Slowly and quietly, the boys made their way to where the lone robber stood. Then, as silently as a ghost, Donald got up while Adrian knelt down.

There was a swift movement and Donald's arm was around the Mexican's neck, shutting off his wind, while Adrian pulled his feet from beneath [Pg 142] him. In another minute he was bound by his own sash and gagged with a handful of grass.

There was a quick movement, and Donald had his arm around the Mexican's neck, cutting off his air, while Adrian yanked his feet out from under him. In just a minute, he was tied up with his own sash and gagged with a bunch of grass.

"That's one!" exclaimed Donald, as he sat upon his prisoner's chest. "Now, how about the others?"

"That's one!" Donald shouted, sitting on his captive's chest. "Now, what about the others?"

"Not so easy, Don."

"Not that easy, Don."

"But it has to be done," declared Donald. "Scratch your head."

"But it needs to be done," Donald said. "Think it over."

Adrian did so, but to no avail.

Adrian did that, but it didn’t work.

Time was passing and they did not know how long ere something would turn up, when Donald gave Adrian a kick.

Time was passing, and they had no idea how long it would be before something happened when Donald kicked Adrian.

"Look! They're getting uneasy."

"Look! They're getting anxious."

This was undoubtedly true, as the men were moving about and one of them even had the temerity to light a cigarette.

This was definitely true, as the guys were walking around and one of them even had the nerve to light a cigarette.

Then of a sudden Adrian spoke.

Then suddenly, Adrian spoke up.

"I've got it!" he exclaimed under his breath. "Help drag this chap farther away."

"I've got it!" he whispered excitedly. "Help pull this guy further away."

They picked him up bodily and carried him fifteen or twenty feet.

They lifted him up and carried him fifteen or twenty feet.

"Now, listen," said Adrian, "both of you. You, Don, sneak as near the horses as you dare. I'll give you just five minutes by my watch. Then I am going to give this man one chance for his life. I am going to take the gag from his mouth and let him give one call for help. If he makes another sound, it will be his last."

"Now, listen," said Adrian, "both of you. You, Don, get as close to the horses as you can without being noticed. I'll give you just five minutes by my watch. After that, I'm going to give this man one chance to save himself. I'm going to take the gag out of his mouth and let him call for help just once. If he makes another sound, it will be the last one he makes."

"Then what?"

"What's next?"

"Those fellows have waited so long that they are tired. They will all rush to where they expect to [Pg 143] find him. Then you will rush in and cut the tethers. By the time they find this man I will be with you. Sabe?"

"Those guys have waited so long that they're tired. They'll all rush to where they expect to [Pg 143] find him. Then you will rush in and cut the ties. By the time they find this guy, I'll be with you. Got it?"

"Good!" from Donald. "I'm off."

"Awesome!" from Donald. "I'm leaving."

In exactly five minutes by his watch Adrian gave the prisoner a rough shake.

In exactly five minutes by his watch, Adrian gave the prisoner a hard shake.

"You know what I said?"

"You know what I meant?"

The man nodded his head.

The man nodded.

"Well, I am now going to take out your gag. If you make more than one cry, or utter more than one word, your own knife will finish you."

"Alright, I’m going to remove your gag now. If you make even one sound or say a single word, your own knife will take care of you."

He held the knife before the man's eyes. Then with the knife in one hand, Adrian pulled the wad of grass from between the prisoner's teeth.

He held the knife in front of the man's eyes. Then, with the knife in one hand, Adrian pulled the clump of grass from between the prisoner's teeth.

No sooner had the man drawn one long breath than he let out a yell that might have been heard half a mile and which he was about to repeat with variations, when with a swift movement, Adrian forced the grass back into his mouth and the yell died in a dismal gurgle.

No sooner had the man taken a deep breath than he let out a scream that could have been heard half a mile away and was about to repeat it with different variations, when with a quick move, Adrian shoved the grass back into his mouth and the scream ended in a miserable gurgle.

"I ought to use the knife," said Adrian, "but I guess this will do."

"I should use the knife," said Adrian, "but I guess this works."

With a bound he sprang to his feet and dashed to where Donald was already performing his part of the work.

With a leap, he jumped to his feet and raced to where Donald was already doing his part of the work.

The plan had worked exactly as Adrian had figured, and in another moment the boys were astride the horses and away toward Vera Cruz.

The plan worked just as Adrian had expected, and soon the boys were on the horses and heading toward Vera Cruz.

But one thing they had not taken into consideration. That single yell of their erstwhile prisoner [Pg 144] had aroused the Mexican pickets and from half a dozen directions came the sound of rifle shots and then the sound of a bugle calling to arms.

But one thing they hadn't considered. That single yell from their former prisoner [Pg 144] had alerted the Mexican guards, and from several directions came the sound of rifle shots followed by a bugle sounding the call to arms.

Even while Adrian was running toward the horses, the excitement had begun, and as the boys started on their homeward ride, a volley from the encamped forces sent the bullets whistling by their ears.

Even while Adrian was running toward the horses, the excitement had already kicked in, and as the boys started their ride home, a barrage from the encamped forces sent bullets whizzing past their ears.

"This is no place for us!" cried Donald. "Don't be afraid to use the spur. It is our only chance."

"This isn't the right place for us!" shouted Donald. "Don’t hesitate to use the spur. It’s our only shot."

And now as they rode furiously forward, came the sound of firing on their left and some distance ahead.

And now, as they rode fiercely ahead, they heard gunfire to their left and some distance in front of them.

"What does it mean?" called out Adrian as they rode neck and neck through the darkness.

"What does it mean?" Adrian shouted as they rode side by side through the darkness.

"Search me, Ad; but our only chance is in our horses," and Donald again plied the spur.

"Search me, Ad; but our only chance is with our horses," and Donald spurred them on again.

Outlined against the sky at the top of a small knoll, they could see a small body of horsemen.

Outlined against the sky at the top of a small hill, they could see a small group of horsemen.

"Keep away to the right," said Donald. "Keep in the valley and in the shadow," and he drew off the beaten highway, with Adrian close behind.

"Stay to the right," said Donald. "Stick to the valley and in the shade," and he pulled off the main road, with Adrian right behind him.

On the soft earth their horses' hoofs made no sound and in a couple of minutes more they descended into a little valley and the noise of the alarm passed out of hearing.

On the soft ground, their horses' hooves were silent, and in just a few more minutes, they went down into a small valley, and the sound of the alarm faded away.

"It was a mighty close shave," declared Adrian a few minutes later, when they pulled their horses down to a walk to allow them to catch their breath.

"It was a really close call," Adrian said a few minutes later when they slowed their horses to a walk to let them catch their breath.

"Sure was," from Donald, "but we got the information[Pg 145] we went after."

"Sure was," Donald said, "but we got the information[Pg 145] we were looking for."

Half an hour later they were challenged by the American pickets, which had been thrown even further forward than where the boys had passed through the lines. They stated their mission and were at once sent under guard to the officer of the day.

Half an hour later, they were confronted by the American pickets, which had been pushed even further ahead than where the boys had gone through the lines. They explained their mission and were immediately taken under guard to the officer of the day.

"Oh, it's you!" was the lieutenant's salutation as he saw who it was. "Did you get what you went after?"

"Oh, it's you!" the lieutenant said when he recognized who it was. "Did you get what you were looking for?"

"Yes, sir," from Donald. "The enemy has halted at Tejeria, fifteen miles away."

"Yes, sir," Donald said. "The enemy has stopped at Tejeria, fifteen miles away."

"Well done. I'll send an orderly to carry the report to headquarters. You boys are entitled to a rest."

"Good job. I'll send someone to take the report to headquarters. You guys deserve a break."

"Where's Billie?" asked Adrian, looking around after the orderly had departed.

"Where's Billie?" Adrian asked, glancing around after the orderly had left.

"Who?"

"Who?"

"Billie. Our chum."

"Billie. Our friend."

"Oh, yes," replied the lieutenant. "He's disappeared."

"Oh, yeah," replied the lieutenant. "He's gone."

"Disappeared?"

"Gone?"

"Yes. He went into this house here," pointing to the building before which he had stationed himself, "and when I went in later to see how he was coming on with his wounded horse, I found the horse standing in the middle of the patio, but your chum had disappeared."

"Yeah. He went into that house over there," pointing to the building where he was standing, "and when I went in later to check on how he was doing with his injured horse, I found the horse in the middle of the patio, but your buddy was gone."

"And then what?" queried Donald.

"And then what?" asked Donald.

"Nothing. I made up my mind he had gone[Pg 146] after something to put on his horse and I haven't thought much about him since."

"Nothing. I decided he had left[Pg 146] to find something to put on his horse, and I haven't thought about him much since."

"Then it's up to us to find him. Can we go inside?"

"Then it's up to us to find him. Can we go in?"

"Sure," laughed the lieutenant. "Go as far as you like, only keep inside the lines."

"Sure," chuckled the lieutenant. "Go as far as you want, just stay within the lines."

Without more words the boys entered the patio.

Without saying anything more, the boys stepped into the patio.


CHAPTER XVII.

BILLIE GETS A SURPRISE.

When Billie found himself looking into the muzzle of a rifle in the hands of Santiago, his first impulse was to call out; but the expression on Santiago's face caused him to remain silent.

When Billie found himself staring down the barrel of a rifle held by Santiago, his first instinct was to shout out; but the look on Santiago's face made him stay quiet.

While the strange man owed his life to the lad, as is related in the story of the "Broncho Rider Boys with the Texas Rangers," there was that in the man's face which told that he was under a severe mental strain, and Billie did not think it wise to presume upon his former friendship.

While the strange man owed his life to the kid, as mentioned in the story of the "Broncho Rider Boys with the Texas Rangers," there was something in the man's face that indicated he was experiencing a lot of mental stress, and Billie didn’t think it was smart to take advantage of their past friendship.

Therefore, he remained quiet, waiting for Santiago to speak.

Therefore, he stayed silent, waiting for Santiago to say something.

If he recognized Billie, he gave no intimation of the fact; but in a harsh voice commanded: "Up with your hands!"

If he recognized Billie, he showed no sign of it; instead, he commanded in a harsh voice, "Put your hands up!"

Billie obeyed.

Billie complied.

"Turn to the left and march. In there," he continued[Pg 147] a moment later as Billie approached an open door in the rear of the patio.

"Turn to the left and march. In there," he continued[Pg 147] a moment later as Billie walked towards an open door at the back of the patio.

Into the house Billie went—into a large room, but dimly lighted. Santiago followed, closing the door behind him with a kick.

Into the house Billie went—into a large room, but dimly lit. Santiago followed, closing the door behind him with a kick.

"Why shouldn't I shoot you down like a dog?" asked Santiago as soon as the door was closed.

"Why shouldn't I take you down like a dog?" asked Santiago as soon as the door was shut.

"I can't see any reason," was the reply, "except that it might cause you a lot of trouble when it was found out. I imagine that Admiral Fletcher is going to be pretty severe upon snipers and others who shoot Americans."

"I can't see any reason," was the reply, "except that it could cause you a lot of trouble when it gets discovered. I imagine Admiral Fletcher is going to be pretty tough on snipers and anyone else who shoots Americans."

"Bah!" exclaimed Santiago angrily. "I spit upon Americans! Bah!"

"Bah!" Santiago shouted angrily. "I spit on Americans! Bah!"

"That's all right," Billie agreed, "if it's the way you feel about it."

"That's fine," Billie agreed, "if that's how you feel about it."

"Just because you Americans have driven away a few soldiers with the guns of your great fleet, you don't think you can conquer Mexico, do you?"

"Just because you Americans have pushed a few soldiers back with your powerful navy, you don't really think you can take over Mexico, do you?"

"I hadn't thought much about it."

"I hadn't thought about it much."

"Then it's time you did, as you may never have another chance."

"Then you should, because you might not get another opportunity."

"Well, then," explained Billie, "I'll tell you how it looks to me. You might a great deal better be governed by the United States than by a man like Huerta."

"Well, then," Billie said, "let me tell you how I see it. You would definitely be better off being governed by the United States than by a guy like Huerta."

"Huerta! Huerta!" fairly screamed Santiago. "He is not the governor of Mexico."

"Huerta! Huerta!" Santiago shouted. "He's not the governor of Mexico."

"No," from Billie. "He calls himself the provisional[Pg 148] president. In reality he is a dictator."

"No," said Billie. "He calls himself the provisional[Pg 148] president. But in reality, he's a dictator."

"He is a murderer!" shouted the thoroughly excited man.

"He's a murderer!" shouted the incredibly excited man.

"Then what are you worrying about? All that the Americans want is to get rid of Huerta. They don't want Mexico. Didn't you know that, Santiago?"

"Then what are you worried about? All the Americans want is to get rid of Huerta. They don't want Mexico. Didn't you know that, Santiago?"

"What? Who calls me Santiago? I am Ixtazhl, Prince of the Aztecs and guardian of the treasures of Montezuma. Who calls me Santiago?"

"What? Who calls me Santiago? I am Ixtazhl, Prince of the Aztecs and keeper of Montezuma's treasures. Who calls me Santiago?"

In his excitement he rested the stock of his rifle upon the floor and bent upon Billie a gaze so fierce as greatly to disconcert him for the moment.

In his excitement, he propped the stock of his rifle against the floor and gave Billie a fierce look that really threw him off for a moment.

But Billie was not a lad to be easily unnerved and after a moment he replied calmly:

But Billie wasn't someone to be easily shaken, and after a moment, he responded calmly:

"I call you by the only name I know. It was the one you used on the Rio Grande when you sent me on a mission to Pancho Villa."

"I call you by the only name I know. It was the one you used on the Rio Grande when you sent me on a mission to Pancho Villa."

"Villa! Villa!" repeated Santiago, as though trying to recall something that had passed from his memory. "Villa! Where have I heard that name before?"

"Villa! Villa!" Santiago repeated, as if he was trying to remember something that had slipped from his mind. "Villa! Where have I heard that name before?"

"On the Rio Grande is all I can tell you. Do you remember Don Rafael?"

"All I can tell you is it's on the Rio Grande. Do you remember Don Rafael?"

At mention of the name the expression on Santiago's face changed again, this time to one of fiercest rage.

At the mention of the name, Santiago's expression changed again, this time to one of intense rage.

"Don Rafael!" he cried. "Don Rafael! Now I [Pg 149] know you! You are Don Rafael. That is why I should kill you!"

"Don Rafael!" he shouted. "Don Rafael! Now I [Pg 149] know who you are! You are Don Rafael. That's why I should kill you!"

"Great Scott, no, I am not Don Rafael!" shouted Billie as Santiago again raised his rifle and the lad perceived that he had to do with a crazy man. "I'm the boy that saved your life when Don Rafael tried to kill you. Don't you remember?"

"Great Scott, no, I'm not Don Rafael!" Billie shouted as Santiago lifted his rifle again, and the guy realized he was dealing with a crazy person. "I'm the one who saved your life when Don Rafael tried to kill you. Don't you remember?"

Again Santiago lowered his weapon, and again there came upon his face that puzzled expression.

Again, Santiago lowered his weapon, and once more a puzzled look crossed his face.

"Tell me, Santiago—I mean Prince Iztazil, or whatever you call it, what are you doing here?"

"Tell me, Santiago—I mean Prince Iztazil, or whatever you want to call yourself, what are you doing here?"

Santiago eyed him suspiciously, but finally laid his rifle across a table in the center of the room and approached nearer the lad.

Santiago looked at him suspiciously, but eventually placed his rifle on a table in the middle of the room and stepped closer to the boy.

"Listen!" he said in a whisper. "I am the guardian of the treasure of Montezuma. It is to be used to free Mexico from the Spaniard. He must be driven out. The land belongs to the Aztec."

"Listen!" he whispered. "I’m the guardian of Montezuma's treasure. It’s meant to be used to free Mexico from the Spaniards. They need to be driven out. This land belongs to the Aztecs."

"But where is the Aztec?" queried Billie. "I know him not."

"But where is the Aztec?" Billie asked. "I don't know him."

"I am he. The peons are my people. The Spaniard—bah! He owns the houses and he owns the lands; but he must be driven out."

"I am him. The workers are my people. The Spaniard—ugh! He owns the houses and he owns the land; but he needs to be kicked out."

"Isn't that what Villa says?"

"Isn't that what the Villa says?"

"Villa? Villa?" again repeated Santiago, and again he lapsed into silence.

"Villa? Villa?" Santiago repeated once more, and then he fell silent again.

For some minutes he remained motionless ere he stepped back, picked up his rifle and started for a door leading to a stairway.

For a few minutes, he stood still before stepping back, grabbing his rifle, and heading for a door that led to a staircase.

"Come!" he commanded. "I will show you."

"Come on!" he said. "I'll show you."

"Hadn't we better take care of the horse first?"[Pg 150] asked Billie, not at all anxious to be wandering around with an armed lunatic. "He may die."

"Shouldn't we take care of the horse first?"[Pg 150] asked Billie, not at all eager to be wandering around with an armed crazy person. "He might die."

"What is a horse when the future of Mexico is at stake, my son? Come with me and you shall hear a strange tale."

"What is a horse when the future of Mexico is at stake, my son? Come with me, and you'll hear a strange story."

"I have heard one already," was Billie's mental comment, but realizing by the term son which Santiago had applied to him that he was in no immediate danger and trusting to his wits to finally overcome the strange man should it become necessary, he followed.

"I've heard enough already," was Billie’s thought. But when he noticed Santiago had called him son, he realized he wasn't in immediate danger. Trusting his instincts, he decided to follow, prepared to deal with the strange man if it came to that.

At the head of the stairs was another door, which Santiago opened and entered. It was a sort of ante-room, much like the entrance into a lodge room. Around the walls was a motley collection of firearms, swords, spears and smaller weapons.

At the top of the stairs was another door, which Santiago opened and stepped through. It was like a small foyer, similar to the entrance of a lodge room. Around the walls was a mixed assortment of guns, swords, spears, and smaller weapons.

Stopping in front of one of the racks, Santiago placed his rifle in it, and then from another took a couple of small swords, one of which he handed to Billie.

Stopping in front of one of the racks, Santiago placed his rifle in it, and then from another took a couple of small swords, one of which he handed to Billie.

"This is a bug house sure enough," muttered the boy as he took the sword and examined it curiously. "I wonder what next?"

"This is definitely a weird place," the boy said quietly as he picked up the sword and looked at it with interest. "I wonder what’s going to happen next?"

He had not long to wait, for opening a closet, Santiago took therefrom two beautifully embroidered robes, one of which he threw over his own shoulders and the other of which he put on Billie.

He didn't have to wait long, because when he opened a closet, Santiago took out two beautifully embroidered robes. He tossed one over his own shoulders and put the other one on Billie.

"It doesn't hardly match my hat," laughed Billie.

"It barely matches my hat," laughed Billie.

Without a word, Santiago removed Billie's sombrero [Pg 151] and hung it on a peg in the closet, which he closed.

Without saying anything, Santiago took Billie's sombrero [Pg 151] and hung it on a peg in the closet, then shut the door.

Then he opened another door and led Billie into a large, brilliantly lighted room, hung with the richest tapestries.

Then he opened another door and led Billie into a large, brightly lit room, adorned with the finest tapestries.

"Looks like we had strayed into some Turkish bath house," thought Billie, "but I might as well see the thing through."

"Looks like we've wandered into some Turkish bathhouse," thought Billie, "but I might as well see this through."

"Sit here beside me, my son," Santiago finally said. "You shall become my heir. I will introduce you to the court."

"Come sit next to me, my son," Santiago finally said. "You will be my heir. I’ll take you to meet the court."

Santiago clapped his hands, as though bidding a servant to attend; but there was no response.

Santiago clapped his hands, as if signaling for a servant to come over; but there was no answer.

He turned his head from one side to the other as though in amazement and again clapped his hands, this time with vigor.

He turned his head from side to side in disbelief and clapped his hands again, this time with energy.

After a moment's delay, there was a movement behind one of the draperies and presently the curtain was drawn back and a man's face appeared.

After a brief pause, there was some movement behind one of the curtains, and soon the curtain was pulled back to reveal a man's face.

"Come hither," commanded Santiago.

"Come here," commanded Santiago.

The man obeyed.

The man complied.

"Where are the others?" demanded Santiago.

"Where are the others?" Santiago asked.

"Oh, señor," cried the man, "the others have hidden themselves in the cellar!"

"Oh, sir," the man exclaimed, "the others have hidden in the cellar!"

"Slaves! Cowards!" exclaimed Santiago. "What do they fear?"

"Slaves! Cowards!" Santiago shouted. "What are they afraid of?"

"The great guns, señor. We might all be killed."

"The big guns, sir. We could all be killed."

"You will certainly be killed if you do not mind what I say," was the reply as Santiago drew his [Pg 152] sword. "Now summon the court that I may introduce my son."

"You will definitely be killed if you don't pay attention to what I say," was the reply as Santiago drew his [Pg 152] sword. "Now call the court so I can introduce my son."

The man bowed and left the room, and in a few minutes returned accompanied by two more men and several women, all arrayed in fantastic costumes.

The man bowed and left the room, and a few minutes later returned with two more men and several women, all dressed in amazing costumes.

All bowed as they entered, and Santiago waved his hand.

All bowed as they entered, and Santiago waved his hand.

"This is my son and heir," he said. "Come and kiss his hand."

"This is my son and heir," he said. "Come and kiss his hand."

They all came forward and kissed Billie's hand, which he held out in order to facilitate the job.

They all stepped up and kissed Billie's hand, which he extended to make it easier.

"Now," said Santiago, "we——"

"Now," said Santiago, "we—"

"Now," interrupted Billie, "if it is all the same to you, Prince, we'll have supper. I haven't had a mouthful to eat since daylight. I'm 'most starved to death."

"Now," Billie cut in, "if it’s okay with you, Prince, let’s have dinner. I haven’t eaten anything since morning. I’m almost starving."

"It is well," agreed Santiago. "It is well that my heir should not die of hunger. Let the table be placed."

"It’s good," Santiago agreed. "It’s good that my heir won’t die of hunger. Let’s set the table."

The order seemed to meet with general approval, and in the course of half an hour there was spread what would have proved a feast at any time, but which was beyond description to a hungry boy; and the way he waded into the food was a caution.

The order seemed to have everyone on board, and within half an hour, a spread was laid out that would have been impressive at any time, but was indescribable to a hungry boy; and the way he dug into the food was quite a sight.

During all this time Santiago had uttered never a word, nor would he eat but the smallest portion of food—a taste of every dish which he set before his guest.

During all this time, Santiago hadn't said a word, and he only ate a tiny bit of food—a taste of every dish he put in front of his guest.

"My son tells the truth," Santiago finally remarked [Pg 153] as Billie pushed back his chair with the single word "Bastante," meaning enough.

"My son tells the truth," Santiago finally said [Pg 153] as Billie pushed back his chair with the single word "Bastante," meaning enough.

"I always try to," was the smiling rejoinder, for Billie was now in the very best humor. Eating was his strong point and he had gone the limit.

"I always try to," was the smiling response, as Billie was now in the best mood. Eating was his specialty, and he had really gone all out.

"Clear away the feast and then reassemble," was Santiago's next order.

"Clear away the feast and then put everything back together," was Santiago's next order.

This order was carried into effect, and the servants also must have enjoyed a square meal, for it was more than an hour ere they again assembled, during which time Billie sank back in his chair and slumbered peacefully.

This order was carried out, and the servants must have enjoyed a hearty meal, because it was over an hour before they gathered again, during which time Billie leaned back in his chair and slept soundly.

He was finally awakened by a hand laid upon his arm.

He was finally woken up by a hand on his arm.

"Awake, my son," were the words he heard. "It is now time that I reveal to you the secret of my life. It is now time that I should tell you the secret of the treasure of Montezuma."

"Wake up, my son," were the words he heard. "It's time for me to reveal the secret of my life. It's time for me to tell you the secret of the treasure of Montezuma."

"That's right, Prince," said Billie sleepily. "Let her go."

"That’s right, Prince," Billie said drowsily. "Let her go."

Santiago regarded him interrogatively.

Santiago looked at him questioningly.

"What said my son?"

"What did my son say?"

"Oh, yes, Prince. I forgot you only understood good English. Let her go, means proceed with the secret."

"Oh, right, Prince. I forgot you only get proper English. 'Let her go' means to move forward with the secret."

"Let her go. Let her go," Santiago repeated a couple of times. "Yes," he continued, "I had forgotten about her."

"Let her go. Let her go," Santiago repeated a couple of times. "Yeah," he continued, "I had forgotten about her."

He clapped his hands and the same servant who had first appeared approached his chair.

He clapped his hands, and the same servant who had first shown up came over to his chair.

Santiago gave an order in a language which[Pg 154] Billie did not understand, but which he imagined was Indian, and the servant withdrew, only to reappear a few minutes later with a young woman who greatly resembled Santiago and who was also arrayed in a gorgeous costume.

Santiago gave an order in a language that[Pg 154] Billie didn’t understand, but he guessed it was Indian. The servant left and came back a few minutes later with a young woman who looked a lot like Santiago and was also dressed in a stunning outfit.

She had evidently not expected to meet a stranger, for she drew back upon seeing Billie and the color rushed to her face.

She clearly hadn't expected to run into a stranger, because she stepped back when she saw Billie, and her face flushed.

"Come hither, daughter," was Santiago's command.

"Come here, daughter," was Santiago's command.

The young woman obeyed.

The young woman complied.

"Lucia," said Santiago, "this is the honorable young man whom I have chosen for my heir. Henceforth consider him your betrothed. The marriage shall take place one new moon from to-day."

"Lucia," Santiago said, "this is the honorable young man I've chosen as my heir. From now on, think of him as your fiancé. The wedding will happen one new moon from today."

"Oh, Father," cried the girl, her face becoming even more scarlet than before, "I cannot——"

"Oh, Dad," the girl exclaimed, her face turning even redder than before, "I can't——"

"No!" interrupted Billie, springing to his feet, "neither can I. You ought to be ashamed of yourself, Santiago——"

"No!" interrupted Billie, jumping to his feet, "I can't either. You should be ashamed of yourself, Santiago—"

"What!" cried Santiago, springing to his feet and again drawing his sword. "Who calls me Santiago? I am Prince Ixtazhl of the great Aztec nation and guardian of the treasure of Montezuma!"

"What!" shouted Santiago, leaping to his feet and drawing his sword again. "Who calls me Santiago? I am Prince Ixtazhl of the great Aztec nation and the guardian of Montezuma's treasure!"

He raised his sword and would have stricken Billie down ere the boy could have prevented had not the young woman thrown herself between them and seized his arm.

He raised his sword and would have struck Billie down before the boy could stop him if the young woman hadn't thrown herself between them and grabbed his arm.

At the same instant the door from the ante-room[Pg 155] opened and Donald and Adrian entered.

At that exact moment, the door from the waiting room[Pg 155] opened, and Donald and Adrian walked in.


CHAPTER XVIII.

A MISSION FOR FUNSTON.

"Santiago!" exclaimed Donald.

"Santiago!" Donald exclaimed.

"By all that's great!" from Adrian.

"By all that's great!" said Adrian.

"Help!" cried Lucia. "He will do something desperate!"

"Help!" screamed Lucia. "He's going to do something crazy!"

Donald and Adrian sprang forward, but their assistance was not needed. Billie had by this time gathered his wits and in a twinkling the mad-man was disarmed.

Donald and Adrian jumped in, but they didn’t need to. By this point, Billie had collected himself and in no time, the crazed guy was disarmed.

"Shall we bind him?" asked Adrian as they came forward.

"Should we tie him up?" Adrian asked as they stepped forward.

"No, indeed," replied Billie as the now helpless man sank down upon the chair. "He isn't dangerous."

"No, not at all," Billie replied as the now helpless man sank into the chair. "He isn't a threat."

"What's it all about?" queried Donald.

"What's it all about?" asked Donald.

"Oh, nothing much! He simply wanted to make me his heir and marry me to his daughter."

"Oh, not much! He just wanted to name me his heir and marry me to his daughter."

Donald and Adrian cast an admiring gaze upon Lucia, who was now kneeling at her father's side.

Donald and Adrian looked at Lucia with admiration as she knelt beside her father.

"Well," said Adrian in an aside, "I don't see why you should object to that."

"Well," Adrian said quietly, "I don't see why you should have a problem with that."

"Who said I objected?" demanded Billie. "It is the young woman who objects."

"Who said I had a problem with it?" Billie asked. "It’s the young woman who has the issue."

"But whoever supposed he had a daughter?" said[Pg 156] Donald.

"But who would have thought he had a daughter?" said[Pg 156] Donald.

"Not I," from Billie. "But this is certainly a queer mess."

"Not me," said Billie. "But this is definitely a strange situation."

Then to Lucia: "How long has he been in this way, Señorita?"

Then to Lucia: "How long has he been like this, Miss?"

"Only a few days. Since this trouble with the Americanos."

"Just a few days. Since this issue with the Americans."

"But how could that affect him?"

"But how could that impact him?"

"It is a long story, señor. For years he has been trying to overthrow the government. When Madero was made president, he was happy. Then came that awful tragedy, by which Madero was killed. Since that time he has not been himself. But when it became evident that the United States would interfere he became as you have seen him to-day."

"It’s a long story, sir. He’s been trying to take down the government for years. When Madero became president, he was thrilled. Then that terrible tragedy happened, and Madero was killed. Since then, he hasn’t been himself. But when it became clear that the United States would get involved, he became like you see him today."

"When I told him that all the United States wanted was to get rid of Huerta, he was much pleased," explained Billie. "That was when he proposed to make me his heir."

"When I told him that all the United States wanted was to get rid of Huerta, he was really pleased," Billie explained. "That was when he suggested I become his heir."

Lucia's cheeks grew red, as she asked: "And did you accept his proposal?"

Lucia's cheeks turned red as she asked, "So, did you accept his proposal?"

"I neither accepted nor rejected. I just followed him in to see what would happen next."

"I didn't accept or reject. I just followed him in to see what would happen next."

"But would you accept?" insisted Lucia.

"But would you accept?" Lucia insisted.

"That depends," replied Billie, with a touch of color in his own face. "But what had we better do now? You and I will discuss the other question later."

"That depends," Billie replied, a slight flush in his cheeks. "But what should we do now? You and I can talk about the other question later."

"The best thing we can do," interposed Donald, [Pg 157] "is to report to Lieutenant Blunt. Isn't there some place, Señorita, where your father can be placed for safe-keeping?"

"The best thing we can do," interrupted Donald, [Pg 157] "is to report to Lieutenant Blunt. Isn’t there some place, Miss, where your father can be kept safe?"

"He will be perfectly safe here with me, señors, if the servants are allowed to remain."

"He'll be completely safe here with me, gentlemen, if the servants are allowed to stay."

"They certainly will be," declared Billie. "I will personally vouch for that. We have done Captain Rush a good turn to-day and I know he will be glad to do that much for us. And besides, the Americans will harm no one."

"They definitely will be," Billie said. "I can guarantee that. We did Captain Rush a solid today, and I know he’ll be happy to return the favor for us. Plus, the Americans won’t hurt anyone."

Lucia gave Billie a grateful look as she replied:

Lucia gave Billie a thankful glance as she responded:

"Ah, señor, I shall trust it all to you. I can see that you are a friend of my father and I know you are telling the truth."

"Ah, sir, I will trust everything to you. I can see that you are a friend of my father and I know you’re being honest."

"You bet you can trust me," was Billie's emphatic reply. "Come on, fellows, let's go look after my horse."

"You can definitely trust me," Billie said with conviction. "Come on, guys, let's go take care of my horse."

In the door Billie turned:

Billie turned at the door:

"I'll leave my robe in the cupboard, Señorita; and, if you don't mind, I'll ask Lieutenant Blunt to make himself at home in the patio."

"I'll leave my robe in the closet, Miss; and, if you don't mind, I'll ask Lieutenant Blunt to make himself comfortable in the patio."

"The house is yours, señor. Do as you think best."

"The house is yours, sir. Do what you think is best."

"By George!" exclaimed Adrian as they descended the stairs to the patio, "this is getting serious."

"Wow!" exclaimed Adrian as they walked down the stairs to the patio, "this is getting serious."

"What?" queried Donald.

"What?" asked Donald.

"Why this affair of Billie and the young lady we have just left."

"Why this situation with Billie and the young woman we just left."

"Nonsense!" from Billie. "It isn't half as serious[Pg 158] as what I saw at Moreno."

"Nonsense!" Billie exclaimed. "It’s not nearly as serious[Pg 158] as what I saw at Moreno."

"No!" laughed Donald. "I saw that myself; but Josie is an American. Hey, Ad?"

"No!" laughed Donald. "I saw that myself; but Josie is American. Right, Ad?"

"I don't think it's very nice to be making remarks about young ladies in their absence," retorted Adrian, bristling up.

"I don't think it's very nice to be making comments about young women while they're not here," Adrian shot back, getting defensive.

"Oh, come now, Adrian!" laughed Billie. "You started it. But what do you make out of Santiago?"

"Oh, come on, Adrian!" laughed Billie. "You started it. But what do you think of Santiago?"

"He's evidently a rich old chap with a bug. That's all."

"He's clearly a wealthy old guy with a problem. That's it."

"Well," commented Billie, with a nod of his head, "strange things do happen when you travel. Who'd have thought we'd ever see the old chap again, and at a time like this?" and he went back to where Adrian and Donald had stabled the horses, to see if there was anything he could do for the wounded animal.

"Well," said Billie, nodding his head, "weird things happen when you travel. Who would have thought we’d see the old guy again, especially at a time like this?" He then went back to where Adrian and Donald had stabled the horses to see if he could help the injured animal.

When Lieutenant Blunt was made acquainted with the conditions prevailing in the house, he immediately took possession of the lower floor and from that time on until the arrival of General Funston with the Fifth Brigade, it was made one of the official residences.

When Lieutenant Blunt found out about the situation in the house, he quickly took over the lower floor, and from then until General Funston and the Fifth Brigade arrived, it became one of the official residences.

The week following the occupation of Vera Cruz by the American forces was a busy one for our boys. Because of their intimate knowledge with the Spanish language, they were continually in demand. There was never a verbal message from [Pg 159] the American Admiral to some Mexican official but what they were called upon, and they very soon made friends of every Jackie and marine in the city.

The week after the American forces took over Vera Cruz was really busy for our guys. Thanks to their close understanding of the Spanish language, they were constantly in demand. There was never a verbal message from the American Admiral to some Mexican official that they weren't called on for, and they quickly made friends with every jack and marine in the city.

Ten days later the boys stood upon the wharf awaiting the arrival of the first boatload of General Funston's regulars from the big transports which had anchored in the harbor the night before. Because of the shallowness of the water, everything in Vera Cruz harbor has to be brought ashore in small boats, known as lighters. As the boys watched the first of these to approach there was something in the face and bearing of the officer in command which attracted their attention.

Ten days later, the boys stood on the dock waiting for the first boatload of General Funston's regulars from the big ships that had anchored in the harbor the night before. Because the water was shallow, everything in Vera Cruz harbor had to be brought ashore in small boats called lighters. As the boys watched the first of these boats approach, there was something about the face and demeanor of the officer in charge that caught their attention.

"By George!" exclaimed Donald, "I seem to know that face. Don't you, Billie?"

"Wow!" exclaimed Donald, "I feel like I recognize that face. Don't you, Billie?"

"Does look kind o' familiar. Where have we seen him?"

"Looks kind of familiar. Where have we seen him?"

"I'll tell you!" cried Adrian. "It's the lieutenant who was in charge of the patrol on the Rio Grande."

"I'll tell you!" shouted Adrian. "It's the lieutenant who was in charge of the patrol on the Rio Grande."

"Lieutenant Grant!" exclaimed Billie. "Sure as you're born. Well this is luck!"

"Lieutenant Grant!" Billie exclaimed. "You're not kidding. This is amazing luck!"

"Luck? What do you mean?"

"Luck? What does that mean?"

"Why, maybe he'll be able to tell me whatever became of those drafts for ten thousand pounds that I took from old Don Pablo."

"Maybe he'll be able to tell me what happened to those drafts for ten thousand pounds that I took from old Don Pablo."

His companions laughed.

His friends laughed.

"Still thinking about that, are you?" said Donald. "Why of course you'll never hear of them again. The bank is simply in that much."

"Are you still thinking about that?" Donald asked. "Of course, you'll never hear about them again. The bank is just too deep in it."

"Maybe so," admitted Billie, "but I'll get something[Pg 160] official."

"Maybe," Billie said, "but I'll get something[Pg 160] official."

And he did.

And he actually did.

It was several days later, though, after the regulars had taken possession of the city and the navy forces had withdrawn to their ships. The boys were sitting in Lieutenant Grant's quarters, to whom they had offered their services as soon after his landing as they were able, and were laughing over their adventures on the border.

It was several days later, though, after the regulars had taken control of the city and the naval forces had pulled back to their ships. The boys were hanging out in Lieutenant Grant's quarters, where they had offered their help as soon as they could after his arrival, and were laughing about their adventures on the border.

"It was certainly a close call you boys had," the lieutenant was saying. "I'm not sure but our neutrality was mighty near a breaking point. What do you think, Billie?"

"It was definitely a close call you guys had," the lieutenant was saying. "I'm not sure, but our neutrality was really close to breaking. What do you think, Billie?"

"Possibly so; Americans will be Americans. But say, Lieutenant, whatever was done about those drafts I took from Don Pablo? I've never been called upon to tell my story, nor have they ever come back to me."

"Maybe so; Americans will be Americans. But hey, Lieutenant, what happened with those drafts I took from Don Pablo? I’ve never been asked to share my side of the story, and they’ve never come back to me."

"That's because you were out of the United States," replied Lieutenant Grant. "It was less than a month ago that I was asked if I knew your whereabouts. Uncle Sam has decided that he has no claim to the drafts and they were returned to me. I have them in my army chest. If they are any good to you, I shall be pleased to hand them over."

"That's because you were outside the United States," replied Lieutenant Grant. "Less than a month ago, I was asked if I knew where you were. Uncle Sam has decided that he doesn't have a claim to the drafts, so they were returned to me. I have them in my army chest. If they’re any use to you, I’ll be happy to hand them over."

"I guess they are not much use to any one," sighed Billie mournfully. "My father says no bank would cash them without Don Pablo's signature, and no one can get that."

"I guess they aren't really useful to anyone," Billie sighed sadly. "My dad says no bank would cash them without Don Pablo's signature, and no one can get that."

"I'm glad you take it so philosophically," laughed[Pg 161] the lieutenant. "I hope you'll have better luck next time."

"I'm glad you can view it so philosophically," laughed[Pg 161] the lieutenant. "I hope you have better luck next time."

The boys arose to leave.

The boys got up to leave.

"Which way?" asked the lieutenant.

"Which way?" the lieutenant asked.

"No place in particular. We thought we'd go home."

"No specific place. We figured we’d head home."

"You mean to the United States?"

"You mean the U.S.?"

"Not to-night," laughed Adrian. "Just to the house where we are living. It belongs to old Santiago."

"Not tonight," laughed Adrian. "Just to the house we're living in. It belongs to old Santiago."

"Who is he?"

"Who’s he?"

Briefly the boys narrated what they knew about him on the Rio Grande, how they had met him here, and why they were staying at his house.

Briefly, the boys shared what they knew about him on the Rio Grande, how they had met him here, and why they were staying at his place.

"Has he no other name?"

"Does he have no other name?"

"Why, yes, I suppose so," replied Billie. "We always call him Prince to his face, and his daughter as the Princess Lucia. Of course, it is all make-believe, but it is one way of keeping him quiet."

"Sure, I guess so," Billie replied. "We always call him Prince when we’re talking to him, and his daughter is Princess Lucia. It’s all just pretend, but it helps keep him quiet."

He called to one of Santiago's servants, whom Lucia had lent them to look after their horses.

He called out to one of Santiago's servants, who Lucia had lent to them to take care of their horses.

"Oh, Chomo!" he said. "Do you know what Santiago's surname is?"

"Oh, Chomo!" he said. "Do you know what Santiago's last name is?"

"Si, señor. It is Ojeda."

"Yes, sir. It's Ojeda."

"What?" cried all the boys at once. "Ojeda? Why, that was old Don Pablo's name."

"What?" all the boys shouted together. "Ojeda? That was old Don Pablo's name."

The boys stood and eyed each other in speechless wonder. The same thought was in all their minds.

The boys stood and looked at each other in silent amazement. They were all thinking the same thing.

"Do you think it is possible?" asked Billie at[Pg 162] last.

"Do you think it's possible?" asked Billie at[Pg 162] last.

"Do I think what is possible?" asked Lieutenant Grant.

"Do I think about what's possible?" asked Lieutenant Grant.

"Why, that Santiago could have given those drafts to the stranger so as not to be known in the matter."

"Why, Santiago could have given those drafts to the stranger so that he wouldn't be recognized in the situation."

"Possibly. He seems a man of mystery."

"Maybe. He seems like a mysterious guy."

"Well," declared Billie, "I am going to find out."

"Well," Billie said, "I'm going to figure this out."

"How, I should like to know," asked Donald. "He's too crazy to remember anything, even if he wanted to tell you."

"How, I’d like to know," asked Donald. "He's too out of his mind to remember anything, even if he wanted to tell you."

"You forget Lucia," said Billie.

"You forget Lucia," Billie said.

"Oh, no, I haven't," laughed Donald, "and I have no doubt she would tell you all about it if she knew; but I do not believe she does. Santiago is too deep to have entrusted his secrets to a girl not yet out of her teens."

"Oh, no, I haven't," laughed Donald, "and I'm sure she would spill all the details if she knew; but I don't think she does. Santiago is too savvy to have shared his secrets with a girl who isn't even in her twenties yet."

"You never can tell," remarked the lieutenant. "Men with a hobby do strange things. You'd better ride along with me to headquarters. I'd like to introduce you to General Funston. He's a man after your own hearts. You know how he went out and captured Aguinaldo when he was in the Philippines."

"You never know," said the lieutenant. "Guys with a hobby do unexpected things. You should come with me to headquarters. I'd like to introduce you to General Funston. He's a guy you can relate to. You know how he went out and captured Aguinaldo when he was in the Philippines."

"I've read about it," replied Adrian. "It was a bold deed."

"I've read about it," Adrian replied. "It was a brave act."

"Sure was," said Donald. "We'll be mighty glad to meet him."

"Sure was," Donald said. "We'll be really glad to meet him."

It may also be said that General Funston was [Pg 163] glad to meet the Broncho Rider Boys, especially after Lieutenant Grant told him in a few words of the good work they had done on the border and on the day that Vera Cruz was taken.

It could also be said that General Funston was [Pg 163] happy to meet the Broncho Rider Boys, especially after Lieutenant Grant briefly updated him on the great work they had done at the border and on the day Vera Cruz was captured.

"And when do you expect to return to the United States?" asked the general.

"And when do you plan to come back to the United States?" asked the general.

"Just as soon as we can obtain passage," replied Donald.

"Just as soon as we can get a ride," replied Donald.

"I think we can arrange that for you in a few days," replied the general. "In the meantime come in occasionally."

"I think we can set that up for you in a few days," replied the general. "In the meantime, feel free to drop by occasionally."

The boys thanked him and started to leave, when the telephone in the general's quarters rang. He looked for some one to answer, but no one being at hand, he picked up the 'phone himself.

The boys thanked him and began to leave when the phone in the general's quarters rang. He searched for someone to answer it, but with no one around, he picked up the phone himself.

"What's that?" he asked after a brief moment. "The water works. You think they are attempting to cut you off. All right, I'll rush help."

"What's that?" he asked after a short pause. "The water supply. You think they're trying to cut you off. Okay, I'll get help right away."

He set down the 'phone and turned to Lieutenant Grant.

He put down the phone and turned to Lieutenant Grant.

"The enemy has gathered in force about the water works," he said sharply. "They evidently intend cutting off the water supply. Tell Colonel Bright to send them reinforcements at once. Do you boys know the way there?"

"The enemy has gathered in large numbers around the water works," he said sharply. "They clearly plan to cut off the water supply. Tell Colonel Bright to send them reinforcements immediately. Do you guys know the way there?"

"Yes, sir," from all three.

"Yes, sir," from all three.

"Then show the men the nearest way! Now go! The safety of the city may depend upon you!"

"Then show the guys the quickest route! Now go! The safety of the city might depend on you!"


[Pg 164]

CHAPTER XIX.

AN UNUSUAL RIDING PARTY.

Flinging themselves into the saddle, the boys rode rapidly after Lieutenant Grant and were at Colonel Bright's quarters by the time the bugle had called to boots and saddle. In another minute, at the head of a squadron of cavalry, they dashed over the road they had come to know so well.

Flinging themselves into the saddle, the boys rode quickly after Lieutenant Grant and reached Colonel Bright's quarters just as the bugle called for boots and saddle. In another minute, at the front of a squadron of cavalry, they charged down the road they had come to know so well.

What happened during the next twenty minutes is history.

What happened in the next twenty minutes is history.

Guided by the boys, the reinforcements arrived opportunely to stop the advance of a large body of Mexicans who would have destroyed the water works and have left the inhabitants and the American troops entirely without water.

Guided by the boys, the reinforcements arrived just in time to halt the advance of a large group of Mexicans who would have destroyed the water supply and left the residents and the American troops completely without water.

A few minutes later two batteries with rapid-fire guns put in an appearance, and in less time than it takes to tell it, the Mexicans turned and fled.

A few minutes later, two batteries with rapid-fire guns showed up, and before you could even blink, the Mexicans turned and ran.

It was not General Funston's mission in Vera Cruz to overrun any more Mexican territory, so the Mexicans were allowed to retreat without pursuit; but the lines were strengthened so that from that time on there was never any danger from Huerta's forces, although there were numerous alarms and plenty of scout duty.

It wasn't General Funston's goal in Vera Cruz to take over any more Mexican land, so the Mexicans were allowed to pull back without being chased; however, the defenses were improved so that from then on, there was never any threat from Huerta's forces, although there were many alerts and a lot of scouting.

During the few minutes of fighting, the boys were [Pg 165] in the midst of it and all came through it without a scratch. But it was exciting work and when it was over they were publicly thanked by Colonel Bright for their good work.

During the few minutes of fighting, the boys were [Pg 165] in the thick of it and all came through without a scratch. But it was thrilling work and when it was over, they were publicly thanked by Colonel Bright for their great effort.

"Well," laughed Billie as the three rode slowly back to their home, "that's glory enough for one day. I don't care to be a soldier."

"Well," laughed Billie as the three rode slowly back home, "that's enough glory for one day. I don't want to be a soldier."

"Nor I!" agreed Donald. "I prefer a quiet life on the ranch."

"Me neither!" agreed Donald. "I like a peaceful life on the ranch."

"Which we are in a fair way to see in a few weeks," commented Adrian. "I have no doubt that General Funston will do as he agreed and find us passage."

"Which we should be able to see in a few weeks," Adrian said. "I have no doubt that General Funston will keep his word and find us a way to get through."

"I for one shall be glad to return to the States," said Donald.

"I, for one, will be happy to go back to the States," said Donald.

"So shall I after I have found out about Santiago's connection with that ten thousand pounds."

"So I'll do that after I find out about Santiago's connection to that ten thousand pounds."

"That's right," was the laughing rejoinder. "Stick to it, Billie, and who knows what may happen?"

"Exactly," was the playful response. "Keep at it, Billie, and who knows what could happen?"

"Do you know," remarked Adrian slowly, "I'm beginning to be considerably worried for the Americans scattered throughout Mexico."

"Do you know," Adrian said slowly, "I'm starting to feel pretty worried about the Americans spread out across Mexico."

"Why should you be?" from Donald.

"Why should you be?" from Donald.

"I remember Pedro's words that, if the United States did anything, Carranza would unite with Huerta."

"I remember Pedro saying that if the United States did anything, Carranza would team up with Huerta."

"I don't believe he would."

"I don't think he would."

"Maybe not. But the Zapata brothers will think [Pg 166] this a good time to make the Americans trouble. I was thinking of Mr. Black and Josie."

"Maybe not. But the Zapata brothers will probably see this as a good time to cause some trouble for the Americans. I was thinking about Mr. Black and Josie."

"I'll bet you were," laughed Billie. "I wouldn't be surprised if they were thinking about you. Hey, Don?"

"I'll bet you were," Billie laughed. "I wouldn't be surprised if they were thinking about you. Right, Don?"

"Well, they might do worse," said Donald. "There are worse fellows than Adrian."

"Well, they could do worse," said Donald. "There are worse people than Adrian."

"That's right," retorted Adrian good-humoredly. "I can stand it. But, just the same, I wish I knew they were safe."

"That's right," Adrian replied playfully. "I can handle it. But still, I wish I knew they were okay."

"Well, what's the matter with our paying them a visit?" queried Billie.

"Well, what's stopping us from paying them a visit?" asked Billie.

"Nix," from Donald. "We'll stay inside the lines. I've had enough of this bush fighting."

"Nix," said Donald. "We’ll stick to the rules. I’m done with this ground fighting."

They approached Santiago's residence, where they had decided to remain until they sailed, when they perceived a peon on a pony standing by the gate. As they drew near they recognized him as one of the peons who had served as Mr. Black's mozo.

They walked up to Santiago's house, where they planned to stay until they set sail, when they noticed a worker on a pony by the gate. As they got closer, they realized he was one of the workers who had worked as Mr. Black's helper.

"Why, hello, José!" exclaimed Donald. "What brings you here?"

"Hey, José!" Donald exclaimed. "What brings you here?"

The mozo drew a letter from beneath his poncho and handed it to Donald.

The worker pulled a letter from under his poncho and handed it to Donald.

"For me?" asked Donald. "I thought it must be for Adrian. I didn't think the——"

"For me?" asked Donald. "I thought it was for Adrian. I didn't think the——"

"It is from the jefe," interrupted the mozo.

"It’s from the boss," interrupted the waiter.

"Oh, it's from Mr. Black!" with an accent on the Mr. "That's different."

"Oh, it’s from Mr. Black!" with an emphasis on the Mr. "That's unique."

Donald opened the letter and read it hastily.

Donald opened the letter and quickly read it.

"Well, by George!" he exclaimed, "what do you[Pg 167] think of that?"

"Well, by George!" he exclaimed, "what do you[Pg 167] think of that?"

"I can tell you better when I know what that is," replied Billie.

"I'll be able to tell you more once I know what that is," Billie replied.

"Why, Mr. Black is becoming alarmed over the activities of the Carranza forces and wants us to ask General Funston if he won't send out enough cavalry to escort him and his daughter to Vera Cruz in safety."

"Mr. Black is getting worried about what the Carranza forces are up to and wants us to ask General Funston if he can send enough cavalry to safely escort him and his daughter to Vera Cruz."

"Of course we'll ask him!" exclaimed Adrian. "Let's do it at once."

"Of course we’ll ask him!" Adrian exclaimed. "Let’s do it right away."

"Now wait a minute," said Donald. "Let's see about it."

"Hold on a second," said Donald. "Let's check it out."

"What is there to see?"

"What is there to see?"

"There's a good deal to see. You remember our experiences on the Rio Grande?"

"There's a lot to see. Do you remember our experiences on the Rio Grande?"

"But this is different! We are at war with Mexico now."

"But this is different! We’re at war with Mexico now."

"No, we are not. We have simply seized one port as a reprisal. To send a cavalry force out into the country might bring on more trouble."

"No, we are not. We have just taken one port as a retaliation. Sending a cavalry unit out into the countryside could cause more problems."

"Well, I don't care!" exclaimed Adrian hotly. "I'll go and ask him alone if you are afraid to go with me. I'm not going to leave Jos—I mean Mr. Black and his daughter out there at the mercies of these greasers. You hear me!"

"Well, I don’t care!" Adrian exclaimed angrily. "I’ll go and ask him myself if you’re too scared to come with me. I’m not going to leave Jos—I mean Mr. Black and his daughter out there at the mercy of these guys. You hear me!"

"Oh, we'll go with you, all right!" said Billie. "But don't be surprised if you don't get what you ask."

"Oh, we'll definitely go with you!" said Billie. "But don't be shocked if you don't get what you want."

Accordingly the trio started for General Funston's [Pg 168] headquarters. After some delay they were admitted to his presence and Donald showed him Mr. Black's letter.

Accordingly, the trio headed to General Funston's [Pg 168] headquarters. After a bit of a wait, they were let in to see him, and Donald showed him Mr. Black's letter.

The general perused it carefully and then remained silently thoughtful for some moments.

The general read it carefully and then stayed quietly thoughtful for a few moments.

"I wish I could do what our countryman asks," he finally said, "but I do not see how I can. To send a force out nearly fifty miles, even for such a service, would be overstepping the purpose for which I am here. I——"

"I wish I could do what our fellow countryman is asking," he finally said, "but I don't see how I can. Sending a team out almost fifty miles, even for this kind of task, would go beyond the reason I'm here. I——"

"But you wouldn't leave them out there to be mistreated and perhaps killed, would you?" interrupted Adrian.

"But you wouldn't just leave them out there to be mistreated and possibly killed, would you?" Adrian interrupted.

The general smiled.

The general grinned.

"Such is not my intention; but we must plan some other way. We must use a little strategy."

"That's not what I intend; but we need to figure out another approach. We have to be a little strategic."

"That's right!" exclaimed Billie, "and I'll bet the man who went out and rounded up Aguinaldo will know how to do it!"

"That's right!" Billie exclaimed. "And I'll bet the guy who went out and rounded up Aguinaldo will know how to handle it!"

Again the general smiled broadly, evidently well pleased at the implied compliment.

Again the general smiled widely, clearly pleased with the implied compliment.

"I'll do the best I can," he said quietly, "but I am not very familiar with the lay of the land. You boys have had some experience. Perhaps you can suggest something."

"I'll do my best," he said softly, "but I'm not very familiar with the area. You guys have some experience. Maybe you can suggest something."

Adrian said nothing, and Donald scratched his head. It was Billie who spoke.

Adrian stayed quiet, and Donald scratched his head. It was Billie who finally spoke up.

"I was just wondering, General," he said, "if some of the men wouldn't like to take a little horseback ride and see something of the country."

"I was just curious, General," he said, "if some of the guys would be interested in taking a short horseback ride to see a bit of the countryside."

"Well, now, perhaps they might," assented the[Pg 169] general.

"Well, now, maybe they could," agreed the[Pg 169] general.

"We could show them some mighty fine scenery, sir."

"We could show them some really great scenery, sir."

"By the moonlight, I suppose?"

"Under the moonlight, I guess?"

"Yes, sir. By the moonlight and early sunrise."

"Yes, sir. By the moonlight and the early sunrise."

"And about how many would you like to take on this picnic?"

"And how many people would you like to bring on this picnic?"

"Well," replied Billie, squinting up one eye, "I was thinking that Adrian and I might take out about ten to-night. Then about the same time to-morrow night Don could take another ten. We would probably meet somewhere in the mountains and watch the sun rise."

"Well," replied Billie, squinting one eye, "I was thinking that Adrian and I might head out around ten tonight. Then, about the same time tomorrow night, Don could go out for another ten. We’d probably meet up somewhere in the mountains and watch the sunrise."

"A very nice plan," said the general, "and one of which I approve. You may ask Lieutenant Grant to make enquiries among the men in his company and see if there are any who would like to be given two or three days' leave for such a purpose."

"A great plan," said the general, "and one that I support. You can ask Lieutenant Grant to check with the guys in his company and see if any of them would like to take two or three days off for that reason."

"Thank you, sir!" and Billie touched his hat in true military style.

"Thank you, sir!" Billie said, tipping his hat in a proper military fashion.

"And you might say to the lieutenant," was General Funston's parting words, "that I should be glad to hear later how the men enjoyed their ride. I think, now that the boys are down here, they should be given a chance to see the country."

"And you might tell the lieutenant," were General Funston's last words, "that I'd love to hear later how the men enjoyed their ride. I think, now that the guys are down here, they should get a chance to see the area."

"Billie, you have the making of a great general," was Donald's comment as they left the general's quarters. "How did you think of it?"

"Billie, you have the potential to be a great general," Donald said as they walked out of the general's quarters. "How did you come up with that?"

"I remembered my experience when I wanted men [Pg 170] to help me get you and Ad out of trouble in Presidio. Lieutenant Grant will know all about it."

"I remembered my experience when I wanted guys [Pg 170] to help me get you and Ad out of trouble in Presidio. Lieutenant Grant will know all about it."

And so he did. In less than half an hour ten regulars, some of them but very little older than Billie and Adrian, were ready for the ride which Billie had proposed and which in his mind would be as far as Moreno.

And so he did. In less than half an hour, ten regulars, some of them barely older than Billie and Adrian, were set for the ride that Billie had suggested, which in his mind would go as far as Moreno.

"You are sure ten will be enough?" asked Lieutenant Grant.

"You really think ten will be enough?" asked Lieutenant Grant.

"Sure! Twelve Americans are enough to lick fifty Mexicans if it comes to that; and besides we shall have Mr. Black and Josie. He's as good as four."

"Sure! Twelve Americans can take on fifty Mexicans if it comes to that; and besides, we’ll have Mr. Black and Josie. He's worth at least four."

"And don't forget the reinforcements, if they are needed," laughed Donald. "We will be right on the spot where we saw the sun rise the first morning after we left Moreno."

"And don't forget the backup, if we need it," laughed Donald. "We'll be right where we saw the sunrise the first morning after we left Moreno."

"It looks all right," was Lieutenant Grant's comment, "but it is always well to have a big enough force. Success to you!"

"It looks good," Lieutenant Grant said, "but it's always smart to have a strong enough team. Good luck!"

"You'll make all the necessary explanations to the crowd you bring out, Don," was Billie's parting words. "Adrian and I will explain the nature of the trip to our fellows as we ride along."

"You'll explain everything to the crowd you gather, Don," were Billie's last words. "Adrian and I will fill our friends in on the trip as we go."

This they did, and gave the soldier boys a little history of their own troubles in reaching Vera Cruz.

This is what they did, and they shared with the soldiers a bit of their own history about the challenges they faced in getting to Vera Cruz.

"No explanations are necessary," remarked a young chap by the name of Brooks, a corporal. "We saw you out at the water works and we know [Pg 171] you are made of the right stuff. You lead! We'll follow, won't we, boys?"

"No explanations are necessary," said a young guy named Brooks, a corporal. "We saw you at the waterworks and we know [Pg 171] you have what it takes. You lead! We'll follow, right, guys?"

"You bet!" replied the others in one voice.

"You bet!" answered the others in unison.


CHAPTER XX.

ADRIAN FOILS A TRAITOR.

It was nine o'clock of the second night that Adrian and Billie, accompanied by Mr. Black's mozo, José, and the ten troopers, reached the outskirts of Moreno.

It was nine o'clock on the second night when Adrian and Billie, along with Mr. Black's helper, José, and the ten troopers, arrived at the edge of Moreno.

They had made good headway the first night, had slept in the hills during the day and had come this far without molestation.

They made good progress the first night, slept in the hills during the day, and got this far without any trouble.

"If everything goes to the end as it has this far," remarked Corporal Brooks to Billie as they neared the little town, "it will be nothing but a pleasant outing, sure enough."

"If everything ends up as it has so far," remarked Corporal Brooks to Billie as they got closer to the little town, "it'll definitely just be a nice outing."

Arriving at the edge of the town, the boys sent José forward to see how the land lay and to bring them word.

Arriving at the edge of town, the boys sent José ahead to check out the situation and update them.

"Do you think you can trust him?" asked the corporal.

"Do you think you can trust him?" the corporal asked.

"We'll have to," replied Adrian. "I believe he is loyal, and Mr. Black seems to have complete confidence in him."

"We'll have to," Adrian said. "I believe he's loyal, and Mr. Black seems to trust him completely."

"Let's hope so, anyway," said Billie. "It seems to be the best we can do to get word to Mr. Black of our presence."

"Let's hope so," Billie said. "It seems like the best we can do to let Mr. Black know we're here."

"Hurry back, José," urged Adrian as the mozo[Pg 172] departed.

"Hurry back, José," Adrian urged as the attendant[Pg 172] left.

"Si, señor," was the brief reply. "You may depend on me."

"Yes, sir," was the quick response. "You can count on me."

"It ought not to take him more than half an hour," explained Billie. "It isn't more than a mile."

"It shouldn't take him more than half an hour," Billie explained. "It's only about a mile."

But a half hour passed and then another and still no José.

But half an hour went by, then another, and still no José.

"Something must have happened to him," said Adrian.

"Something must have happened to him," Adrian said.

"That's the charitable way to look at it," laughed the corporal. "It's more likely, however, that he's making arrangements to have something happen to us."

"That’s a generous way to see it," laughed the corporal. "But it’s more likely that he’s planning to have something done to us."

"I hardly think so," was Billie's comment, "but, if he is, we'll fool him."

"I really doubt it," Billie said, "but if he is, we'll trick him."

"How?"

"How?"

"We'll move."

"We're moving."

"But he may come back."

"But he might come back."

"We'll leave one man here on guard. The rest of us will go around to the other side of town."

"We'll leave one person here to keep watch. The rest of us will head over to the other side of town."

"Good!" from the corporal. "You are a strategist."

"Good!" said the corporal. "You're a strategist."

The plan was at once carried into effect.

The plan was put into action immediately.

"Now then," said Billie, "I'm going in to town myself."

"Alright," said Billie, "I'm going into town myself."

"Not much," declared Adrian. "I'm going."

"Not much," said Adrian. "I’m leaving."

"I'd offer to go myself," laughed the corporal, "but I don't know the place."

"I'd volunteer to go myself," laughed the corporal, "but I’m not familiar with the area."

"We'll toss for it," said Billie.[Pg 173]

"We'll flip a coin for it," said Billie.[Pg 173]

"All right," and Adrian produced a coin. "Heads I win. Tails you lose."

"Okay," Adrian said as he pulled out a coin. "Heads I win. Tails you lose."

"No funny business," said Billie. "Choose heads if you want."

"No funny business," Billie said. "Go ahead and choose heads if you want."

Adrian flipped the coin. It came down heads up.

Adrian flipped the coin. It landed on heads.

"All right," agreed Billie. "Now for some set of signals."

"Okay," Billie agreed. "Now let's come up with some signals."

"Our old Broncho Rider whistle if I need help," said Adrian. "If everything is O. K., I'll give the whip-poor-will."

"Our old Broncho Rider whistle if I need help," said Adrian. "If everything is okay, I'll give the whip-poor-will."

Adrian slid from his horse.

Adrian dismounted his horse.

"What are you doing?" asked Billie.

"What are you up to?" Billie asked.

"I'm going afoot. I didn't spend my boyhood among the Indians for nothing. Good-bye!" and a moment later he disappeared in the fading moonlight.

"I'm going by foot. I didn't spend my childhood with the Indians for nothing. Goodbye!" and a moment later he vanished into the dim moonlight.

"Whatever the conditions," said Billie, "we'll soon know," as he settled back in his saddle.

"Whatever the conditions," said Billie, "we'll find out soon," as he leaned back in his saddle.

Running swiftly along, Adrian made straight for the barracks in which he knew would be found whatever soldiers might be in the city.

Running quickly, Adrian headed straight for the barracks, where he knew he would find any soldiers that might be in the city.

"If I find everything quiet at the barracks," was his thought, "I can go straight to where Mr. Black is stopping without fear. If I find there is any disturbance, I'll be more careful."

"If I find everything quiet at the barracks," he thought, "I can head straight to where Mr. Black is staying without any worries. If there's any commotion, I'll be more cautious."

Ten minutes of running brought him to the barracks. All was as quiet as the hour demanded. He stood under the shadow of the back wall long [Pg 174] enough to hear the sentry's call and then he turned in the direction of the house where the two Americans were stopping.

Ten minutes of running got him to the barracks. Everything was as quiet as the hour required. He stayed under the shadow of the back wall long enough to hear the sentry's call, then turned toward the house where the two Americans were staying.

It was only a few blocks away and he reached it without incident.

It was just a few blocks away, and he got there without any problems.

"Kind o' funny," he mused, "that I haven't seen or heard a soul on the street. I wonder what's become of José?"

"Kind of funny," he thought, "that I haven't seen or heard anyone on the street. I wonder what happened to José?"

He stopped a minute to ponder.

He paused for a moment to think.

"Things are going almost too smooth. I'll just stop a bit."

"Things are going almost too smoothly. I’ll just pause for a moment."

He stole past the house and a moment later threw himself into the gutter, where he lay as one dead.

He slipped past the house and a moment later plunged into the gutter, where he lay as if he were dead.

The wisdom of his action soon became apparent.

The wisdom of his decision quickly became clear.

He hadn't been lying there two minutes until a solitary figure passed him and stopped in front of the house, evidently listening to hear what might be going on inside.

He had barely been lying there for two minutes when a lone figure walked by and stopped in front of the house, clearly straining to hear what was happening inside.

A moment later he was joined by another figure. Adrian could just make them out in the darkness.

A moment later, he was joined by another figure. Adrian could barely see them in the dark.

"Have they come?" was the whispered question.

"Have they arrived?" was the whispered question.

"I can't tell," was the whispered reply.

"I don't know," was the whispered response.

Adrian heard both the question and the answer distinctly.

Adrian heard both the question and the answer clearly.

"It's José," he said to himself. "He knew that it was the plan for Billie and I both to come to the house. The traitor! I have a notion to shoot him in his tracks."

"It's José," he thought to himself. "He knew the plan was for Billie and me to come to the house. The traitor! I feel like shooting him right here."

Only the fear of creating a disturbance kept the[Pg 175] lad from carrying out his notion.

Only the fear of causing a scene stopped the[Pg 175] kid from going through with his idea.

"Why don't you knock and tell the Gringo you are here?" was the next question.

"Why don't you knock and let the Gringo know you’re here?" was the next question.

"They might be in there."

"They could be in there."

"Well, what of that? You can tell them you were stopped by the guard and have just been released. That'll seem reasonable."

"Well, what about that? You can tell them you were stopped by security and just got released. That should sound reasonable."

José stepped to the door and knocked.

José walked up to the door and knocked.

There was no response and he knocked again.

There was no answer, so he knocked again.

"Who is there?" asked a voice.

"Who's there?" a voice asked.

"José. I just come from Vera Cruz. Let me in."

"José. I just got back from Vera Cruz. Let me in."

There was a movement within and presently the door opened and José entered, closing the door behind him.

There was some movement inside, and then the door opened as José walked in, shutting the door behind him.

Adrian slowly arose to a kneeling posture.

Adrian slowly got into a kneeling position.

"I wonder what the other will do now?" he wondered.

"I wonder what the other person will do now?" he thought.

He did not have long to wait, for the other knocked on the pavement with his gun and presently several more figures appeared. Adrian had just time to throw himself to the ground and escape detection.

He didn’t have to wait long, as the other one knocked on the pavement with his gun and soon several more figures showed up. Adrian quickly threw himself to the ground to avoid being seen.

The men in front of the house exchanged whispered confidences and then all but one started to leave.

The men in front of the house shared quiet secrets and then almost all of them began to walk away, leaving just one behind.

"If any one attempts to leave the house," was the command, "fire! If any one attempts to enter, allow them to do so and then give the customary call."

"If anyone tries to leave the house," was the command, "fire! If anyone tries to enter, let them in and then give the usual call."

"Bueno!" was the response, and all but the one[Pg 176] withdrew.

"Okay!" was the response, and everyone but the one[Pg 176] left.

A minute later Adrian again arose to a crouching posture and as the sentry cautiously approached the door, he crept up behind him. An instant more and he was upon the man and had him by the throat.

A minute later, Adrian got up into a crouching position again, and as the guard carefully walked toward the door, he quietly snuck up behind him. In an instant, he was on the man and had him by the throat.

The man was a wiry Mexican and evidently in training, for he squirmed and kicked vigorously; but Adrian's grip was too firm upon him and in a couple of minutes he sank down limp upon the ground.

The man was a lean Mexican and clearly in training, as he squirmed and kicked energetically; but Adrian's grip was too strong for him, and in a couple of minutes, he slumped down helplessly on the ground.

The noise of the scuffle must have been heard inside, for the door cautiously opened and a head peered out.

The sound of the struggle must have been heard inside, because the door slowly opened and a head poked out.

Without a question Adrian sprang within, dragging the lifeless form of the sentry with him.

Without a doubt, Adrian jumped inside, pulling the lifeless body of the guard with him.

"Quick, bar the gate!" he commanded.

"Quick, shut the gate!" he shouted.

The command was obeyed.

The order was followed.

"Now where is Mr. Black?" he asked.

"Where's Mr. Black?" he asked.

"Upstairs talking with José."

"Talking with José upstairs."

"All right. Bind this man while I go up. Don't let him escape or he is liable to cut your throat."

"Okay. Tie this guy up while I go upstairs. Don’t let him get away or he might slit your throat."

"No temer V, señor" was the response, meaning "Have no fear."

"Don't worry V, sir" was the response, meaning "Have no fear."

Adrian ran lightly up the stairs, revolver in hand. He heard voices talking and had no doubt that José was narrating some trumped-up story.

Adrian jogged up the stairs, revolver in hand. He heard voices and was certain that José was spinning some exaggerated tale.

"Yes, señor," he heard the mozo say, "they are expecting you. It is necessary that you go at once."

"Yes, sir," he heard the attendant say, "they're waiting for you. You need to go right away."

Adrian flung open the door and covered José[Pg 177] with his revolver.

Adrian swung the door open and pointed his revolver at José[Pg 177].

"Put up your hands," he commanded. Then to Mr. Black, to whom José was talking: "Take his weapons away from him, Mr. Black."

"Put your hands up," he ordered. Then to Mr. Black, whom José was talking to: "Take his weapons away from him, Mr. Black."

Realizing at once that something was wrong, Mr. Black obeyed.

Realizing immediately that something was off, Mr. Black complied.

"Now tie him."

"Now restrain him."

This was also quickly done, Mr. Black asking at the same time what had happened.

This was done quickly as well, with Mr. Black asking what had happened at the same time.

"I can't tell you exactly, Mr. Black, but this man has betrayed us and we are now watched by a squad of soldiers."

"I can't say for sure, Mr. Black, but this guy has let us down, and now a group of soldiers is keeping an eye on us."

Mr. Black's face turned as black as his name.

Mr. Black's face turned as dark as his name.

"Is that true?" he demanded, seizing José by the shoulder with such a powerful grip that the man cried out with pain.

"Is that true?" he asked, grabbing José by the shoulder with such a strong grip that the man yelled out in pain.

"Oh, señor," he cried, "don't kill me! I will tell you all."

"Oh, sir," he shouted, "please don't kill me! I'll tell you everything."

"See that you do," was the command. "One lie and I will wring your neck as I would a chicken. You know me."

"Make sure you do," was the command. "One lie and I’ll snap your neck like I would a chicken. You know how I am."

"I'll tell the truth. I told the captain at the barracks. He is going to capture all the Americanos and hold them for ransom and I am to have half."

"I'll be honest. I told the captain at the barracks. He's planning to capture all the Americans and hold them for ransom, and I'm supposed to get half."

"That is evidently the truth," declared Adrian, and he proceeded to tell Mr. Black what was being done to get him and his daughter to Vera Cruz, and how José had played them false.

"That’s clearly true," Adrian said, and he went on to explain to Mr. Black what was being done to get him and his daughter to Vera Cruz, and how José had betrayed them.

For a moment it looked as though Mr. Black [Pg 178] might wreak his vengeance on José, but after a minute he thought better of it.

For a moment, it seemed like Mr. Black [Pg 178] might take his revenge on José, but after a minute, he reconsidered.

"You ought to die this minute," he declared, "but I'll wait till I have more time." Then to Adrian: "What had we better do now?"

"You should die right now," he said, "but I'll wait until I have more time." Then to Adrian: "What should we do now?"

Before Adrian could reply the clear note of a bugle rang out upon the night air.

Before Adrian could respond, the clear sound of a bugle echoed through the night.


CHAPTER XXI.

ADRIAN HAS AN ACCIDENT.

"What do you suppose that means?" asked Adrian.

"What do you think that means?" Adrian asked.

Mr. Black made no reply and a moment later the bugle call was repeated.

Mr. Black didn’t respond, and a moment later, the bugle call was sounded again.

"It sounds to me," said Mr. Black, "as though some fresh troops were coming in."

"It sounds to me," said Mr. Black, "like some new troops are coming in."

"That's bad," was Adrian's comment.

"That's bad," Adrian said.

"Perhaps not, my lad, if we act quickly."

"Maybe not, my friend, if we move fast."

"How so?"

"Why is that?"

"The new arrivals may take up the attention of the gang of bandits outside and we may get away ere they return."

"The new arrivals might distract the group of bandits outside, and we could escape before they come back."

"Good," was Adrian's comment. "Where is Miss Josie?"

"Good," was Adrian's response. "Where's Miss Josie?"

"Waiting in the next room with the family of my host."

"Waiting in the next room with my host's family."

Mr. Black stepped to the door and called to [Pg 179] those within. In a few words he explained the situation and in less than three minutes he and the girl were mounted and ready to ride.

Mr. Black walked to the door and called to [Pg 179] the people inside. He quickly explained what was going on, and in under three minutes, he and the girl were mounted and ready to go.

"Where is your horse?" he asked Adrian.

"Where's your horse?" he asked Adrian.

"I left it with the boys at the cocoanut grove."

"I left it with the guys at the coconut grove."

"But we can't go and leave you here."

"But we can't just leave you here."

"Of course not. I shall run alongside of your horse, holding to its mane, Indian fashion. Now then, are we ready?"

"Of course not. I'll run alongside your horse, holding onto its mane, like they do in India. So, are we ready?"

"All ready!"

"All set!"

The great gate was opened noiselessly and, bidding a subdued good-bye to the family, the three passed out into the night.

The large gate opened quietly, and after saying a soft goodbye to the family, the three stepped out into the night.

"I should have throttled José ere I left," declared Mr. Black as they passed down the street.

"I should have choked José before I left," Mr. Black said as they walked down the street.

"I wish we were as safe as he is," laughed Adrian.

"I wish we were as safe as he is," laughed Adrian.

For three blocks they wended their way as silently as possible and just as they came out into the open there came another bugle call.

For three blocks, they made their way as quietly as they could, and just as they stepped into the open, another bugle call sounded.

"That's for us," said Adrian. "There is no mistaking that command. Now to run for it."

"That's for us," Adrian said. "There's no doubt about that command. Now let's run for it."

The two riders put spurs to their horses and Adrian bounded along at their side, running as lightly as an antelope. They were rapidly nearing the spot where the Americans were in waiting, when Adrian stepped into a hole and pitched forward onto his face.

The two riders kicked their horses into a gallop, and Adrian sprinted alongside them, moving as gracefully as an antelope. They were quickly approaching the area where the Americans were waiting when Adrian tripped into a hole and fell forward onto his face.

"Don't stop for me!" he called. "I'll be there as quick as you are!"

"Don't wait for me!" he shouted. "I'll get there just as fast as you!"

He picked himself up and started to run, but his[Pg 180] ankle gave him such a pain that he almost fainted.

He got back on his feet and began to run, but his[Pg 180]ankle hurt so much that he nearly passed out.

"Great Scott!" he exclaimed, "I've sprained my ankle."

"Wow!" he exclaimed, "I've twisted my ankle."

He sat down and rubbed the maimed member for a couple of minutes and then attempted to hobble on. It was more than he could bear and he sat down again.

He sat down and rubbed his injured leg for a couple of minutes and then tried to limp on. It was more than he could handle, so he sat down again.

"By George," he groaned, "this is tough! I'll have to call for help."

"Man, this is tough!" he groaned. "I need to call for help."

He gave the well-known whistle, but there was no response.

He whistled the familiar tune, but there was no answer.

He gave it again; but still no answer.

He tried again, but there was still no response.

"Worse and more of it," he muttered. "Something has happened to Billie."

"Worse and more of it," he said under his breath. "Something's happened to Billie."

What it might be Adrian could not imagine, but he was sure that his chum was not at the appointed spot, as he was near enough to have heard the whistle and would surely have answered.

What it could be, Adrian couldn’t picture, but he was certain his friend wasn’t at the designated spot since he was close enough to have heard the whistle and would definitely have responded.

"Well, I can't stay here. The greasers will be coming pretty soon. I must get along some way."

"Well, I can't stick around. The greasers will be here pretty soon. I need to figure out a way to get out of here."

He got up and walked a few steps and again sat down. There was no sound of a pursuit and the hoofbeats of Mr. Black's horses had ceased.

He got up and took a few steps, then sat back down. There was no sound of anyone chasing him, and the hoofbeats of Mr. Black's horses had stopped.

"They have reached the grove," Adrian muttered. "I must get there some way."

"They've reached the grove," Adrian murmured. "I need to find a way there."

Once more he arose to his feet and took several steps and then sank down in a faint, so great was the pain.

Once again, he got to his feet and took a few steps before collapsing in a faint, overwhelmed by the pain.

When he came to himself he was lying upon a [Pg 181] matting of some kind and to his ears came the faint sound of a guitar, followed a few moments later by sounds of girlish laughter.

When he became aware of himself, he was lying on some kind of mat, and he could hear a faint sound of a guitar, followed a few moments later by the sound of girls laughing.

He sat up and looked around, but could see nothing, except a ray of light coming in through a little crack between a couple of blankets that formed a curtain in a doorway.

He sat up and looked around, but could see nothing except a beam of light coming through a small gap between a couple of blankets that made a curtain in a doorway.

"Where in the name of common sense am I?" he muttered.

"Where in the world am I?" he muttered.

He attempted to get to his feet, but the pain in his ankle brought him quickly to himself.

He tried to stand up, but the pain in his ankle snapped him back to reality.

"Now I remember!" he exclaimed. "I fell and sprained my ankle. But how did I get here?"

"Now I remember!" he exclaimed. "I fell and twisted my ankle. But how did I end up here?"

He started to call, but at that moment the music ceased and a minute later he heard voices saying good night. Then a door was closed and immediately the curtains were thrown open and a peon woman stood in the door.

He began to call out, but just then the music stopped and a minute later he heard voices saying good night. Then a door shut, and right away the curtains were pulled open, revealing a peon woman standing in the doorway.

"Oh!" she exclaimed, upon seeing Adrian sitting up and looking at her. "Then you are not dead?"

"Oh!" she exclaimed when she saw Adrian sitting up and looking at her. "So, you're not dead?"

"I should say not. Did you think I was?"

"I definitely shouldn't say that. Did you really think I was?"

"I was afraid so."

"I was afraid of that."

"Why?"

"Why?"

"Because your death might be laid at my door."

"Because your death could be blamed on me."

"Evidently she hasn't discovered I am an American," thought Adrian. "Well, I'll not tell her until I have to."

"Evidently she hasn't figured out that I'm American," thought Adrian. "Well, I won't tell her until I have to."

The woman turned around and called to some one [Pg 182] in the other room and another figure appeared in the door—that of a girl some fifteen years of age.

The woman turned around and called to someone [Pg 182] in the other room, and another figure appeared in the doorway—a girl about fifteen years old.

"Look, Peppita," and the elder woman pointed at Adrian.

"Look, Peppita," the older woman said, pointing at Adrian.

The girl gave a little scream.

The girl let out a small scream.

"Madre mia!" she exclaimed. "Who is it?"

"Oh my gosh!" she exclaimed. "Who is it?"

"I know not, my child. I found him unconscious at our back door and dragged him inside."

"I don’t know, my child. I found him passed out at our back door and brought him in."

"I beg your pardon," said Adrian. "I didn't know I was near any house."

"I’m sorry," Adrian said. "I didn’t realize I was close to any house."

"It is a very poor one, señor. I and my daughter are all alone since my poor Leocadio was killed."

"It’s really tough, sir. My daughter and I are all alone now since my poor Leocadio was killed."

"Who killed him?" asked Adrian, becoming interested.

"Who killed him?" Adrian asked, intrigued.

"The Huertistas. He was a soldier under Gen. Dorantes."

"The Huertistas. He was a soldier under General Dorantes."

"Is that so?" exclaimed Adrian. "I know Gen. Dorantes well. He is a fine man. But you will soon be avenged, for Huerta's days are short."

"Is that so?" Adrian said. "I know General Dorantes well. He’s a great guy. But you’ll get your revenge soon, because Huerta's time is running out."

The woman's eyes snapped.

The woman's eyes widened.

"Es verdad?" meaning, "Is it true?"

"Is it true?"

"It certainly is. Since the Americans have taken Vera Cruz, Gen. Huerta will have to go. It is only a question of a few days."

"It definitely is. Now that the Americans have taken Veracruz, General Huerta will have to leave. It’s just a matter of a few days."

"Bienissimo! The Americans are brave men! My Leocadio was fond of the Americans."

"Awesome! The Americans are brave men! My Leocadio really liked the Americans."

"I am glad of that, señora, for I am an American."

"I’m glad to hear that, ma'am, because I'm an American."

The woman and girl both started back as in fear and then came forward again.

The woman and the girl both flinched in fear and then stepped forward again.

"How did you come here, señor?"[Pg 183]

"How did you get here, sir?"[Pg 183]

"I fell from a horse and sprained my ankle. I tried to walk and must have fainted."

"I fell off a horse and twisted my ankle. I tried to walk, but I must have passed out."

"Have you friends in Moreno?"

"Do you have friends in Moreno?"

"I did have, but they have gone and I want to get to Vera Cruz."

"I had some, but they've disappeared and I want to get to Vera Cruz."

"Vera Cruz is a long way, señor. I never expect to go that far from home—me and my little Peppa."

"Vera Cruz is really far, sir. I never thought I'd go that far from home—me and my little Peppa."

Adrian smiled.

Adrian smiled.

"I expect it does look like a long ways to you, señora; but it is not far. Do you think I can stay here with you until my ankle is well enough to walk? I have a little money. I will pay you something."

"I know it seems like a long distance to you, señora, but it’s not far. Do you think I could stay here with you until my ankle is healed enough to walk? I have a little money. I can pay you something."

"Oh, Mother!" exclaimed the girl, who now spoke for the first time. "You will let him stay, won't you?"

"Oh, Mom!" exclaimed the girl, who was now speaking for the first time. "You'll let him stay, right?"

"The wife of Leocadio would not turn a lame dog out, much less a lame boy."

"The wife of Leocadio wouldn’t kick a lame dog to the curb, let alone a lame boy."

"Mil gracias, señora!" exclaimed Adrian, with much gratitude. "Yes, more than a thousand thanks. You will never regret it."

"Thank you so much, ma'am!" Adrian exclaimed, feeling very grateful. "Yes, more than a thousand thanks. You won't regret it."

"The wife of Leocadio is not learned," was the reply, "but she knows an honest youth when she sees one. Come, Peppita, let the young man go to sleep. We will make our bed out here."

"The wife of Leocadio isn't educated," was the reply, "but she can recognize an honest young man when she sees one. Come on, Peppita, let the young man get some sleep. We'll set up our bed out here."

She drew the curtains together and Adrian was left alone to his own reflections.

She pulled the curtains closed, and Adrian was left alone with his thoughts.

"By George!" he exclaimed under his breath, "if I ever get out of this measly country, I'll be [Pg 184] glad. I wonder what has become of Billie? Of course he'll look for me, and old Don, too; but it looks as though it might be weeks before I could walk. Well, I don't care. If Mr. Black and Josie got away, that's glory enough for one day."

"By George!" he muttered to himself, "if I ever get out of this miserable country, I'll be glad. I wonder what happened to Billie? Of course, he'll look for me, and old Don will too; but it seems like it could be weeks before I can walk. Well, I don't care. If Mr. Black and Josie got away, that's enough glory for one day."

He settled himself down and tried to go to sleep, but his leg hurt him so that he could not. In fact, the pain was so great that every once in a while he groaned.

He got comfortable and tried to sleep, but his leg was hurting too much to do so. The pain was so intense that he occasionally groaned.

After a few of these groans the woman appeared in the door with an earthen vessel filled with hot water.

After a few of these groans, the woman showed up in the doorway with a clay pot filled with hot water.

"If the señor will bind this on his ankle, it will do it much good," she said.

"If the sir puts this on his ankle, it will help him a lot," she said.

"I'll do anything to get rid of this pain," said Adrian.

"I'll do whatever it takes to get rid of this pain," said Adrian.

He took the jar and, dipping his handkerchief in it, bathed his ankle freely and finally bound the cloth around the swollen part.

He grabbed the jar and, dipping his handkerchief in it, soaked his ankle and then wrapped the cloth around the swollen area.

"There," he muttered as he at last succeeded in finding a comfortable position, "now I think I can get a little sleep."

"There," he mumbled as he finally found a comfy position, "now I think I can get some sleep."

How long thereafter it was before he came to himself he did not know, but when he opened his eyes the first streak of daylight was creeping in through a little window.

How long it took for him to come to his senses, he didn't know, but when he opened his eyes, the first hint of daylight was coming in through a small window.

A minute later there was the rattle of musketry, followed by a hearty American cheer. He raised up to look out of the window, when the side of the room came in with a crash.

A minute later, there was the sound of gunfire, followed by a loud cheer from the Americans. He leaned up to look out of the window when the side of the room came crashing in.


[Pg 185]

CHAPTER XXII.

A RESCUE AND A SURPRISE.

It would be hard to describe Adrian's surprise at the unexpected event which closed the preceding chapter. His first thought was that a cannon ball had struck the house, but a second thought convinced him that such was not the case. Before he had time to think further he heard a big voice call out:

It would be hard to describe Adrian's surprise at the unexpected event that wrapped up the last chapter. His first thought was that a cannonball had hit the house, but a second thought convinced him that wasn't the case. Before he could think further, he heard a loud voice call out:

"Here he is!"

"Here he is!"

A moment later Mr. Black burst in through the opening in the wall and, picking Adrian up in his arms as though he had been a baby, started on a run with him for the nearest horse.

A moment later, Mr. Black rushed through the opening in the wall and, scooping Adrian up in his arms like he was a baby, took off running for the nearest horse.

"There you are!" he exclaimed as he set the boy on the horse. "Now to run for it!"

"There you are!" he shouted as he put the boy on the horse. "Now let's go for it!"

Adrian needed no second bidding, but digging his heels into the horse's side he dashed away toward the cocoanut grove, his flight being protected by the Americans with Billie at their head.

Adrian didn't need to be told twice; he dug his heels into the horse's side and raced toward the coconut grove, with the Americans, led by Billie, protecting his escape.

A couple of minutes after, the entire band had rallied in the shelter of the trees, where they stopped to plan for the next move.

A few minutes later, the whole group gathered under the trees, where they paused to figure out their next move.

"How did you ever find me?" asked Adrian as he and Billie peered out toward the town.

"How did you find me?" Adrian asked as he and Billie looked out at the town.

"Mr. Black knew about where he lost you and we tracked you by your trail. Whoever dragged [Pg 186] you into the house, left a trail as wide as your body."

"Mr. Black knew where he lost you, and we followed your trail. Whoever pulled you into the house left a trail as wide as you."

"It was a woman," explained Adrian, "and she was hiding me. But where were you when I whistled for help?"

"It was a woman," Adrian explained, "and she was hiding me. But where were you when I called for help?"

"That's a long story," was the reply, "which I will tell you when we have time; but briefly we were on the other side of the town, where we left the man on guard. It appears that our friend José was a first-class traitor."

"That's a long story," was the reply, "which I'll share when we have time; but briefly, we were on the other side of town, where we left the guy on guard. It seems our friend José was a top-notch traitor."

"As I discovered," said Adrian.

"As I found out," said Adrian.

"Yes," continued Billie, "he sent a bunch of soldiers to capture us. The sentry heard them coming and gave the alarm. We went to his aid and succeeded in rescuing him, but that is what got us into this trouble."

"Yeah," Billie continued, "he sent a bunch of soldiers to capture us. The guard heard them coming and raised the alarm. We rushed to help him and managed to rescue him, but that’s what got us into this mess."

"And now what?"

"What's next?"

"Now we have to get away just as soon as we can."

"Now we need to leave as soon as we can."

"Right," said Mr. Black. "There is no enemy in sight at this moment and the best thing we can do is to run for it. If we can cross the valley safely, we shall have little trouble."

"Okay," Mr. Black said. "There’s no enemy in sight right now, and the best thing we can do is to make a run for it. If we can get across the valley safely, we won’t have much trouble."

"I'd like to stay and give them a few shots," said the corporal, "but it would probably be unwise."

"I'd like to stick around and take a few shots," said the corporal, "but it probably wouldn't be smart."

"I'll tell you what, Brooks," suggested Billie, "suppose you and I remain behind until we see the others well across the valley. If there is any pursuit, we can hold them back for a few minutes. [Pg 187] They will not know how many we are and it will give the others a chance to escort Mr. Black and his daughter to a place of safety. You know that is what we really came for."

"I've got an idea, Brooks," Billie suggested. "Why don't you and I stay back until we see the others safely across the valley? If anyone comes after us, we can slow them down for a few minutes. [Pg 187] They won’t know how many of us there are, which will give the others time to get Mr. Black and his daughter to safety. You know that's the real reason we're here."

"Fine!" was the corporal's reply.

"Okay!" was the corporal's reply.

Mr. Black and Adrian protested, but they were overruled.

Mr. Black and Adrian protested, but they were dismissed.

"It's a good idea," said the oldest of the troopers, "and now to run for it."

"It's a great idea," said the oldest of the troopers, "and now let's go for it."

It was fully five minutes after the others had left that Billie and Brooks saw the Mexican infantry, some fifty in number, emerge from the town and come slowly toward them.

It was a full five minutes after the others had left that Billie and Brooks saw the Mexican infantry, around fifty of them, come out of the town and slowly walk towards them.

Looking across the valley, they could perceive that the little band under the direction of Mr. Black was nearing the protection of the forest that covered the next hillside.

Looking across the valley, they could see that the small group led by Mr. Black was getting closer to the shelter of the forest on the next hillside.

"Two minutes more and they will be safe," said Billie.

"Just two more minutes and they'll be safe," Billie said.

"Then we'll give them the two minutes," replied the corporal. "Cut loose at the bunch as soon as it is near enough."

"Then we'll give them two minutes," replied the corporal. "Open fire on the group as soon as they're close enough."

A moment later two rifles spoke out and then they turned loose their automatics, to give the impression of a much larger force.

A moment later, two rifles fired, and then they unleashed their automatic weapons, creating the impression of a much larger force.

Two men fell and a minute later two more, as the boys' Winchesters again spoke.

Two men fell, and a minute later, two more did as the boys' Winchesters fired again.

"Now for the horses!" cried Billie as the Mexicans threw themselves upon the ground.

"Now for the horses!" yelled Billie as the Mexicans dropped to the ground.

They sprang to their horses and dashed away[Pg 188] down the valley.

They jumped on their horses and raced down the valley.[Pg 188]

They were not discovered until they had cleared the shelter of the trees and then a volley was fired after them. The bullets sang all around them, but they escaped unhurt, and before another volley they were out of range.

They weren't spotted until they had left the cover of the trees, and then a volley was fired at them. The bullets whistled past, but they got away unharmed, and before another shot could be fired, they were out of range.

"It's a good thing for us that they have no cavalry," said Brooks as they sped along.

"It's a good thing for us that they don't have any cavalry," said Brooks as they sped along.

"Sure is," was the response, "and I hope they don't succeed in getting word ahead of us."

"Sure is," came the reply, "and I hope they don't manage to get the message out before us."

"We'll fix that," said Brooks. "We cross the railroad just at the foot of the hill and I'll climb up and cut the telegraph wires."

"We'll handle that," said Brooks. "We'll cross the railroad right at the bottom of the hill, and I'll go up and cut the telegraph wires."

"They may have sent word already."

"They might have already sent a message."

"Hardly. They may have tried to, but it's dollars to doughnuts that there was nobody at Joachin or Rio Blanco to receive it. The nearest night operator, I imagine, is at Piedras Negras."

"Not really. They might have attempted to, but it's a sure bet that there was no one at Joachin or Rio Blanco to take it. I guess the closest night operator is at Piedras Negras."

"They may send a force from there to head us off," suggested Billie.

"They might send a team from there to cut us off," Billie suggested.

"That's so; but I'm not sure whether Piedras Negras is held by the Carranza or the Huerta forces."

"That's true, but I'm not sure if Piedras Negras is controlled by the Carranza or the Huerta forces."

"It's a terrible mix-up, isn't it?" laughed Billie. "But I guess either side would be glad to get us."

"It's a crazy mix-up, isn't it?" laughed Billie. "But I guess either side would be happy to have us."

They had reached the tracks by this time and a couple of minutes later Brooks was up a pole and with the aid of his bayonet broke the wires.

They had made it to the tracks by this point, and a few minutes later, Brooks climbed up a pole and, using his bayonet, cut the wires.

"If it isn't too late, that'll hold 'em for a while,"[Pg 189] he remarked as he descended from the pole and mounted his horse.

"If it isn't too late, that should keep them busy for a bit,"[Pg 189] he said as he climbed down from the pole and got on his horse.

When they joined the main company, Billie told Mr. Black what they had done and repeated to him what Brooks had said.

When they got to the main office, Billie told Mr. Black what they had done and repeated what Brooks had said.

"I think he is right," said Mr. Black, "and my advice is that we should give Piedras Negras a wide berth."

"I think he’s right," Mr. Black said, "and my advice is that we should steer clear of Piedras Negras."

"We can't get too far away from the railroad," explained Billie, "or we shall miss Don and his company. They are coming out for just such an emergency."

"We can't stray too far from the railroad," Billie said, "or we'll miss Don and his crew. They're coming out for exactly this kind of situation."

They rode rapidly forward for a couple of hours and then, turning sharply off the highway, took to the woods which now grew dense all along the mountain sides.

They rode quickly for a couple of hours and then, turning sharply off the highway, entered the woods that were now thick all along the mountainsides.

About ten o'clock they stopped for breakfast and then all took a nap until the sun drew near the western horizon.

About ten o'clock, they stopped for breakfast and then all took a nap until the sun was close to the western horizon.

"We should reach our rendezvous with Don about dark," explained Billie, "and that would get us into Vera Cruz about daylight."

"We should meet up with Don around dusk," Billie explained, "and that would get us into Vera Cruz by morning."

As they approached the appointed spot, Billie and Adrian, ever on the alert, noticed almost as one that the place had a changed appearance and mentioned it to the others.

As Billie and Adrian neared the designated spot, both on high alert, they noticed almost simultaneously that the area looked different and pointed it out to the others.

"What do you mean?" asked the corporal.

"What do you mean?" the corporal asked.

"I can't exactly explain," was Adrian's reply, [Pg 190] "but my prairie training always warns me to go slow when I sense danger."

"I can't really explain," Adrian replied, [Pg 190] "but my training in the prairie always tells me to take it slow when I feel danger."

"A mighty good idea," muttered one of the troopers, an old campaigner who had seen service with Funston in the Philippines. "These are slippery chaps."

"A really good idea," muttered one of the troopers, an old veteran who had served with Funston in the Philippines. "These guys are slippery."

"If I could walk," was Adrian's comment, "I'd soon find out what is wrong; but you can't scout on horseback."

"If I could walk," Adrian said, "I'd quickly figure out what's wrong; but you can't scout from horseback."

The cavalcade came to a halt and the men examined their weapons to be sure they were in order.

The procession came to a stop, and the men checked their weapons to make sure they were ready.

"What do you think we'd better do, Ad?" queried Billie.

"What do you think we should do, Ad?" asked Billie.

"I don't know. How far are we from the rendezvous?"

"I don't know. How far are we from the meeting point?"

"Not more than half a mile."

"Not more than half a mile."

"If it were not for the possibility of making matters worse," suggested Adrian, "I'd fire a few shots; but of course what we want is to get into Vera Cruz without a fight. What do you think, Mr. Black?"

"If it weren’t for the chance of making things worse," Adrian suggested, "I’d fire a few shots; but what we really want is to get into Vera Cruz without a fight. What do you think, Mr. Black?"

"This is new business to me, boys," was the reply. "I'll have to leave it to you."

"This is all new to me, guys," was the reply. "I'll have to leave it up to you."

"What's the matter with my going on a scout?" asked Billie.

"What's wrong with me going on a scout?" asked Billie.

"Nothing the matter with your going," laughed Adrian, "but there might be with your coming back. No, I shall have to go, ankle or no ankle."

"There's nothing wrong with you going," Adrian laughed, "but there might be with you coming back. No, I really need to go, ankle or no ankle."

He slid from his horse, and almost before any [Pg 191] one realized what he was doing he had slipped away on his hands and knees.

He got off his horse, and almost before anyone noticed what he was doing, he crawled away on his hands and knees.

"He is certainly a brave boy," was Josie's remark, "and I hate to think of his taking all this risk on my account."

"He’s definitely a brave kid," Josie said, "and I really dislike the idea of him taking all these risks because of me."

"Not so much risk for him as for us, I'm thinking," muttered the old trooper. "They are looking for mounted men—if they're looking at all—and not for crawling boys."

"Not much risk for him, but more for us, I think," muttered the old trooper. "They're looking for mounted men—if they're looking at all—and not for crawling boys."

The old trooper was right, and ten minutes later Adrian returned to say that there was a small body of horsemen at the next turn of the road.

The old soldier was right, and ten minutes later Adrian came back to say that there was a small group of horsemen at the next bend in the road.

"Did you see anything of Don?" queried Billie.

"Did you see Don at all?" Billie asked.

"Not a sign."

"Not a signal."

"That's mighty funny. Where do you suppose he can be?"

"That's really funny. Where do you think he could be?"

"He may be hiding back in the woods, just as we are."

"He might be hiding back in the woods, just like we are."

"Well," said the corporal, "now that we know where the greasers are, what's the matter of going forward?"

"Well," said the corporal, "now that we know where the greasers are, what's the hold-up in moving ahead?"

"No matter at all," replied Adrian. "We can easily bear away to the left and give them the shake, but I don't know what to do about the others."

"No problem at all," replied Adrian. "We can easily shift to the left and lose them, but I’m not sure what to do about the others."

"The others will have to look out for themselves," replied Brooks. "They are able to do it."

"The others will have to take care of themselves," replied Brooks. "They can manage."

The words had hardly left his lips ere there came the sound of a single shot away to the left.

The words had barely left his lips when a single shot rang out to the left.

"There they are!" cried Billie. "Come on!"[Pg 192]

"There they are!" shouted Billie. "Let's go!"[Pg 192]

The little cavalcade started forward, but ere they had gone a dozen rods they could hear the sound of approaching horsemen, crashing through the woods to their right.

The small group set off, but before they had gone a dozen yards, they could hear the sound of horsemen coming through the woods to their right.

"The Mexicans!" said Adrian.

"The Mexicans!" Adrian said.

"To cover, every man!" cried the corporal.

"Everyone, get down!" shouted the corporal.

A minute later every horse lay flat on the ground with his rider concealed behind him.

A minute later, every horse was lying flat on the ground with its rider hidden behind it.


CHAPTER XXIII.

A DINNER AND ITS RESULT.

With a shout the Mexicans broke into the clearing which the Americans had just left. They were a motley crowd, not much like the cavalry that forms such a great part of Uncle Sam's army.

With a shout, the Mexicans burst into the clearing that the Americans had just left. They were a mixed group, not much like the cavalry that makes up a big part of Uncle Sam's army.

"It seems a shame to hurt them," muttered the corporal. "They look as though they would run if you said boo!"

"It feels wrong to hurt them," muttered the corporal. "They seem like they'd run away if you just said boo!"

Seeing no one, the Mexicans, some twenty or twenty-five in number, came to a halt and their leaders held a council of war.

Seeing no one, the Mexicans, around twenty or twenty-five of them, stopped, and their leaders held a war council.

The Americans, a couple of rods back in the woods, partly concealed by the trees and partly by the deepening twilight, watched them silently.

The Americans, a short distance back in the woods, partially hidden by the trees and the fading light, observed them in silence.

After a couple of minutes' confab, the captain of the band gave an order which the boys could [Pg 193] not hear and a couple of Mexicans dismounted and began carefully to examine the ground. They were looking for the prints of horses' hoofs.

After a brief chat, the band leader gave an order that the boys couldn't hear, and a couple of Mexicans got off their horses and started to carefully inspect the ground. They were searching for horseshoe prints.

"Aqui'sta!" exclaimed one of the men on foot, pointing to the ground.

"Hey there!" shouted one of the men on foot, pointing to the ground.

The captain drew near and leaned over from his horse to see more clearly.

The captain rode closer and leaned down from his horse to get a better look.

He was evidently satisfied, for he straightened up and gave another command and the two horsemen sprang to their saddles.

He was clearly satisfied, so he straightened up and gave another command, and the two riders jumped into their saddles.

Another command and every man's sabre flashed in the air.

Another command and every man's saber flashed in the air.

Raising his own sabre aloft, the captain was about to give another command, when there was the sound of a single shot from the rear and the captain's sabre went flying from his hand, struck by a rifle ball.

Raising his own saber high, the captain was about to give another command when a single gunshot rang out from behind him, and the captain's saber flew out of his hand, hit by a bullet.

"Carramba!" he cried. "Emboscado!" meaning "an ambush," and putting spurs to his horse he turned and fled in the direction from which he had come, followed by the entire band, while the Americans fired a volley into the air.

"Dang!" he shouted. "It's an ambush!" He spurred his horse and turned to flee back the way he had come, with the whole group chasing after him, while the Americans fired a volley into the air.

"They'll never stop running," laughed the corporal, "until they reach home—wherever that is."

"They'll never stop running," laughed the corporal, "until they get home—wherever that is."

"And in the meantime we'll get out of here," said Mr. Black.

"And in the meantime, we'll get out of here," said Mr. Black.

The men sprang to their feet and to their horses. At the same moment there came from the woods to the left the well-known whistle of the Broncho Rider Boys.

The men jumped up and got on their horses. At the same time, they heard the familiar whistle of the Broncho Rider Boys coming from the woods to the left.

"It's Don!" cried Billie, as he gave the answering[Pg 194] call, and an instant later Donald came into view through the trees, closely followed by half a score of Uncle Sam's troopers.

"It's Don!" shouted Billie as he picked up the call, and a moment later, Donald appeared through the trees, closely followed by about twenty of Uncle Sam's soldiers.

"Just too late," said Adrian.

"Just too late," Adrian said.

"Too late for what?" queried Donald.

"Too late for what?" Donald asked.

"To see a masterly retreat," and in a few words he told Donald what had occurred.

"To witness a skillful retreat," he said, and in just a few words, he explained to Donald what had happened.

"Well," was the rejoinder, "I am glad no blood was shed. But who fired the shot from the rear?"

"Well," was the reply, "I’m glad no blood was shed. But who fired the shot from behind?"

"I," came a voice, and out of the shadows appeared a figure which had a most familiar appearance. "If you don't recognize me," he continued, "you may recognize Ambrosio."

"I," came a voice, and out of the shadows emerged a figure that looked very familiar. "If you don't recognize me," he continued, "you might recognize Ambrosio."

"By George!" exclaimed Billie, "if it isn't our old friend Strong. Where on earth did you come from?"

"Wow!" Billie exclaimed, "if it isn't our old friend Strong. Where on earth did you come from?"

"I suppose I might ask you the same thing," was the laughing reply. "Briefly, I am on my way to Vera Cruz. I heard there was a band of American brigands out in the mountains and I thought I might fall in with them."

"I guess I could ask you the same thing," came the laughing response. "To put it simply, I’m headed to Vera Cruz. I heard there’s a group of American bandits in the mountains, and I thought I might join them."

"So that's what they call us, is it?" said Billie. "I never expected to be called a brigand."

"So that's what they call us, huh?" said Billie. "I never thought I'd be called a thief."

"Strange things happen to men who travel," declared Strong facetiously; "but you'd better be going. There are some good troops in this section and they are on the lookout."

"Strange things happen to guys who travel," Strong said with a chuckle; "but you should get going. There are some good troops in this area, and they're keeping an eye out."

"Good advice," muttered the old trooper. "This ain't no pleasure excursion."

"Good advice," muttered the old soldier. "This isn't a pleasure trip."

"Sorry we haven't a horse for you," said Adrian[Pg 195] to Strong, "but I guess you are used to walking."

"Sorry we don't have a horse for you," Adrian[Pg 195] said to Strong, "but I figure you're used to walking."

"A good deal more so than riding. But, if one of you don't mind giving Ambrosio a lift, it will help some."

"A lot more than just riding. But if one of you doesn't mind giving Ambrosio a ride, it would help a bit."

Several expressed their willingness to take the ape on behind, but he would go to no one but Billie.

Several people offered to take the monkey behind, but he would only go with Billie.

"All right, old man," laughed the boy; "but no funny business," and he broke off a twig and shook it at Ambrosio. "You see this."

"Okay, old man," the boy laughed; "but no funny stuff," and he snapped off a twig and waved it at Ambrosio. "You see this."

Now that the two companies had united, they broke away from the railroad and made a bee line toward Vera Cruz, arriving in sight of the city at daybreak.

Now that the two companies had joined forces, they broke away from the railroad and headed straight for Vera Cruz, arriving in sight of the city at dawn.

"Here's where we part company with the troopers," explained Donald. "We six and Ambrosio will ride into town together and the boys will come in as they wish. There must be no suggestion of a military expedition."

"Here's where we go our separate ways from the soldiers," Donald explained. "The six of us and Ambrosio will ride into town together, and the guys can come in whenever they want. We can't give any hint that this is a military operation."

"I see," said Mr. Black, "and I want to thank you all for your kindness to my daughter and to me. That is about all I can do now. Perhaps some day I can do more."

"I understand," said Mr. Black, "and I want to thank all of you for being so kind to my daughter and to me. That's about all I can do for now. Maybe someday I'll be able to do more."

"That's enough," muttered the old trooper, "unless you can get us all sent back home. I can't see any use of keeping us here."

"That's enough," grumbled the old soldier, "unless you can get us all sent back home. I don't see any point in keeping us here."

"That's all right, old man," laughed the corporal. "You know you would not go home if you could."

"That's cool, buddy," laughed the corporal. "You know you wouldn't go home even if you could."

"Better not give me a chance," was the grumbling[Pg 196] reply, as the trooper bit off a big piece of tobacco and tucked it away in his cheek.

"Better not give me a chance," was the grumbling[Pg 196] reply, as the trooper bit off a big piece of tobacco and tucked it in his cheek.

Reveille was just sounding when the boys, accompanied by their three friends and Ambrosio, perched upon Billie's horse, drew up in front of Lieut. Grant's quarters. They had been recognized and passed through the lines, and as the men caught sight of them they were given a hearty cheer.

Reveille was just going off when the boys, along with their three friends and Ambrosio, sitting on Billie's horse, stopped in front of Lieut. Grant's quarters. They had been recognized and made it through the lines, and when the men saw them, they gave a loud cheer.

"You seem to have made friends," laughed the lieutenant as he greeted them, "and there is every reason why you should. The general will be glad to see you and hear your report. I have no doubt you have a good story to tell, and he likes a good story."

"You seem to have made some friends," laughed the lieutenant as he greeted them, "and there's every reason for that. The general will be happy to see you and hear your report. I’m sure you have an interesting story to tell, and he loves a good story."

When the boys reached home they found the gate still locked, although it was now considerably past the time when the household was astir. Their knock was answered by the portero, who, in response to a question by Billie, said that Santiago was seriously ill and had been for thirty-six hours.

When the boys got home, they found the gate still locked, even though it was well past the time when the household was usually awake. Their knock was answered by the portero, who, in reply to a question from Billie, said that Santiago was seriously ill and had been for thirty-six hours.

"What is the matter?" asked Donald.

"What's happening?" asked Donald.

"Fever."

"Fever."

"I am not surprised," declared Adrian. "The strange thoughts he has been thinking so many days were bound to result in something serious."

"I’m not surprised," Adrian said. "The weird thoughts he’s been having for so many days were bound to lead to something serious."

"Perhaps it is not convenient for us to remain here," said Mr. Black. "We can, I am sure, find some other place."

"Maybe it's not a good idea for us to stay here," Mr. Black said. "I'm sure we can find another place."

But at this moment Lucia appeared at the head [Pg 197] of the stairs. When made acquainted with Mr. Black's words she would not hear of his taking Josie to any other house and gave orders for making her perfectly at home. The only one who did not remain was Strong.

But at that moment, Lucia showed up at the top of the stairs. When she heard what Mr. Black said, she insisted that he couldn't take Josie to any other house and instructed that she be made completely comfortable. The only one who didn't stay was Strong.

"I'll come back this evening," he said. "I have a strange story to tell you boys and I may need your help in locating a man I am most anxious to find."

"I'll be back this evening," he said. "I have a weird story to share with you guys, and I might need your help in finding a man I'm really eager to locate."

But he did not come back that evening, and when he did come the next night the boys were not there, having been invited to dine with Gen. Funston. Had things not happened thus, a part of this story could never have been written, for it was while dining with the general that the boys were given a duty to perform, which was the most arduous of all their adventures in the land of the Montezumas.

But he didn’t return that evening, and when he finally showed up the next night, the boys were gone, having been invited to have dinner with Gen. Funston. If things hadn’t played out this way, part of this story could never have been told, because it was during dinner with the general that the boys were assigned a task, which turned out to be the toughest of all their adventures in the land of the Montezumas.

And this was the manner of it.

And this is how it happened.

They were just finishing dinner and Billie was congratulating himself that he had had his fill of good American cooking, when an aide announced that a Mexican gentleman, Don Esteban Mendoza, craved an immediate audience with Gen. Funston.

They were just wrapping up dinner, and Billie was feeling proud that he had enjoyed a hearty meal of good American food when an aide announced that a Mexican gentleman, Don Esteban Mendoza, urgently wanted to speak with Gen. Funston.

"I am sure you young gentlemen will excuse me a few minutes," said the general, "as Don Esteban is one of the prominent bankers of the city and I know his business must be of importance."

"I’m sure you young men will forgive me for a few minutes," said the general, "since Don Esteban is one of the leading bankers in the city and I know his business must be important."

The boys were glad to accept the proffered excuse and the general withdrew, leaving them in the [Pg 198] company of several members of his staff, to whom they briefly related their recent adventure. When they told of the "ambush" there was much amusement.

The boys were happy to take the offered excuse, and the general left, leaving them in the [Pg 198] company of a few staff members, to whom they briefly shared their recent adventure. When they talked about the "ambush," it caused a lot of laughter.

In the midst of their conversation the general returned accompanied by Don Esteban.

In the middle of their conversation, the general returned with Don Esteban.

"These are the young gentlemen to whom I referred," explained the general, introducing the boys. "They are typical Americans and, being civilians and speaking Spanish fluently, will be just the ones to help you in your trouble."

"These are the young men I mentioned," the general explained as he introduced the boys. "They're typical Americans and, since they're civilians and speak Spanish fluently, they'll be perfect to help you with your issue."

Then to the boys: "Don Esteban has a very delicate mission for which he asks the assistance of Americans. He wished me to detail three young officers for the work, but this I do not feel I can do, as it is strictly a private mission. If you feel that you can undertake it, he will be glad to explain it to you."

Then to the guys: "Don Esteban has a very sensitive mission and is asking for help from Americans. He wanted me to assign three young officers to this task, but I don’t think I can do that since it’s a strictly private mission. If you think you can take it on, he’d be happy to explain it to you."

"Anything that you recommend, General, we shall be glad to undertake," replied Donald, acting as spokesman for the trio.

"Anything you suggest, General, we'll be happy to take on," replied Donald, speaking for the three of them.

"Then I shall turn you over to Don Esteban, and as his business is pressing, I will excuse you if you wish to accompany him home."

"Then I'll hand you over to Don Esteban, and since he has important business, I'll understand if you want to go home with him."

"A thousand thanks, General," said Don Esteban effusively. Then to the boys: "My automobile is at the door. If you will take seats in it, we shall be speedily at my house. You will pardon me if I speak nothing but Spanish, as I know very little [Pg 199] English, although"—with an expressive glance at Gen. Funston—"I hope to know it better."

"A thousand thanks, General," Don Esteban said gratefully. Then to the boys: "My car is at the door. If you all take a seat, we’ll quickly get to my house. Please excuse me for only speaking Spanish, as I know very little [Pg 199] English, although"—with a meaningful look at Gen. Funston—"I hope to learn it better."

Following Don Esteban, they were soon speeding through the streets and five minutes later entered a handsome patio.

Following Don Esteban, they quickly raced through the streets, and five minutes later, they arrived at a beautiful courtyard.

"This is my house," said Don Esteban. "Be pleased to consider it your own. Now, if you will follow me to the library, I will explain the mission I wish you to undertake."

"This is my house," Don Esteban said. "Feel free to think of it as your own. Now, if you’ll follow me to the library, I’ll explain the mission I want you to take on."

The boys followed without a word, but as they passed up the stairs Billie muttered under his breath:

The boys followed in silence, but as they went up the stairs, Billie whispered under his breath:

"Did you notice, boys, that this house backs right up against Santiago's?"

"Did you guys notice that this house is right behind Santiago's?"


CHAPTER XXIV.

DON ESTEBAN'S STRANGE LOSS.

"Before I explain to you the mission I wish you to undertake," said Don Esteban, "I must narrate briefly a story that has been handed down from the days of Montezuma. It is to the effect that when the Spanish conqueror, Cortez, was about to capture the City of Mexico, most of the treasure of the Aztecs was sunk in the lake, which at that time covered a portion of the Mexican plateau.

"Before I explain the mission I want you to take on," said Don Esteban, "I need to briefly share a story that’s been passed down since the days of Montezuma. It goes that when the Spanish conqueror, Cortez, was about to seize the City of Mexico, most of the Aztec treasure was sunk in the lake that then covered part of the Mexican plateau."

"A part of this treasure is said to have been recovered, but the mine from which the gold of [Pg 200] Montezuma was taken has never been discovered, although search has been made for upward of five hundred years. Some have supposed that the mine was adjacent to the City of Mexico and that it was flooded at the time the treasure was sunk in the lake. Others have thought it was located in the state of Michoacan, while still others have believed it located in the vicinity of Mt. Orizaba.

"A portion of this treasure is said to have been found, but the mine where Montezuma's gold came from has never been located, despite over five hundred years of searching. Some believe the mine was near Mexico City and was flooded when the treasure sank in the lake. Others think it was in the state of Michoacan, while some believe it was around Mt. Orizaba."

"My reason for telling you this is that some years ago a strange appearing man came to our bank and made a large deposit of money, all in gold. He did not deposit it all at once, but brought it in a few thousand dollars at a time until it amounted to more than a million dollars. Then he disappeared and we have never seen him since."

"My reason for sharing this with you is that several years ago, a strange-looking man came to our bank and made a large deposit of money, all in gold. He didn’t deposit it all at once but brought in a few thousand dollars at a time until it added up to over a million dollars. Then he vanished, and we’ve never seen him again."

"And has he never called for any of the money?" asked Billie.

"And has he never asked for any of the money?" asked Billie.

"Not in person, although he has drawn upon it at frequent intervals. The name under which it was deposited is James Moon."

"Not in person, though he's referred to it often. The name it was filed under is James Moon."

"An American?" asked Donald.

"An American?" Donald asked.

"I could not say whether he was an American or an Englishman. We took him for the latter. But now I am coming to the real part of the story.

"I couldn't say if he was American or English. We assumed he was the latter. But now I'm getting to the important part of the story."

"In addition to the money which he deposited, he also left with us a small brass-bound box, in which he said there were valuable papers. He gave orders that it should be delivered to no one but himself in person, or until the expiration of ten years. The ten years will be up in a few days[Pg 201] and this afternoon I bethought me of the box. But when I went into the vault in which it has been kept for so many years, the place upon an upper shelf, where it has always stood, was vacant. The box was gone!"

"In addition to the money he deposited, he also left us a small brass-bound box, which he said contained valuable documents. He instructed that it should only be given to him in person or after ten years have passed. Those ten years are almost up in a few days[Pg 201], and this afternoon I remembered the box. But when I went into the vault where it has been kept for so many years, the spot on the upper shelf where it has always been was empty. The box was gone!"

"Gone?" exclaimed all the boys in unison. "Do you mean stolen?"

"Gone?" the boys all exclaimed together. "Are you saying it was stolen?"

"So it would appear."

"Looks like it."

"How could it have been done?" asked Adrian.

"How could it have happened?" asked Adrian.

"I cannot say; but the strange thing about the whole matter is that in place of the box, there lay upon the shelf an envelope—yellow with age, upon which was written in ink that had scarcely faded the words: 'Montezuma's Mine.'"

"I can't say; but the weird thing about the whole situation is that instead of the box, there was an envelope on the shelf—yellowed with age, on which the words 'Montezuma's Mine' were written in ink that had barely faded."

"Well, what do you think of that?" queried Billie, looking at the others in amazement.

"Well, what do you think of that?" Billie asked, looking at the others in disbelief.

"I don't think," laughed Adrian. "It's up to you to do the thinking."

"I don't think so," laughed Adrian. "It's your job to do the thinking."

"Is there no clue whatever?" asked Donald.

"Is there no clue at all?" asked Donald.

"Not that could be really called a clue. The only suspicious thing that has happened to-day at all, was that a mountebank came into our bank——"

"Not that it could really be called a clue. The only suspicious thing that happened today at all was that a charlatan came into our bank——"

"A mountebank!" from all.

"A con artist!" from all.

"Yes."

Yes.

"Did he have an ape with him?"

"Did he have a monkey with him?"

"No! He was quite alone. He did not come in to make merry, but to get a bill changed. While he was there he was observed to scrutinize the place very closely."

"No! He was completely alone. He didn't come in to have fun but to get a bill exchanged. While he was there, he was seen examining the place very closely."

"But he did not go into your vault?"[Pg 202]

"But he didn't go into your vault?"[Pg 202]

"No! He took his change and went peaceably out."

"No! He took his change and left quietly."

"Then, why should you suspect him?" insisted Donald, casting a knowing glance at the other boys.

"Then, why should you doubt him?" insisted Donald, giving a knowing look to the other boys.

"Because, an hour later, he came in again and said that one of the bills we gave him as change was a counterfeit."

"Because, an hour later, he came back in and said that one of the bills we gave him as change was fake."

"Was it?"

"Really?"

"No, it was not, although it was an old issue. The teller who waited upon him had no recollection of ever having seen the bill before, but rather than have a scene, we gave him another bill for it."

"No, it wasn't, even though it was an old issue. The teller who assisted him didn’t remember ever seeing the bill before, but to avoid a scene, we gave him another bill for it."

"How large a bill was it?" asked Adrian.

"How much was the bill?" Adrian asked.

"Only a peso"—that is a dollar—"and it seemed hardly worth talking about; but you'd have thought it was a hundred."

"Only a peso"—that's a dollar—"and it hardly seemed worth mentioning; but you’d think it was a hundred."

"Perhaps it seemed a large amount to him," ventured Billie.

"Maybe it seemed like a lot to him," Billie suggested.

"Perhaps," admitted Don Esteban. "But be that as it may, I should like to see the man again, and especially would I like to know where he got that old dollar."

"Maybe," Don Esteban admitted. "But regardless, I’d like to see that man again, and I’m especially curious about where he got that old dollar."

"Why?"

"Why?"

"Because it may have come out of that box."

"Because it might have come out of that box."

"Well, yes," said Donald, with a shake of his head, "it might have; but how could the mountebank have gotten the box?"

"Well, yeah," said Donald, shaking his head, "it might have; but how could the scam artist have gotten the box?"

"That is the mystery," was Don Esteban's reply.

"That's the mystery," Don Esteban replied.

"And how do you wish us to help you?" asked[Pg 203] Adrian.

"And how do you want us to help you?" asked[Pg 203] Adrian.

"Why," explained the banker, "I asked Gen. Funston to find the mountebank for me. He said you boys would do better than any one else."

"Why," the banker explained, "I asked Gen. Funston to help me find the con artist. He said you guys would do better than anyone else."

"But why us? Why not a Mexican policeman?"

"But why us? Why not a Mexican cop?"

"Because the mountebank was an American. He may even have been a soldier and have hidden himself among your men."

"Because the con artist was American. He might have been a soldier and could have blended in with your troops."

"Oh, he was an American, was he?" laughed Donald. "Then I believe we can put our finger on him with ease. But the man we have in mind always carried with him an ape."

"Oh, he was an American, huh?" laughed Donald. "Then I think we can pin him down easily. But the guy we're thinking of always had an ape with him."

"Then it may not be the same," replied Don Esteban, "for this one had no ape with him either time."

"Then it might not be the same," replied Don Esteban, "because this one didn't have an ape with him either time."

"It certainly does look like a mystery," was Adrian's comment. "Where is the vault from which the box was taken?"

"It definitely looks like a mystery," Adrian said. "Where's the vault the box was taken from?"

"On the other side of the patio."

"On the other side of the patio."

"May we examine it?"

"Can we take a look?"

"Certainly. I'll show it to you now."

"Sure. I'll show it to you right now."

Don Esteban led the way downstairs and across the patio. Opening the rear door of the bank, he escorted them within and closed the door.

Don Esteban guided them down the stairs and through the patio. He opened the back door of the bank, ushered them inside, and shut the door.

Passing behind the counter, he opened the iron door of the vault, disclosing within a good-sized chamber, in the rear of which was set the great steel safe, locked with a time lock.

Passing behind the counter, he opened the iron door of the vault, revealing a spacious room, at the back of which was the large steel safe, secured with a time lock.

"There," explained Don Esteban, pointing to[Pg 204] an upper shelf, "is where the box stood."

"There," explained Don Esteban, pointing to[Pg 204] an upper shelf, "is where the box was."

"Oh, it was not a large box, then!" said Adrian.

"Oh, it wasn't a big box, then!" said Adrian.

"Oh, no! Not more than eight or nine inches cube."

"Oh, no! Not more than eight or nine inches on each side."

The boy examined the vault carefully by the light of a gas jet.

The boy carefully examined the vault by the light of a gas lamp.

"There seems no way that any one could have entered except by the door," said Donald.

"There doesn't seem to be any way for anyone to have gotten in except through the door," said Donald.

"None whatever!"

"Not at all!"

"You are sure there is no opening in the ceiling?"

"You’re sure there’s no opening in the ceiling?"

"Absolutely."

"Definitely."

Don Esteban led the boys out and locked the door of the vault.

Don Esteban took the boys outside and locked the vault door.

"Well," declared Donald as they came out into the patio after finishing their inspection, not only of the vault but of the rest of the office, "I guess we had better go home and study over the matter a little. I should not be surprised if we could put our hands upon the mountebank with very little trouble; but I feel sure he had nothing to do with the disappearance of the box."

"Well," said Donald as they stepped out onto the patio after finishing their inspection, not just of the vault but of the entire office, "I guess we should head home and think this over a bit. I wouldn't be surprised if we could catch the fraud pretty easily; but I'm convinced he had nothing to do with the box going missing."

"I wish I could feel that way," said Adrian after they were out of hearing of Don Esteban. "I have never quite trusted Strong. There is something strange about him."

"I wish I could feel that way," Adrian said after they were out of earshot of Don Esteban. "I've never really trusted Strong. There's something off about him."

"Yes, he is a bit queer; but how on earth could he have stolen the box if he did not even go behind the counter?"

"Yeah, he's a bit odd; but how could he have stolen the box if he didn't even go behind the counter?"

"He couldn't; but still I mistrust him."[Pg 205]

"He couldn't; but I still don't trust him."[Pg 205]

"I wonder where Ambrosio was all this time?" mused Billie.

"I wonder where Ambrosio has been all this time?" Billie thought.

"Tied up at home, most likely. An American among Americans would hardly feel like traveling around with a hand organ and a monkey," was Don's emphatic reply.

"Tied up at home, most likely. An American among Americans wouldn’t really feel like going around with a hand organ and a monkey," was Don's emphatic reply.

Upon arriving at Santiago's residence they were told that Strong had been there earlier in the evening and seemed much disappointed at not finding them at home.

Upon arriving at Santiago's place, they were told that Strong had been there earlier in the evening and seemed really disappointed not to find them at home.

"Did he leave any word?" asked Billie of the portero.

"Did he leave any message?" Billie asked the doorman.

"None, señor; but Donna Lucia would like to see you in the library."

"None, sir; but Donna Lucia wants to see you in the library."

"What is the matter? Is Santiago worse?"

"What’s the problem? Is Santiago doing worse?"

"No, señor. He is sleeping quietly. I could not say what she wants, but she seemed considerably disturbed."

"No, sir. He's sleeping peacefully. I can't say what she wants, but she seemed pretty upset."

"Better go up alone, Billie," said Donald. "If we are needed, you can call us. We'll wait here in the patio for a few minutes before we turn in."

"Better go up alone, Billie," Donald said. "If you need us, you can call. We'll hang out here in the patio for a few minutes before we head to bed."

Billie ran up the stairs and tapped at the library door. He was immediately admitted by Lucia and the door was closed behind him.

Billie ran up the stairs and knocked on the library door. Lucia let him in right away, and the door closed behind him.

"It is getting to be a good deal of a family affair," laughed Adrian.

"It's turning into quite a family affair," laughed Adrian.

"Yes," replied Donald, with a grin. "I wonder where Josie and Mr. Black are?"

"Yeah," replied Donald with a grin. "I wonder where Josie and Mr. Black are?"

Adrian colored.

Adrian is coloring.

"I don't know why you should have thought of[Pg 206] them!"

"I don’t know why you would think of[Pg 206] them!"

"Oh," replied Donald nonchalantly, "speaking of family affairs naturally reminded me that you——"

"Oh," replied Donald casually, "talking about family matters just made me think of you——"

"Oh, Don!" came Billie's voice, breaking in upon the conversation.

"Oh, Don!" Billie exclaimed, interrupting the conversation.

"Yes. What is it?"

"Yeah. What's up?"

"Come up here, the both of you! Quick!"

"Come up here, you two! Hurry!"

The boys ran up the stairs two steps at a time.

The boys raced up the stairs, taking two steps at a time.

"In here," and Billie held the library door open. "I've something I want to show you."

"In here," Billie said, holding the library door open. "I have something I want to show you."

He led the way to the table, and there, under the glow of the lamp, stood a brass-bound box about eight or nine inches cube.

He walked ahead to the table, and there, under the light of the lamp, was a brass-bound box that was about eight or nine inches in size.


CHAPTER XXV.

DONALD IS KIDNAPED.

"Great Scott!" was the spontaneous exclamation of both the newcomers. "Where did it come from?"

"Wow!" was the spontaneous exclamation of both the newcomers. "Where did it come from?"

"You tell," replied Billie. "Lucia says it was not here an hour ago. Neither has any one been in the room so far as she knows."

"You tell," Billie replied. "Lucia says it wasn't here an hour ago. No one has been in the room as far as she knows."

"Has she been here all the time?" asked Adrian.

"Has she been here this whole time?" asked Adrian.

"No, she was with Josie in her room for a time; but the door into the patio was locked."

"No, she was in her room with Josie for a bit; but the door to the patio was locked."

"Some one might have come in through the window."[Pg 207]

"Someone could have come in through the window."[Pg 207]

"A fat chance, isn't there!" laughed Billie, pointing to the only window in the room which was protected with long and heavy iron bars, set so closely together that a child would have had trouble in squeezing through—much less a man.

"A slim chance, right?" laughed Billie, pointing to the only window in the room, which was secured with long, heavy iron bars placed so closely together that even a child would struggle to squeeze through—let alone a man.

"Does look a little difficult," replied Adrian.

"Looks a bit challenging," Adrian replied.

"Worse than difficult. Impossible," was Donald's comment.

"Worse than difficult. Impossible," was Donald's comment.

"Did you hear any noise?" asked Billie of Lucia.

"Did you hear any noise?" Billie asked Lucia.

"None whatever."

"Not at all."

"And you have never seen the box before?"

"And you've never seen the box before?"

Lucia wrinkled her brows and thought deeply.

Lucia frowned and thought deeply.

"Do you know," she finally said, "I have a sort of a dim recollection that, away back in my childhood somewhere, I have seen it or one just like it."

"Do you know," she finally said, "I have a vague memory that, way back in my childhood, I saw this or one just like it."

"Away back in your childhood," laughed Donald, "couldn't have been so very far, Señorita."

"A long time ago in your childhood," Donald laughed, "it couldn’t have been that far, Miss."

Lucia made a little grimace.

Lucia made a slight grimace.

"I'm nearly seventeen," she said.

"I'm almost seventeen," she said.

"Botheration!" said Billie. "We are not here to discuss ages, but to find out how this box came here. I have no doubt that Lucia has seen many similar boxes in her time."

"Botheration!" Billie exclaimed. "We're not here to talk about ages, but to figure out how this box got here. I'm sure Lucia has seen a lot of similar boxes in her day."

"Well," asked Donald, somewhat nettled, "what do you propose to do?"

"Well," asked Donald, a bit annoyed, "what do you plan to do?"

"In the first place, I want to search the house."

"In the first place, I want to search the house."

"That's a good idea," declared Adrian. "Donna[Pg 208] Lucia, will you lead the way?"

"That's a great idea," said Adrian. "Donna[Pg 208] Lucia, will you take the lead?"

"Certainly. Right this way; but don't go into father's room. I know there is no one in there. One of the servants has been with him every minute of the time."

"Sure. This way; but please don’t go into Dad’s room. I know there's no one in there. One of the staff has been with him the whole time."

Headed by Lucia, the boys explored the house from top to bottom, but not a sign of any one could they find. So far as they could determine, the box must have come in of its own self.

Led by Lucia, the boys searched the house from top to bottom, but they couldn't find any trace of anyone. As far as they could tell, the box must have appeared on its own.

"I'll tell you one thing we can and must do," said Billie, after they had returned to the library. "We must keep a watch in this room to-night. Whoever put the box here may return."

"I'll tell you one thing we can and need to do," said Billie, after they got back to the library. "We have to keep an eye on this room tonight. Whoever put the box here might come back."

"Right!" from Don. "You do have occasional lucid intervals, Billie."

"Right!" Don said. "You do have some clear moments now and then, Billie."

Billie grinned, but made no reply.

Billie smiled but didn’t say anything.

"I think we may all stay here for a few hours," suggested Lucia. "Father is so much better that I think we may have a little music. I will play some accompaniments on the guitar and Josie can sing."

"I think we can all stick around here for a few hours," suggested Lucia. "Dad is doing so much better that I think we can have a little music. I'll play some accompaniments on the guitar and Josie can sing."

"That will seem a good deal like being back in the States," declared Adrian. "With the Stars and Stripes flying over my head, a brigade of American troops on guard and an American girl singing, I can almost forget I am on Mexican soil."

"That will feel a lot like being back in the States," Adrian said. "With the Stars and Stripes waving above me, a brigade of American troops on guard, and an American girl singing, I can almost forget I’m on Mexican soil."

"How about the accompanist?" queried Billie.

"How about the accompanist?" asked Billie.

"Oh!" laughed Adrian, "we're quite willing to adopt her. Hey, Donald?"

"Oh!" laughed Adrian, "we're totally up for adopting her. Right, Donald?"

"Don't ask me, Ad. Ask Billie."[Pg 209]

"Don't ask me, Ad. Ask Billie."[Pg 209]

"I am sure we could do no better," was Billie's gallant reply.

"I’m sure we couldn’t do any better," was Billie’s brave response.

Lucia's suggestion was carried out and for a couple of hours there was a merry little party under Santiago's hospitable roof. Even the mysterious box was forgotten and the young people were giving themselves up to a jolly good time, when suddenly there came a scream which caused every one to turn their eyes toward the room in which the sick man was supposed to be lying.

Lucia's suggestion was put into action, and for a couple of hours, there was a cheerful little party under Santiago's welcoming roof. Even the mysterious box was forgotten, and the young people were having a great time when suddenly a scream erupted, causing everyone to turn their attention toward the room where the sick man was thought to be lying.

But there in the doorway he stood, his long night robe reaching nearly to the floor and his thin black hair standing almost on end.

But there in the doorway he stood, his long night robe nearly touching the floor and his thin black hair sticking up almost on end.

"Father!" cried Lucia, rushing toward him "What is it?"

"Father!" Lucia shouted, running toward him. "What’s wrong?"

He waved her off, but made no reply, while with his long bony finger he pointed at the brass-bound box.

He waved her away but didn’t say anything, while pointing at the brass-bound box with his long, bony finger.

"Where did it come from?" he asked in a shrill, querulous tone. "Who brought back my secret casket?"

"Where did it come from?" he asked in a high-pitched, complaining tone. "Who brought back my secret box?"

"Yours?" came from every one in the room.

"Yours?" came from everyone in the room.

"Yes! Mine! Mine!!" he almost screamed.

"Yes! It's mine! Mine!!" he almost shouted.

"He's raving!" cried Josie. "Can't some one do something for him?"

"He's going crazy!" shouted Josie. "Can't someone do something for him?"

"No," he replied, and his voice became more calm, "I am not raving. I know whereof I speak. Quick! Let me look within it to see that all is safe."

"No," he replied, and his voice became calmer, "I'm not losing it. I know what I'm talking about. Quick! Let me check inside to make sure everything is okay."

"It is locked, Father," said Lucia, coming to his[Pg 210] side, "and we have no key."

"It’s locked, Dad," said Lucia, coming to his[Pg 210] side, "and we don’t have a key."

"I can unlock it," he cried. "I can unlock it. Give it to me. Give it to me."

"I can unlock it," he shouted. "I can unlock it. Give it to me. Give it to me."

He staggered forward and seized the box in his hands. For several seconds he fumbled with it, turning it first upon one side and then upon another, and at last raised the lid. He thrust in his hand and then stopped as one stupefied.

He stumbled forward and grabbed the box in his hands. For several seconds, he struggled with it, turning it from one side to another, and finally lifted the lid. He reached in with his hand and then paused, as if in shock.

"Empty! Empty!" he gasped in an almost audible whisper. "The plan of Montezuma's mine is gone! Gone!!"

"Empty! Empty!" he gasped in a barely audible whisper. "The blueprint of Montezuma's mine is gone! Gone!!"

A moment he stood and gazed around upon the faces of those in the room and then collapsed upon the floor.

A moment later, he stood and looked around at the faces of everyone in the room, then fell to the floor.

Quickly the boys picked him up and carried him to his bed and the attending physician was summoned.

Quickly, the boys picked him up and carried him to his bed, and the doctor was called.

Billie picked up the box and examined it curiously.

Billie picked up the box and looked at it with interest.

"I wonder how he opened it?" he mused. "There must be some sort of a spring somewhere."

"I wonder how he opened it?" he thought. "There has to be some kind of spring somewhere."

He felt the box all over, but could find nothing. Then he closed it and set it upon the table. A moment later Donald picked it up and tried to open it, but it was locked fast.

He checked the box thoroughly but found nothing. Then he closed it and placed it on the table. A moment later, Donald picked it up and tried to open it, but it was securely locked.

"Nothing but mysteries," he said. "I'm getting tired of them. But before anything else happens, I'm going around and notify Don Esteban that the box is here."

"Just mysteries," he said. "I'm really getting tired of them. But before anything else happens, I’m going to let Don Esteban know that the box is here."

"I'll go with you," said Adrian.[Pg 211]

"I'll go with you," Adrian said.[Pg 211]

"No, you'd better stay here. I'll take a mozo with me."

"No, you should stay here. I'll take a helper with me."

He ran hastily down the stairs and a minute later the boys heard the gate close behind him.

He quickly ran down the stairs, and a minute later, the boys heard the gate shut behind him.

"I guess this is the quickest way," thought Donald as he gained the sidewalk. "I'll not bother with a mozo. With American soldiers on guard and my automatic in my pocket, I have nothing to fear."

"I guess this is the fastest way," thought Donald as he stepped onto the sidewalk. "I won't bother with a bellboy. With American soldiers on duty and my gun in my pocket, I have nothing to worry about."

A couple of minutes later he was ringing the bell at Don Esteban's house. He was hastily admitted and at once conducted to that gentleman's presence, where he narrated hastily what had occurred at the other house.

A few minutes later, he was ringing the doorbell at Don Esteban's house. He was quickly let in and immediately taken to see the gentleman, where he hurriedly explained what had happened at the other house.

"Who is this old man?" Don Esteban asked of Donald.

"Who is this old guy?" Don Esteban asked Donald.

Donald explained as best he could.

Donald explained as clearly as he could.

"Which is mighty little," he declared when he had finished. "He is the greatest mystery we have ever encountered. There is no doubt that he is an Indian, but he speaks English like an Englishman."

"That's pretty minimal," he said after he was done. "He's the biggest mystery we've ever faced. There's no doubt he's Indian, but he speaks English like a native."

"I must go and see him at once," declared Don Esteban, rising.

"I need to go see him right now," Don Esteban said as he stood up.

"I don't think you can, sir, to-night. I don't think the physician would permit it."

"I don't think you can tonight, sir. I don't think the doctor would allow it."

"Well, then, the first thing in the morning. I thank you, young sir. Won't you have a glass of wine before you go?"

"Well, then, the first thing in the morning. Thank you, young man. Would you like a glass of wine before you leave?"

"No, I think not," replied Donald. "I've never[Pg 212] acquired that Mexican habit yet. Good night, sir."

"No, I don't think so," replied Donald. "I haven't picked up that Mexican habit yet. Good night, sir."

He left the house feeling greatly relieved that he had reported the finding of the box and walked slowly along whistling merrily. As he turned off the street upon which Don Esteban lived he heard soft footsteps behind him and turned hastily.

He left the house feeling really relieved that he had reported finding the box and walked slowly, whistling happily. As he turned off the street where Don Esteban lived, he heard soft footsteps behind him and turned quickly.

But he was too late.

But he arrived too late.

Before he could see who it was, or ere he could cry out, a cloak was thrown over his head and he was picked up and carried away bodily.

Before he could see who it was, or before he could shout, a cloak was thrown over his head and he was picked up and carried away.

Donald was not the boy to give in without a struggle, but kick and squirm as he might, he could not free himself. Presently those who were carrying him stopped and laid him on the sidewalk. Then he heard a knock and a gate opened. Then he was lifted up again and, almost before he knew it, he was thrust into a little room—a closet it seemed—and the door closed upon him.

Donald wasn't the kind of kid to give up without a fight, but no matter how much he kicked and squirmed, he couldn't break free. Soon, the people carrying him stopped and set him down on the sidewalk. Then he heard a knock, and a gate opened. Before he knew it, he was picked up again and, almost instantly, shoved into a small room—it looked like a closet—and the door shut behind him.

It was a hot night and the little place was stifling.

It was a hot night and the small space was suffocating.

"I'll smother if I don't get out of this," he muttered.

"I'll suffocate if I don't get out of this," he muttered.

Slowly he unwrapped the cloak from about his head and at last freed himself completely from its folds; but he secured little relief from the heat.

Slowly, he took off the cloak from around his head and finally freed himself completely from its folds; but he found little relief from the heat.

The room could not have been more than six feet square and it did not take Donald long to run his hand clear around the wall.

The room was probably no more than six feet square, and it didn't take Donald long to run his hand all the way around the wall.

There was only one door, that through which he had been thrust, and it was locked. He pounded [Pg 213] upon it, but to no avail. Then he sat down to think.

There was only one door, the one he had been pushed through, and it was locked. He banged on it, but it was no use. Then he sat down to think.

"There is certainly no use to sweat myself to death," he told himself. "I'd better be as quiet as I can. There is air enough coming under the door so I won't suffocate, so I might just as well wait and see what will turn up."

"There’s really no point in exhausting myself," he thought. "I should just stay as quiet as possible. There’s enough air coming under the door, so I won’t suffocate, so I might as well wait and see what happens."

He ran his hand all over his automatic and found it in good shape. Then he leaned back against the wall opposite the door and waited. Ten minutes later the door was suddenly yanked open, another figure was bundled into the closet and the door slammed shut, almost before Donald could think.

He ran his hand over his gun and found it in good condition. Then he leaned back against the wall opposite the door and waited. Ten minutes later, the door was suddenly flung open, another person was shoved into the closet, and the door slammed shut, almost before Donald could react.


CHAPTER XXVI.

A PLOT AGAINST FUNSTON.

A muttered imprecation was the only intimation that the figure which had been so unceremoniously bundled into the closet was alive.

A whispered curse was the only hint that the figure which had been so rudely shoved into the closet was still alive.

"Who are you?" asked Donald in Spanish.

"¿Quién eres tú?" preguntó Donald en español.

"Let me out of this," was the unsatisfactory response in English.

"Let me out of this," was the frustrating response in English.

"Oh!" from Donald. "You are an American. Well, keep still and I'll help you to get rid of the blanket."

"Oh!" Donald exclaimed. "You're an American. Just stay still and I'll help you get the blanket off."

He grabbed hold of the covering and the newcomer was soon uncovered.

He pulled back the covering, and soon the newcomer was revealed.

"Now, then, who are you?" asked Donald again.[Pg 214]

"Alright, so who are you?" Donald asked again.[Pg 214]

"I'll show you who I am if I get hold of you," was the uncivil answer, and an arm shot out.

"I'll show you who I am if I get my hands on you," was the rude response, and an arm reached out.

"Now look here," said Donald, "if you don't stop that I'll let daylight through you. We are in a bad box and the only thing to do is to make the best of it."

"Listen up," Donald said, "if you don't cut that out, I'm going to take you down. We're in a tough spot, and the only thing we can do is make the most of it."

"We?" exclaimed the newcomer. "Why do you say we?"

"We?" exclaimed the newcomer. "Why do you say 'we'?"

"Because I am a prisoner the same as you are. Now, who are you?"

"Because I'm a prisoner just like you. So, who are you?"

"I'm Lieutenant Grimes of the general's staff. Who are you?"

"I'm Lieutenant Grimes from the general's staff. Who are you?"

"I am Donald Mackay, on a special mission for Gen. Funston."

"I’m Donald Mackay, on a special mission for Gen. Funston."

"How did they get you?"

"How did they get you?"

"Kidnaped me on the street. How did they get you?"

"Someone grabbed me on the street. How did they catch you?"

"Same way. I had just left the general's quarters."

"Same here. I had just left the general's quarters."

"I can see that some one might want to capture you, lieutenant, but I cannot see what they want of me."

"I can understand why someone would want to capture you, lieutenant, but I can’t figure out what they want from me."

"How long have you been here?" asked the lieutenant.

"How long have you been here?" the lieutenant asked.

"About half an hour. By the way, are you armed?"

"About half an hour. By the way, are you armed?"

"No; they took away my weapons. How about you?"

"Nope; they took my weapons away. What about you?"

"I have my automatic. I'd have used it when [Pg 215] you came in, only you were dumped in so suddenly."

"I have my gun. I would have used it when [Pg 215] you came in, but you were dropped in so unexpectedly."

"What do you suppose the game is?"

"What do you think the game is?"

"I don't know; but we'll find out. I've been in tighter places than this—but no hotter," after a pause.

"I don't know, but we'll figure it out. I've been in tougher situations than this—but never this intense," after a pause.

"Have you tried to get out?"

"Have you tried to get away?"

"Yes; but it was too hot work. The door seemed pretty strong."

"Yeah; but it was really hard work. The door felt pretty solid."

"Perhaps the two of us might force it," suggested Grimes. "I'm a pretty husky chap."

"Maybe the two of us can make it happen," suggested Grimes. "I'm a pretty big guy."

"We might try," replied Donald. "The place is so narrow we can get a good brace."

"We could give it a shot," replied Donald. "The spot is so tight we can get a solid grip."

They put their feet against the opposite wall and pushed against the door.

They pressed their feet against the opposite wall and pushed against the door.

"We'll never make it that way," said the lieutenant. "We'll have to throw ourselves at it."

"We're not going to make it like this," said the lieutenant. "We're going to have to go all in."

"Not much room for that, Lieutenant, but you give the word and we'll have a try."

"Not a lot of space for that, Lieutenant, but you say the word and we'll give it a shot."

Getting their bearings as well as they could in the dark, they drew themselves back and then literally threw themselves at the door. It gave way with a snap and both fell to their feet on the outside.

Getting their bearings as best they could in the dark, they stepped back and then literally threw themselves at the door. It snapped open, and both tumbled to their feet outside.

Quick as a flash they were on their feet, Donald with his weapon ready for instant action.

Quick as a flash, they were on their feet, Donald with his weapon ready for immediate action.

But there was no one in sight.

But there was no one around.

"That's mighty funny!" exclaimed the lieutenant. "Lock two strong men up in a place like that and not guard it."

"That's really funny!" the lieutenant exclaimed. "You lock two strong guys up in a place like that and don't even watch it."

"It's a mighty good thing for us they didn't,"[Pg 216] laughed Donald. "I wonder where we are?"

"It's a really good thing for us they didn't,"[Pg 216] laughed Donald. "I wonder where we are?"

He glanced about the room which was dimly lighted by a couple of lamps, fastened to the wall by brackets. It was well—yes, elegantly furnished. At one side of the room was the closet out of which they had just emerged, while at the opposite side were three doors. On a third side were two windows and the fourth side was a plain wall.

He looked around the room, dimly lit by a couple of wall-mounted lamps. It was well—no, elegantly furnished. On one side of the room was the closet they had just come out of, while on the opposite side were three doors. There were two windows on one side, and the fourth side was just a plain wall.

"Not a bad-looking place," observed the lieutenant.

"Pretty nice place," the lieutenant commented.

"Not at all," echoed Donald, "and there seem plenty of means of exit."

"Not at all," Donald replied, "and there seem to be plenty of ways out."

"Sure, my boy; and if it's all the same to you, we'll go. The sooner I get back the quicker I'll be able to start something in this direction. Come on!"

"Sure, kid; and if you're okay with it, we'll go. The sooner I get back, the faster I'll be able to get started on something in this direction. Let’s go!"

They crossed over to the doors and tried the first one. It was locked. They tried the second and it opened into another closet.

They walked over to the doors and tried the first one. It was locked. They tried the second, and it opened into another closet.

"Three times and out," laughed Donald as he took hold of the knob of the last door.

"Three strikes and you're out," laughed Donald as he grabbed the doorknob to the last door.

It yielded to his touch and he opened it gently. Then he quickly and quietly closed it.

It gave way to his touch, and he opened it carefully. Then he swiftly and quietly closed it again.

"What's up?" asked the lieutenant.

"What's up?" asked the lieutenant.

Donald put his fingers to his lips.

Donald placed his fingers on his lips.

"How many?" queried Lieut. Grimes.

"How many?" asked Lieut. Grimes.

"Three," was the whispered response. "Let's hear what they have to say."

"Three," was the whispered reply. "Let's hear what they have to say."

He opened the door a crack, through which they [Pg 217] could see three men seated at a table. One wore the uniform of a Mexican officer, the other was dressed in Mexican costume, while the third was unquestionably an American, although they could only see his back.

He opened the door a little, through which they [Pg 217] could see three men sitting at a table. One was wearing a Mexican officer's uniform, the second was dressed in traditional Mexican attire, while the third was definitely American, even though they could only see his back.

"I have carried out my part of the agreement," the American was saying, "and now I want my money."

"I've done my part of the deal," the American was saying, "and now I want my money."

"How do we know you have?" asked the officer.

"How do we know you have?" asked the officer.

"Haven't I put Gen. Funston into your hands?"

"Haven't I given you Gen. Funston?"

"We are not sure it is Funston," said the other.

"We're not sure it's Funston," said the other.

"Then bring him out and look at him. You know the general when you see him, don't you?"

"Then bring him out and take a look at him. You can recognize the general when you see him, right?"

"I think so, although I've never seen him but once."

"I believe so, but I've only seen him once."

"Well, that is he, all right," declared the American.

"Well, that's him for sure," said the American.

Donald turned and looked at his companion. Then he chuckled.

Donald turned and looked at his friend. Then he laughed.

The lieutenant said nothing, but stroked his whiskers which he wore in exact imitation of his chief.

The lieutenant said nothing but stroked his beard, which he wore just like his boss.

"Lucky for the general," he whispered, and Donald nodded his head that he understood.

"Lucky for the general," he whispered, and Donald nodded his head in agreement.

The two Mexicans exchanged a few words under their breath which Donald could not hear and then the officer took from his breast pocket a large wallet, from which he counted out ten bank notes. They were yellow backs and Donald was not at all surprised when the officer said:

The two Mexicans muttered a few words softly that Donald couldn't hear, and then the officer pulled out a large wallet from his breast pocket and counted out ten banknotes. They were yellowbacks, and Donald wasn't surprised at all when the officer said:

"Here are ten one-thousand-dollar bills in American [Pg 218] money. We believe you are telling us the truth, as your words are corroborated by the men who brought him here. But if you are playing us false, we shall know how to reach you."

"Here are ten one-thousand-dollar bills in American [Pg 218] currency. We trust that you're being honest, as your story is supported by the men who brought him here. But if you’re deceiving us, we’ll know how to find you."

The American shrugged his shoulders as he took the bills, rolled them up nonchalantly and placed them in his trousers pocket.

The American shrugged as he took the bills, rolled them up casually, and put them in his pants pocket.

"You can find me at the Hidalgo Hotel whenever you want me," he said, "and now I must be going."

"You can find me at the Hidalgo Hotel whenever you need me," he said, "and now I have to go."

He arose from his seat, and as he did so, Donald caught sight of his face. It was the mountebank, Strong, but in his stylish clothing Don had failed to recognize him.

He got up from his seat, and as he did, Donald noticed his face. It was the con artist, Strong, but in his trendy clothes, Don hadn’t recognized him.

"Great Scott!" he muttered to himself, "the plot thickens!"

"Wow!" he muttered to himself, "the plot is getting complicated!"

"What's that?" queried the lieutenant, who caught the muttered exclamation.

"What's that?" asked the lieutenant, who heard the muffled exclamation.

"Nothing much," replied Donald as the three men walked toward a door in the farther end of the room and he was enabled to speak without being heard, "only that is the man I'm looking for. Let's get out of the window and see if we can't head him off."

"Not much," replied Donald as the three men walked toward a door at the far end of the room, allowing him to speak without being overheard, "just that he’s the guy I’m looking for. Let’s climb out the window and see if we can catch him."

He closed the door and turned the key which he had quietly taken from the other side.

He shut the door and locked it with the key he had quietly taken from the other side.

The windows were open and they looked out. They were on the side of the house overlooking a good-sized lawn.

The windows were open and they looked out. They were on the side of the house overlooking a decent-sized lawn.

"That's the reason they are not barred," explained [Pg 219] Donald. "Had they been front windows, we might as well have been in jail. You go first and I'll cover the retreat."

"That's why they aren't blocked," Donald explained. "[Pg 219] You go ahead, and I'll watch our backs."

Lieut. Grimes sprang into the window and lowered himself to the ground, just as a hand turned the knob.

Lieut. Grimes jumped through the window and dropped down to the ground, just as someone turned the knob.

"Good-bye!" muttered Donald. "Sorry I can't wait to receive you," and he followed the lieutenant.

"Goodbye!" muttered Donald. "Sorry I can't wait to see you," and he followed the lieutenant.

On the ground they could hear the men trying to open the door and as they sped across the lawn toward a high brick wall, the door gave way with a crash and they could hear surprised voices.

On the ground, they could hear the men trying to open the door, and as they hurried across the lawn toward a tall brick wall, the door burst open with a crash, and they heard startled voices.

"They have discovered our wreckage!" cried Donald. "Over the wall you go!"

"They found our wreck!" shouted Donald. "Get over the wall now!"

"You first this time," said the lieutenant.

"You go first this time," said the lieutenant.

"No, you first. I can boost you up, but I couldn't pull you. You can pull me."

"No, you go first. I can lift you up, but I can't pull you. You can pull me."

The argument was good and the lieutenant acted upon it.

The argument was solid, and the lieutenant followed through on it.

A minute later he was on top of the wall.

A minute later, he was on top of the wall.

"Great Cæsar!" he exclaimed. "There's nothing under me but water."

"Great Caesar!" he shouted. "There's nothing beneath me but water."

"Never mind that," was the response. "Haul me up."

"Forget that," was the reply. "Pull me up."

The lieutenant leaned down and gave the lad a hand.

The lieutenant bent down and helped the kid up.

"Here we are," he said a minute later. "We can't jump in, for there is no knowing where we are."

"Here we are," he said a minute later. "We can't just jump in because we have no idea where we are."

"Sure," from Donald. "Let's run along the[Pg 220] wall."

"Sure," said Donald. "Let's run along the[Pg 220] wall."

This they did for about a hundred yards and then the wall ended abruptly against what appeared to be an abutment.

This they did for about a hundred yards and then the wall ended suddenly against what looked like a support.

"We must act quickly," declared Donald. "They think you are Funston and won't hurt you. Keep up the deception. I'm going to swim for it. I'll have help here just as quick as I can. So long," and, throwing off his coat, he jumped into the water some twenty feet below.

"We need to move fast," Donald said. "They think you're Funston and won't harm you. Keep up the act. I'm going to make a run for it. I'll get help here as quickly as I can. Goodbye," and with that, he threw off his coat and jumped into the water about twenty feet below.


CHAPTER XXVII.

THE ADMIRAL TO THE RESCUE.

When Donald struck the water he allowed himself to go clear to the bottom, as he wanted to find out just about how deep it was.

When Donald hit the water, he let himself sink all the way to the bottom because he wanted to check how deep it was.

It was, as he had expected, about the depth of the water in the harbor and he made up his mind that he could not be far from some of the wharves that constitute the water front.

It was, as he had expected, about the depth of the water in the harbor, and he decided that he couldn't be far from some of the wharves that make up the waterfront.

When he came to the surface, he struck out away from the wall, and by the light of the moon was soon able to see the vessels in the offing. He could also see that he was well north of the principal docks.

When he surfaced, he swam away from the wall, and by the moonlight, he was soon able to see the ships in the distance. He could also tell that he was far north of the main docks.

"I guess I'll land at the first place that offers," [Pg 221] he thought, "and find my way to headquarters from there."

"I guess I'll stop at the first place that offers," [Pg 221] he thought, "and figure out how to get to headquarters from there."

He struck out lustily, but had not been swimming more than a couple of minutes, when he heard the sharp exhaust of a gasoline launch.

He started swimming energetically, but hadn't been in the water for more than a couple of minutes when he heard the loud sound of a gasoline-powered boat.

Realizing that it must be an American craft, he shouted at the top of his voice.

Realizing that it must be an American craft, he shouted at the top of his lungs.

At first there was no response, but as the boat came nearer and he shouted even more loudly, a friendly hail came over the waters.

At first, there was no reply, but as the boat got closer and he yelled even louder, a friendly greeting rang out across the water.

"Where are you?" came the voice as the boat came to a stop.

"Where are you?" came the voice as the boat came to a stop.

"Here, to your port side," he replied.

"Over here, to your left," he replied.

The launch was started again slowly and Donald was soon able to make himself visible.

The launch started up again slowly, and Donald soon became visible.

"Who are you?" was the first question pumped at him by the officer in command.

"Who are you?" was the first question thrown at him by the officer in charge.

"Special messenger for Gen. Funston," was the response.

"Special messenger for Gen. Funston," was the response.

"Where is your uniform?"

"Where’s your uniform?"

"I'm not a soldier. I am a civilian."

"I'm not a soldier. I'm just a civilian."

"A likely story," snapped the officer, who chanced to be an ensign.

"A likely story," snapped the officer, who happened to be an ensign.

"I can't help how likely it is," snapped Donald in return. "It's true, and I want to be put ashore as quickly as possible. I have an important message and the safety of one of his staff is involved. There is also a plot on foot to capture the general himself."

"I can't control how likely it is," Donald shot back. "It's true, and I need to be dropped off as soon as possible. I have an important message, and one of his staff's safety is at stake. There's also a plan in motion to capture the general himself."

"Nonsense! And besides, I can't put you ashore.[Pg 222] I am carrying a message to Admiral Fletcher."

"Nonsense! And anyway, I can't drop you off.[Pg 222] I'm taking a message to Admiral Fletcher."

"But my business is important," insisted Donald.

"But my business is important," Donald insisted.

"So is mine," declared the ensign.

"So is mine," said the ensign.

He ordered his launch full speed ahead in the direction of the flagship.

He commanded his boat to go full speed ahead toward the flagship.

"It's pretty tough," commented Donald, "but I'll prove I am right when I get to the ship."

"It's really tough," Donald said, "but I'll show I'm right when I get to the ship."

"I hope so," was the reply. "I haven't anything against you and you may be telling the truth, but I can't take any chances."

"I hope so," was the reply. "I don't have anything against you, and you might be telling the truth, but I can't take any risks."

Fifteen minutes later they drew up beside the flagship.

Fifteen minutes later, they pulled up next to the flagship.

"Up you go," said the ensign, motioning Donald up the ladder. "I'll present you to the officer of the deck," which he quickly did.

"Up you go," said the ensign, gesturing for Donald to climb the ladder. "I'll introduce you to the officer on deck," which he quickly did.

"Here's a man I picked up in the water, sir, who says he has a message for Gen. Funston, but I had no time to put him ashore."

"Here's a guy I pulled out of the water, sir, who says he has a message for Gen. Funston, but I didn't have time to drop him off."

"Looks more like a boy than a man," replied the officer. Then to Donald: "What's this about you having a message for Gen. Funston?"

"Looks more like a boy than a man," replied the officer. Then to Donald: "What's this about you having a message for General Funston?"

Donald repeated what he had told the ensign.

Donald repeated what he had told the officer.

"What's that?" asked another officer, coming forward out of the shadow of the after turret.

"What's that?" asked another officer, stepping out from the shadow of the after turret.

The first officer saluted.

The first officer saluted.

"Tell the Admiral your story, my lad," he said.

"Tell the Admiral your story, buddy," he said.

Again Donald repeated his story, this time going more into detail.

Again, Donald told his story, this time providing more details.

"Come with me," ordered the Admiral, and he[Pg 223] led the way to the wireless operator.

"Come with me," the Admiral commanded, and he[Pg 223] led the way to the radio operator.

"Get into communication with Gen. Funston at once," was the admiral's order.

"Contact Gen. Funston right away," was the admiral's command.

"Here he is, sir," was the report a couple of minutes later.

"Here he is, sir," came the report a few minutes later.

"Ask him if he has three American boys on a special mission."

"Ask him if he has three American guys on a special mission."

The answer came back promptly that he had.

The answer came back quickly that he had.

"Ask him if Lieut. Grimes is missing."

"Ask him if Lieutenant Grimes is missing."

Again came back the answer that he was.

Again came back the answer that he was.

"Tell the general that we have one of the lads on the Arkansas, and that he has had a strange adventure. Tell him I will send the lad ashore immediately."

"Tell the general that we have one of the guys on the Arkansas, and he’s had a weird adventure. Let him know I’ll send the guy ashore right away."

"Thank you, sir," said Donald. "I knew some one would know what to do."

"Thank you, sir," Donald said. "I knew someone would know what to do."

"You're a brave lad," was the Admiral's comment, "and I shall be glad to hear the end of the adventure. You and your companions must come out and dine with us as soon as your mission is ended."

"You're a brave guy," the Admiral said, "and I’ll be happy to hear the end of the adventure. You and your friends should come out and have dinner with us as soon as your mission is over."

Donald thanked him for his kindness and hastened to the launch which was to take him back.

Donald thanked him for his kindness and hurried to the boat that would take him back.

Twenty minutes later he stood before Gen. Funston.

Twenty minutes later, he stood in front of Gen. Funston.

"You seem to have been in the water," was the general's first words.

"You look like you've been in the water," were the general's first words.

"Yes, sir," laughed Donald. "I jumped from a [Pg 224] wall north of town, leaving Lieut. Grimes on top of it."

"Absolutely," laughed Donald. "I leaped from a [Pg 224] wall north of town, leaving Lieut. Grimes up there."

"What! Lieut. Grimes on top of a wall? How did he get there?"

"What! Lieutenant Grimes on top of a wall? How did he get up there?"

"He was kidnapped, sir! It was a case of mistaken identity!"

"He was kidnapped, sir! It was a case of mistaken identity!"

"Mistaken identity! I don't understand!"

"Identity crisis! I don't get it!"

"They took him for you, sir, because his beard is trimmed like yours."

"They thought he was you, sir, because his beard is styled like yours."

The general smiled grimly.

The general smiled tightly.

"Think I shall have all my staff officers do the same," he commented. Then more seriously: "Can you lead us to the house?"

" I think I'll have all my staff officers do the same," he said. Then, more seriously: "Can you take us to the house?"

"I'm not sure about the house; but I can take you to the stone wall from which I jumped. That ought to guide us to the house."

"I'm not sure about the house, but I can take you to the stone wall I jumped from. That should lead us to the house."

"Right," said the general.

"Correct," said the general.

He called another member of his staff and gave a few brief orders.

He called another staff member and gave a few quick instructions.

In another ten minutes two launches loaded with regulars and armed with a rapid-fire gun in each, steamed swiftly up the harbor.

In another ten minutes, two boats filled with regulars and equipped with a rapid-fire gun each sped quickly up the harbor.

"There's the wall!" exclaimed Donald a few minutes later, "and there's where I jumped," pointing to a spot near the abutment.

"There's the wall!" Donald shouted a few minutes later, "and that's where I jumped," pointing to a spot near the abutment.

The officer in command headed the boats for the shore.

The officer in charge led the boats to the shore.

"It is not only a question of freeing Lieut. Grimes," said the officer, "but we also want to capture [Pg 225] the conspirators. This is a much more serious matter than Gen. Funston is willing to admit."

"It’s not just about rescuing Lieut. Grimes," said the officer, "but we also need to catch the conspirators. This is a far more serious issue than Gen. Funston is ready to acknowledge."

"Then if you will take my suggestion, sir," said Donald modestly, "I would let a few soldiers go over the wall as well as entering the front of the house."

"Then if you’ll take my suggestion, sir," said Donald modestly, "I would let a few soldiers go over the wall in addition to entering the front of the house."

The officer looked up twenty feet. The wall was absolutely perpendicular and as smooth as the side of a house.

The officer looked up twenty feet. The wall was perfectly straight and as smooth as the side of a house.

"I'm afraid none of my men can scale it," he said.

"I'm afraid none of my guys can climb it," he said.

"Can't we throw a grapnel over it, sir?"

"Can't we throw a grappling hook over it, sir?"

"We might; but it would be a very slight hold."

"We might, but it would be a very weak grip."

"If you can make it hold at all," laughed Donald, "I'm willing to make the effort. At best I can only fall back into the water."

"If you can even make it stay," laughed Donald, "I'm ready to give it a shot. At most, I can just fall back into the water."

"True," declared the officer. "We'll try it."

"That's true," said the officer. "We'll give it a shot."

A grapnel was tied to a long line, such as is used in tying the launch to the shore, and after several vain attempts the grapnel caught in the top of the wall.

A grappling hook was attached to a long rope, like the kind used to tie a boat to the shore, and after several failed attempts, the grappling hook finally snagged the top of the wall.

Donald sprang forward and tested it with his weight and it held. Then, without another word, he braced his feet against the wall and in almost less time than it takes to write it, he was at the top.

Donald jumped forward and put his weight on it, and it supported him. Then, without saying anything else, he pressed his feet against the wall and, in what felt like no time at all, he reached the top.

"Do you see any one?" asked the officer from below.

"Do you see anyone?" asked the officer from below.

"No, sir; but there is the sound of pacing footsteps [Pg 226] on the walk that runs along the side of the house."

"No, sir; but I can hear the sound of footsteps pacing [Pg 226] on the path next to the house."

"Good! Now make fast the grapnel and we will see if there are a dozen men here who can climb to the top."

"Great! Now secure the grappling hook and let's see if there are a dozen guys here who can climb to the top."

The dozen were quickly found and they were soon at the top of the wall. The officer finally decided to add to their armament one of the rapid-firers.

The twelve were quickly located, and they soon reached the top of the wall. The officer ultimately decided to enhance their weapons by adding one of the rapid-fire guns.

"If there is any resistance," he said, "we'll knock the side of the house in."

"If there's any resistance," he said, "we'll take the side of the house down."

"What shall I do?" asked Donald.

"What should I do?" Donald asked.

"You'd better come back into the boat. You can help us to enter the house in front."

"You should get back in the boat. You can help us get into the house ahead."

Donald slid down the rope and the expedition quickly made a landing. Silently, so as not to alarm those within the house, the men took their way to the front of the mansion, which was at once recognized as one of the finest in Vera Cruz.

Donald slid down the rope, and the team quickly landed. Quietly, to avoid alerting anyone inside the house, the men made their way to the front of the mansion, which was immediately recognized as one of the finest in Vera Cruz.

"Do you know who lives here?" asked the officer.

"Do you know who lives here?" the officer asked.

"No, sir," replied Donald.

"No, sir," Donald replied.

"I was told it was the residence of one of Huerta's generals," said a soldier. "It was pointed out to me the first day we landed."

"I was told this was the home of one of Huerta's generals," said a soldier. "They showed it to me the first day we arrived."

"Good!" from the officer. "I shall now have no compunction about entering the place."

"Good!" said the officer. "I won't feel any hesitation about going in now."

With Donald and a couple of soldiers, the officer approached the door and gave a vigorous knock.

With Donald and a few soldiers, the officer walked up to the door and knocked loudly.

There was no response and he knocked again.

There was no reply, so he knocked again.

"Who is there?" finally came a voice, evidently a mozo.

"Who’s there?" finally came a voice, clearly a servant.

"An American officer. Open the door in the[Pg 227] name of the law."

"An American officer. Open the door in the[Pg 227] name of the law."

There was a still further delay and then another voice asked: "How do we know it is an officer?"

There was another delay, and then another voice asked, "How do we know it's an officer?"

"Open and find out, before I force the door."

"Open up and let me know, before I kick the door down."

There was a still further delay.

There was another hold-up.

"It's a good thing we guarded the rear," said Donald. "They are evidently trying to gain time to spirit Lieut. Grimes away, thinking it is Gen. Funston."

"It's a good thing we kept an eye on the back," Donald said. "They're clearly trying to buy time to get Lieutenant Grimes out of here, thinking he's General Funston."

"True," said the officer. "We'll wait no longer. Corporal, force the door!"

"Absolutely," said the officer. "We're not waiting any longer. Corporal, break down the door!"

The corporal placed a small stick of dynamite under the door and fixed a fuse.

The corporal put a small stick of dynamite under the door and set up a fuse.

"Step back a little," he said.

"Take a step back," he said.

All obeyed, when at the instant the door was thrown open and a hand, in which was an automatic revolver, was thrust out, directly in the face of the officer.

All complied, when suddenly the door flew open and a hand, holding an automatic gun, was thrust out right in the officer's face.

But quick as was the action, Donald was not taken off his guard.

But as quick as the action was, Donald wasn't caught off guard.

With a single swift blow he struck the weapon into the air.

With one quick swing, he sent the weapon flying into the air.

At the same instant a fusillade from the rear of the house gave evidence that the men stationed upon the wall had done their work.

At the same moment, gunfire from behind the house indicated that the men on the wall had completed their task.


[Pg 228]

CHAPTER XXVIII.

BILLIE MAKES A DISCOVERY.

Having released Lieut. Grimes and taken the plotters into custody, the next task was to locate Strong, the mountebank, and to solve the mystery of the box.

Having released Lieutenant Grimes and taken the plotters into custody, the next task was to find Strong, the fraud, and to unravel the mystery of the box.

Outside the one exclamation which Donald had uttered when he recognized Strong as the third of the plotters, he had not betrayed his secret to any one, and when Lieut. Grimes told his story to Gen. Funston and described the American, Donald vouchsafed no information which might help to apprehend him.

Outside of the one exclamation Donald let out when he realized Strong was one of the conspirators, he hadn't revealed his secret to anyone. When Lieutenant Grimes recounted his story to General Funston and described the American, Donald didn’t provide any details that could help capture him.

"The plotter told the Mexicans that he could be found at the Hidalgo Hotel whenever he was wanted," explained Lieut. Grimes. "While he may have lied about it, I think we should send a force and try to locate him."

"The informant told the Mexicans that he could be found at the Hidalgo Hotel whenever he was needed," explained Lieut. Grimes. "While he might have been lying about it, I think we should send a team and try to find him."

The advice was acted upon and a corporal and four soldiers sent to the hotel, but to no purpose. No such man was known there.

The advice was followed, and a corporal along with four soldiers was sent to the hotel, but it was pointless. No one there knew of such a man.

"What was the use of my saying anything about it?" asked Donald of the other two boys when he returned to Santiago's house and narrated to them the story of his evening's adventure. "I was sure he was not there and I have no idea where he [Pg 229] is; but we'll find him and the ten thousand dollars given him by the Mexicans for his treachery."

"What was the point of saying anything about it?" Donald asked the other two boys when he got back to Santiago's house and told them about his evening adventure. "I was sure he wasn't there, and I have no idea where he is; but we'll find him and the ten thousand dollars the Mexicans gave him for his betrayal."

"That's right, Don," was Billie's comment. "If you can get that money and I can get my ten thousand pounds, this trip won't be so bad."

"That's right, Don," Billie said. "If you can get that money and I can get my ten thousand pounds, this trip won't be so bad."

"In the meantime," said Adrian, "I propose that some of us go to bed. It's nearly two o'clock and there is mighty little chance that any one will try to steal the box again."

"In the meantime," Adrian said, "I suggest some of us head to bed. It's almost two o'clock, and there's not much chance anyone will try to steal the box again."

"I think you are right," said Billie. "We might as well all go. The doctor is still with Santiago and will stay until he is better. It isn't at all likely that any one will try to come into this room while he is here."

"I think you're right," said Billie. "We might as well all go. The doctor is still with Santiago and will stay until he gets better. It's really unlikely that anyone will try to come into this room while he's here."

Billie voiced the unanimous opinion, and a few minutes later the young people had all sought their beds, leaving instructions with the physician and the servants that they were to be called if any change for the worse occurred in Santiago's condition.

Billie expressed what everyone was thinking, and a few minutes later the young people had all gone to bed, leaving instructions with the doctor and the staff to call them if there was any change for the worse in Santiago's condition.

It was probably two hours later, just about daylight, that the entire household was awakened by a terrible shriek and one of the maids rushed out into the patio.

It was probably two hours later, just around dawn, that the whole house was stirred awake by a horrifying scream and one of the maids hurried out into the patio.

The boys came to their feet with a bound and hurried from their room on the ground floor, while the others appeared at the head of the stairs.

The boys jumped up and quickly left their room on the ground floor, while the others showed up at the top of the stairs.

"What is it?" asked Donald as soon as he could quiet the shrieking maid. "What are you yelling about?"

"What is it?" Donald asked as soon as he managed to calm the screaming maid. "What are you yelling about?"

"Oh, señor!" she cried. "I have seen the devil."

"Oh, sir!" she exclaimed. "I've seen the devil."

"Nonsense," laughed the boy. "You had a nightmare."[Pg 230]

"Nonsense," laughed the boy. "You had a bad dream."[Pg 230]

"No, señor. It was the devil. He had horns and a tail and he had the little box under his arm. I saw him!"

"No, sir. It was the devil. He had horns and a tail, and he was carrying a little box under his arm. I saw him!"

"The box!" cried Billie. "Quick, Lucia, look and see if the box is gone!"

"The box!" shouted Billie. "Hurry, Lucia, check to see if the box is gone!"

The girl rushed back into the library and she, too, gave a shriek.

The girl hurried back into the library and she, too, let out a scream.

"It's gone!" she cried. "It's gone!"

"It's gone!" she shouted. "It's gone!"

The boys sprang up the stairs three at a time and into the library. Lucia was right. The box was gone.

The boys jumped up the stairs three at a time and into the library. Lucia was right. The box was gone.

"It must be the old boy, sure enough," said Billie, "or at least one of his imps." Then to the maid: "How did he get in?"

"It has to be the old guy, for sure," said Billie, "or at least one of his little minions." Then to the maid: "How did he get in?"

"I don't know, señor. I only saw him go out. He went right through the door without opening it."

"I don't know, sir. I just saw him leave. He walked right through the door without opening it."

"Nonsense!" from Donald. "His Satanic majesty might go through a solid door, but the box wouldn't. There is some other explanation."

"Nonsense!" Donald said. "His Satanic majesty might get through a solid door, but the box wouldn't. There's got to be another explanation."

"But who could it be?" queried Lucia in great fear.

"But who could it be?" Lucia asked, scared out of her mind.

"Some one who knows the house," declared Adrian emphatically. "He may have put on some masquerade costume just to frighten these superstitious servants in case he was discovered."

"Someone who knows the house," Adrian said firmly. "He might have dressed up in a costume just to scare these superstitious servants if he was found out."

"I believe Ad is right," agreed Donald. "What do you think, Billie?"

"I think Ad is right," Donald agreed. "What do you think, Billie?"

"Maybe, Don; but I have a theory of my own.[Pg 231] If I am right, I can work it better if I tell no one."

"Maybe, Don; but I have my own theory.[Pg 231] If I'm correct, I can handle it better if I keep it to myself."

At this moment the physician entered the room.

At that moment, the doctor walked into the room.

"How is Santiago?" asked Donald.

"How's Santiago?" asked Donald.

"Better! He has gone to sleep, and if he is not disturbed, I expect him to be greatly improved when he awakens. I should not be surprised if this were the turning point in his illness."

"Better! He has gone to sleep, and if he isn’t disturbed, I expect he’ll be much better when he wakes up. I wouldn’t be surprised if this is the turning point in his illness."

"Then we had all better go down on to the first floor and leave him alone with his nurses."

"Then we should all head down to the first floor and give him some privacy with his nurses."

"I'd give a good deal to know where Strong is," remarked Donald as they were drinking their coffee an hour later.

"I'd pay a lot to know where Strong is," commented Donald as they sipped their coffee an hour later.

"So would I," declared Billie. "I believe, if we can find him, we can solve this entire mystery."

"So would I," said Billie. "I think that if we can find him, we can figure out this whole mystery."

"As soon as we finish our coffee," suggested Donald, "let's get busy and find him. He can't be far."

"As soon as we finish our coffee," suggested Donald, "let's get to work and find him. He can't be too far."

"That's right," said Adrian. "We'll round him up in short order. Hey, Billie?"

"That's right," said Adrian. "We'll track him down quickly. Hey, Billie?"

"We ought to; but I'll tell you what. You fellows go out and see if you can get a line on him, and I'll hang round the house to see that the devil doesn't come and steal the rest of the house."

"We should; but let me tell you something. You guys go out and see if you can find out where he is, and I'll stick around the house to make sure that trouble doesn't come and take the rest of it."

"Especially Lucia," laughed Donald.

"Especially Lucia," chuckled Donald.

"That's all right," was the good-natured reply; "but I have an idea that the devil and Strong may have something in common."

"That's fine," was the friendly response; "but I have a feeling that the devil and Strong might have something in common."

"You don't think it was Strong who came and took the box, do you?" queried Adrian.

"You don't think Strong came and took the box, do you?" Adrian asked.

"I don't know just what I do think, Ad; but [Pg 232] I'm going to do a little detective work and I want to give the impression that we are all out. When you fellows go out, don't say anything that would cause any one in hiding to think we are not all going out together. Do you sabe?"

"I’m not sure what I really think, Ad; but [Pg 232] I’m going to do some detective work and I want to make it seem like we’re all gone. When you guys leave, don’t say anything that would make anyone hiding think we’re not all leaving together. Got it?"

"Sure. I hope you'll get a clue if we do not."

"Sure. I hope you’ll figure it out if we don’t."

When the others had gone, Billie sat quietly in his room for a long time. He could easily have gone to sleep, as he had had only a couple of hours' rest, but he made up his mind that he would not be caught napping again if anything should happen.

When the others had left, Billie sat quietly in his room for a long time. He could have easily gone to sleep, having only gotten a couple of hours of rest, but he decided he wouldn’t let himself be caught napping again if something happened.

But nothing happened.

But nothing occurred.

The minutes passed into hours and it was rapidly nearing noon when Billie made up his mind that it was a bad job.

The minutes turned into hours, and it was quickly approaching noon when Billie decided that it was a lost cause.

"We had our chance at daylight," he muttered, "and now we will not get another. Whoever is after the box, has it and is not going to take any further chance of being caught."

"We had our chance to see the light of day," he muttered, "and now we won’t get another. Whoever is after the box has it and isn’t going to risk getting caught again."

He went out into the patio and looked up at the sun. It was almost in the zenith and the air was stifling.

He stepped out into the patio and looked up at the sun. It was nearly at its peak, and the air was oppressive.

"Any one would be a fool to go out at this time of day," he mused. "I wonder where the fellows are?"

"Anyone would be crazy to go out at this time of day," he thought. "I wonder where the guys are?"

He stepped back under the shade of the arcade that extended clear around the patio and threw himself onto a stone seat.

He stepped back into the shade of the arcade that wrapped around the patio and dropped onto a stone seat.

"Queer old place," he thought, "and a queer old seat."

"Strange old place," he thought, "and a strange old seat."

He laid his hand on one of the carved arms and[Pg 233] mechanically toyed with an eagle's head that formed one of the decorations. To his surprise the head turned in his hand.

He placed his hand on one of the carved arms and[Pg 233] absentmindedly fiddled with an eagle's head that was part of the decoration. To his surprise, the head turned in his hand.

"I hope I haven't broken it," he said as he examined it more closely.

"I hope I didn't break it," he said as he looked at it more closely.

It was clearly made to revolve and so he turned it clear around, when of a sudden the arm of the seat fell apart and the bottom collapsed, disclosing to Billie's astonished eyes a pair of stairs.

It was clearly designed to spin, so he turned it all the way around, when suddenly the arm of the seat fell off and the bottom gave way, revealing a set of stairs to Billie's shocked eyes.

Almost thrown to the pavement by the giving way of the seat, Billie picked himself up and looked about to see if he were observed.

Almost thrown to the pavement by the seat collapsing, Billie got back up and looked around to see if anyone had seen him.

There was no one in sight and he stooped down and examined the stairs carefully. Then he straightened up and rubbed his chin as a sudden gleam of intelligence passed through his brain.

There was no one around, so he bent down and looked at the stairs closely. Then he stood up and rubbed his chin as a sudden idea flashed through his mind.

"So," he muttered, "this is why Santiago dwells in a house that is directly back of the banker's. That was his box and he is the strange man who made the million-dollar deposit in Don Esteban's bank."

"So," he said quietly, "this is why Santiago lives in a house right behind the banker's. That was his place, and he’s the unusual guy who made the million-dollar deposit in Don Esteban's bank."

Then he stopped and pondered.

Then he paused and thought.

"But who stole the box? Not Santiago, for he has not left his room for days. If it was Strong, he must have entered the bank from some direction other than this. I don't understand, but I'm going to make some further investigation."

"But who took the box? Not Santiago, since he hasn’t left his room for days. If it was Strong, he must have entered the bank from another direction. I don’t get it, but I’m going to look into this further."

He reëntered his room, buckled on his automatic and took from his suit case—which, by the way, he [Pg 234] had located at the railway station along with that of his companions after the occupation of the city by the marines—his electric torch. Then he went out and descended the stairs, which he discovered were twenty-four in number.

He went back into his room, strapped on his gun, and retrieved his flashlight from his suitcase—which, by the way, he had found at the train station along with his friends' bags after the marines took over the city. Then he stepped outside and went down the stairs, noticing that there were twenty-four of them.

Reaching the bottom he found himself upon a landing some six or eight feet square, from the opposite side of which another flight of stairs ascended.

Reaching the bottom, he found himself on a landing about six or eight feet square, from which another flight of stairs went up on the opposite side.

"I reckon I better see where they lead to," was his comment as he slowly began their ascent.

"I guess I should see where they lead," he said as he slowly started to climb.

After going up eighteen stairs his head touched the floor above. He counted the remaining steps by the light of his torch and found that there were six more. This would make the floor over his head on an exact level with the floor of Santiago's house.

After climbing eighteen stairs, his head hit the ceiling above. He counted the remaining steps with the light from his flashlight and discovered there were six more. This meant the ceiling above him would be precisely level with the floor of Santiago's house.

"It's just as I expected," he muttered. "If I can get through this floor, I shall find myself in Don Esteban's residence—somewhere. But just where? That's the question."

"It's exactly what I thought," he murmured. "If I can get past this floor, I’ll end up in Don Esteban's place—somewhere. But where exactly? That’s the question."

He pushed upon the stone above his head, but it refused to move. Then he held up his torch and examined the ceiling carefully. Whatever the method by which the stones could be moved, it was carefully concealed.

He pushed against the stone above his head, but it wouldn’t budge. Then he raised his torch and closely inspected the ceiling. No matter how the stones could be moved, the method was well hidden.

Much chagrined, Billie at length decided to retrace his steps and await the coming of his companions. He reached the landing and crossed over to the steps by which he had descended.

Much annoyed, Billie finally decided to go back and wait for his friends. He reached the landing and walked over to the steps he had come down.

Glancing up, he uttered an exclamation of surprise,[Pg 235] for there at the opening and peering down the stairs was Ambrosio, the ape.

Glancing up, he exclaimed in surprise,[Pg 235] for there at the opening, looking down the stairs, was Ambrosio, the ape.

With a cry of recognition the simian started to descend the stairs, but at a noise from above he hesitated and then sprang back and out of sight.

With a shout of recognition, the monkey began to go down the stairs, but at a sound from above, he paused and then jumped back out of sight.

An instant later the opening was closed and Billie was left in the darkness, except for the light of his torch.

An instant later, the opening shut, and Billie was left in the dark, except for the light from his flashlight.


CHAPTER XXIX.

THE MYSTERY DEEPENS.

While Billie was making his discoveries Donald and Adrian had also been busy.

While Billie was making his discoveries, Donald and Adrian had also been hard at work.

When they left the house, at Donald's suggestion, they went first to the bank and told Don Esteban about the disappearance of the box and what the maid had seen. He was much disappointed until it was explained to him that they also had another clue.

When they left the house, at Donald's suggestion, they first went to the bank and told Don Esteban about the missing box and what the maid had seen. He was very disappointed until they explained that they also had another lead.

"We shall spend our time in the slums," said Donald, "while our chum keeps watch at the house. We feel sure that between us we shall solve the mystery."

"We're going to hang out in the slums," said Donald, "while our friend keeps an eye on the house. We're confident that together we'll figure out the mystery."

"I hope so," was Don Esteban's response. "Do you think I might be able to see this man Santiago?"

"I hope so," Don Esteban replied. "Do you think I could see this man Santiago?"

"I'm afraid not, sir! The doctor wants him to [Pg 236] sleep as long as he can. We will let you know later in the day."

"I'm sorry, sir! The doctor wants him to [Pg 236] sleep as much as possible. We'll update you later today."

Leaving Don Esteban, the boys started for the plaza, intending to play the part of sightseers and visit every place in which a mountebank might reasonably expect to go. They felt certain that Strong would keep away from the more aristocratic places.

Leaving Don Esteban, the boys headed for the plaza, planning to act like tourists and check out every spot where a con artist would likely show up. They were sure that Strong would avoid the more upscale places.

Keeping their eyes open and ever on the alert, they wandered about the streets and into many public places, but up to eleven o'clock had made no discovery. Then they entered a cantina for breakfast, purposely choosing one that was little frequented by Americans.

Keeping their eyes open and always on the lookout, they roamed the streets and explored various public spots, but by eleven o'clock, they hadn't found anything. Then they went into a café for breakfast, deliberately picking one that wasn't popular with Americans.

Seating themselves at a table in one corner where they could see without being seen, the boys ordered a hearty breakfast and then turned their attention to the others in the place.

Seating themselves at a table in one corner where they could see without being noticed, the boys ordered a big breakfast and then focused on the others in the place.

At the table nearest them were three men of ordinary appearance, busy with their meal. Beyond them was an American soldier, who seemed to have dropped in out of curiosity. He was paying very little attention to his meal, but was eyeing a young woman who was seated behind the cash counter.

At the table closest to them were three average-looking men, focused on their meal. Beyond them sat an American soldier, who appeared to have come in out of curiosity. He was hardly paying attention to his food, instead watching a young woman who was seated behind the cash register.

On the other side of the room, and partially hidden from our boys by the cash counter, was another man, smoking, and evidently waiting for some one. He kept his eye on the door and every once in a while glanced nervously at his watch.

On the other side of the room, partly blocked from our boys by the cash register, was another man, smoking and clearly waiting for someone. He kept an eye on the door and glanced nervously at his watch from time to time.

"Not much going on in here," said Donald in English.

"Not much happening in here," said Donald in English.

"No; but we are a little early. There may be[Pg 237] more in before we finish our breakfast."

"No; but we arrived a bit early. There might be[Pg 237] more people in before we finish our breakfast."

It was a true prediction, for within the next five minutes as many more persons entered and disposed themselves around the various tables. Then the boys' breakfast was served and for a few minutes they were more absorbed in the food than in the guests.

It was an accurate prediction, as in the next five minutes several more people came in and settled around the different tables. Then the boys' breakfast was served, and for a few minutes, they were more focused on the food than on the guests.

As Donald raised his eyes for a moment, however, he caught sight of a man talking to the one sitting back of the cash counter. They were evidently arguing about something in an undertone and a minute later the newcomer took a seat with his back to the boys.

As Donald looked up for a moment, he noticed a man talking to the person behind the cash register. They were clearly arguing about something quietly, and a minute later, the newcomer sat down with his back to the boys.

"Look!" was Donald's smothered exclamation, "over there by the cashier. Isn't that our man?"

"Look!" Donald exclaimed quietly, "over there by the cashier. Isn't that our guy?"

Adrian raised his eyes and gazed hard at the back of the man's head.

Adrian looked up and stared intensely at the back of the man's head.

"I could tell better if he would remove his hat. It does look like him, but he has disguised himself some way."

"I could tell better if he took off his hat. It does look like him, but he's disguised himself somehow."

"Sure," laughed Donald. "That's part of his trade; but I'm dead sure it is Strong."

"Sure," laughed Donald. "That's just part of his job; but I'm absolutely certain it is Strong."

"What had we better do?"

"What should we do?"

"I don't know. He'll recognize us the minute he sees us. If he is keeping away from us, he will leave. If he is not, he may come over and speak to us. There is no reason why he should not, so far as he knows."

"I don't know. He'll see us the moment he looks our way. If he’s trying to avoid us, he’ll walk away. If not, he might come over and talk to us. There's no reason he shouldn't, as far as he knows."

"How would it do to make ourselves visible?"

"How about we make ourselves visible?"

"I hardly know." Then after a pause: "I'll tell[Pg 238] you what. As soon as we finish we'll go out, as though we did not see him, but we will be sure to make enough commotion to attract his attention. Then we'll station ourselves where we can see him as he comes out."

"I barely know." After a pause, he continued: "Here’s the plan. As soon as we’re done, we’ll head out like we didn’t notice him, but we’ll make enough noise to get his attention. Then we’ll position ourselves where we can see him when he comes out."

"That's all right, Don; but suppose he doesn't come out?"

"That's fine, Don; but what if he doesn't come out?"

Donald scratched his head.

Donald scratched his head.

"Oh!" he exclaimed, "I knew I had a thought back of that. When he sees us, if he is not trying to avoid us, he will speak to us. If he does not speak to us, we will know there is something wrong and take immediate steps to have him arrested."

"Oh!" he exclaimed, "I knew there was something behind that. When he sees us, if he isn't trying to avoid us, he'll talk to us. If he doesn't talk to us, we'll know something's wrong and we’ll take action to have him arrested."

"But he may escape."

"But he might get away."

"How can he?"

"How is he able to?"

"I suppose he could go out through the kitchen if he had to," was the ready reply.

"I guess he could go out through the kitchen if he needed to," was the quick response.

"Yes, I suppose he could. We must do better than that."

"Yeah, I guess he could. We need to do better than that."

"I'll tell you," said Adrian. "I'll go over and speak to that soldier in English. If it is Strong, he will hear me and will involuntarily make some move. If he wants to make himself known, he will. If he does not do so, we will simply sit here till he goes out and then shadow him."

"I'll tell you," said Adrian. "I'll go over and talk to that soldier in English. If it's Strong, he'll hear me and probably react a bit. If he wants to reveal himself, he will. If he doesn’t, we’ll just sit here until he leaves and then follow him."

"That sounds good. Go over and say 'Howdy' to the soldier."

"That sounds great. Go over and say 'Hi' to the soldier."

Adrian arose from his seat and stepped over to the soldier.

Adrian got up from his seat and walked over to the soldier.

"Hello, partner!" was his somewhat noisy greeting.[Pg 239] "Won't you come over to our table?"

"Hey there, buddy!" was his somewhat loud greeting.[Pg 239] "Why don't you join us at our table?"

"Why, sure, neighbor! I was just thinking that I was getting mighty lonesome."

"Of course, neighbor! I was just thinking that I was feeling pretty lonely."

He arose from his chair and took a seat beside Donald, who had been observing Strong closely. There could be no doubt that he had been attracted by Adrian's voice, but he gave no intimation that he knew the boys.

He got up from his chair and sat next to Donald, who had been watching Strong intently. There was no doubt he had been drawn in by Adrian's voice, but he didn't show any sign that he knew the boys.

"Glad to see you," said Donald, without taking his eyes from his man. "Won't you have another cup of coffee?"

"Great to see you," Donald said, keeping his eyes on the man. "Would you like another cup of coffee?"

"Bet your life, neighbor!" Then as he lighted a fresh cigarette: "Smoke?"

"Bet your life, neighbor!" Then, as he lit up a new cigarette, he asked, "Want a smoke?"

"Never learned!" laughed Donald. "Seems mighty funny down here, doesn't it?"

"Never learned!" laughed Donald. "It feels pretty funny down here, doesn't it?"

"Sure does; but you're just as well off without it. Live here?"

"Sure does; but you're just as fine without it. Live here?"

"No," replied Adrian; "we were on our way home and got stuck!"

"No," replied Adrian; "we were headed home and got stuck!"

"What's the matter?" asked the soldier, with much concern. "Out of coin?"

"What's wrong?" asked the soldier, looking worried. "Short on cash?"

"We haven't much; but Gen. Funston has promised to find us passage home in a few days. Our friend saw him early this morning," this latter remark expressly for Strong's ears.

"We don't have much, but Gen. Funston promised to get us a ride home in a few days. Our friend saw him early this morning," this last comment was specifically for Strong to hear.

"If he told you he'd do it, he will," said the soldier. "You can bet on him every time."

"If he said he would do it, he will," the soldier said. "You can count on him every time."

It was very evident from Strong's actions that he was taking in every word of the conversation, [Pg 240] which was in English and in an unusually loud voice. He pretended to eat, then leaned over and said something to his companion, and a minute later arose from the table and hastily quitted the place.

It was clear from Strong's actions that he was absorbing every word of the conversation, [Pg 240] which was in English and unusually loud. He pretended to eat, then leaned over and said something to his companion, and a minute later got up from the table and quickly left the place.

But the boys were not to be fooled. They sprang from the table and hastily followed, Donald throwing a greenback to the cashier which more than doubly paid the bill.

But the boys weren't going to be tricked. They jumped up from the table and quickly followed, with Donald tossing a bill to the cashier that more than covered the bill.

Their sudden action did not escape the soldier, who, attributing it to another cause, also hastily quitted the cantina.

Their sudden move didn't go unnoticed by the soldier, who, thinking it was for a different reason, quickly left the bar.

As the boys emerged into the street, they saw Strong hastening away in the direction of the custom house.

As the boys stepped out onto the street, they noticed Strong quickly heading towards the customs house.

"Going to lose himself in the crowd," said Donald. "Don't let him get out of your sight."

"He's going to get lost in the crowd," said Donald. "Make sure you keep an eye on him."

"What's the matter?" asked the soldier, running to catch up with the boys. "Ugly greasers?"

"What's wrong?" the soldier asked as he hurried to catch up with the boys. "Are there ugly greasers?"

"No," replied Donald, "we're shadowing a man who is wanted by Gen. Funston. That's him," pointing; "keep your eye on him."

"No," Donald replied, "we're following a guy who's wanted by Gen. Funston. That's him," he said, pointing. "Stay alert."

"I thought you chaps had something on," laughed the soldier. "You can bet on me!"

"I thought you guys had something planned," laughed the soldier. "You can count on me!"

Now that they approached nearer the center of the business portion of the city, there were more people on the street; but they were so near their quarry that they easily kept him in sight. Only once had he glanced back, but that was enough to convince him that he was followed.

Now that they were getting closer to the heart of the city’s business district, there were more people on the street; but they were so close to their target that they could easily keep him in sight. He only glanced back once, but that was enough to make him realize he was being followed.

"He's headed for somewhere," said Adrian. "He[Pg 241] doesn't expect to get away from us simply by walking."

"He's going somewhere," said Adrian. "He[Pg 241] doesn't think he can escape us just by walking."

"Right," agreed Donald. "There he goes into the post office."

"Right," Donald agreed. "There he goes into the post office."

"Yes," from Adrian, "and it has two doors. You stop at the first one and I'll run to the other."

"Yeah," Adrian said, "and it has two doors. You stop at the first one and I'll run to the other."

He started on a run and the soldier followed suit.

He took off running, and the soldier did the same.

The sight of a man running and a soldier following, quickly attracted attention and pedestrians began to stop and see what the matter might be. In less than a minute a crowd had collected, among them several soldiers, who quickly brought Adrian to a halt.

The sight of a man running with a soldier chasing him quickly grabbed people's attention, and pedestrians started to stop and see what was going on. In less than a minute, a crowd had gathered, including several soldiers, who quickly stopped Adrian.

"What's the matter?" asked one. Then as the soldier came up: "What are you chasing him for?"

"What's wrong?" asked one. Then, as the soldier approached, he asked, "Why are you chasing him?"

"I'm not chasing him," laughed the seeming pursuer. "He and I are after another chap."

"I'm not chasing him," laughed the one who seemed to be pursuing. "He's and I are going after someone else."

The delay occasioned by this interference was not great, but it was sufficient to allow Strong to escape, had it not been for Donald. He had seen the crowd gathering and, realizing what would happen, ran around the other way, just in time to see Strong disappearing around the corner of the street on which the bank was located.

The delay caused by this interference wasn't significant, but it was enough to let Strong get away if it weren't for Donald. He had noticed the crowd forming and, understanding what was about to happen, ran around the other way, just in time to see Strong vanish around the corner of the street where the bank was situated.

Madly he dashed down the street and turned the corner in time to see Strong enter the big gate leading into the patio of Don Esteban's residence.

Madly, he ran down the street and turned the corner just in time to see Strong go through the big gate leading into the courtyard of Don Esteban's house.

Putting on more steam, a couple of minutes later [Pg 242] Donald also dashed into the patio; but Strong was nowhere to be seen.

Putting on more speed, a couple of minutes later [Pg 242] Donald also rushed into the patio, but Strong was nowhere to be found.

"He must be in the bank," muttered the boy, and he quickly entered the door.

"He must be in the bank," the boy muttered as he quickly walked through the door.

But Strong had disappeared as completely as though the earth had opened and swallowed him up.

But Strong had vanished as completely as if the earth had opened up and swallowed him whole.


CHAPTER XXX.

THE MYSTERY SOLVED.

When the opening at the head of the stairs had closed upon Billie and he realized that he was shut in a subterranean passage, for a minute his heart sank within him.

When the opening at the top of the stairs closed behind Billie and he realized he was trapped in an underground passage, his heart sank for a minute.

He had tried to find an opening at the top of the opposite stairs and had failed, and he did not know that he would have any better success in trying to find a way to open the place through which he had descended.

He had tried to find an opening at the top of the other stairs and had failed, and he didn’t know if he would have any better luck trying to find a way to open the spot he had come down through.

"Nobody on earth knows that I am down here," he thought, "and with Santiago sick and maybe dying, no one on earth probably knows that there is such a passage."

"Nobody on earth knows I'm down here," he thought, "and with Santiago sick and possibly dying, no one on earth probably knows there's a passage like this."

But Billie was not the lad to sit down and cry. He had been in tight places before and he had an abiding faith in his own ability to do things. Therefore, he called up his courage and slowly mounted the stairs leading to Santiago's patio.

But Billie wasn’t the type to sit down and cry. He had faced tough situations before and had a strong belief in his own ability to handle things. So, he gathered his courage and slowly climbed the stairs leading to Santiago's patio.

At the top of the stairs he found himself confronted[Pg 243] by exactly the same condition as he had found on the opposite side.

At the top of the stairs, he found himself facing[Pg 243] exactly the same situation as he had encountered on the other side.

"But there is this difference," muttered Billie. "I know that there must be some sort of a crack where that slab fell back."

"But there’s one thing that’s different," Billie muttered. "I know there has to be some kind of a gap where that slab fell back."

He held the electric bull's-eye close to the stone and scrutinized every spot.

He held the electric bull's-eye close to the stone and examined every spot closely.

Not a single crack could he spy.

Not a single crack could he see.

Then he took out his big jack-knife and prodded with it clear across the width of the stairway.

Then he pulled out his large jackknife and poked it across the full width of the stairs.

There was nothing but solid stone.

There was nothing but solid rock.

"Looks kind o' desperate," he told himself, "but I have simply got to find an opening."

"Looks kind of desperate," he thought, "but I really need to find an opportunity."

Again he prodded the place over without result.

Again he poked around the place without finding anything.

"It's no use," he finally said to himself. "If I am to get out of here, help will have to come from somewhere outside. But how can it?"

"It's no use," he finally said to himself. "If I'm going to get out of here, help has to come from somewhere outside. But how can that happen?"

He sat down on the stairs and thought deeply.

He sat down on the stairs and thought hard.

"If it is as I think," he mused, "these stairs have been used recently. The very fact that Ambrosio is prowling around here is proof that Strong must have been here at some time. But where is Strong?"

"If it's how I think," he wondered, "these stairs have been used recently. The fact that Ambrosio is wandering around here shows that Strong must have been here at some point. But where is Strong?"

He slid down several steps and threw the light of his torch across to the opposite stairs.

He slid down a few steps and shined his flashlight across to the stairs on the other side.

"Bang!" went something that sounded like a falling stone.

"Bang!" something that sounded like a falling stone made a noise.

Billie sprang to his feet.

Billie jumped to his feet.

"Click! Bang!" and down the opposite stairway[Pg 244] streamed a ray of light.

"Click! Bang!" and down the opposite stairway[Pg 244] flowed a beam of light.

Billie shut off his electric torch and waited.

Billie turned off his flashlight and waited.

Then on the steps there appeared a foot, then another, until a whole human body was in sight. Then "click, snap!" and the light disappeared.

Then a foot appeared on the steps, then another, until a whole person came into view. Then "click, snap!" and the light went out.

"By George!" exclaimed Billie under his breath, "there's a man on the stairs right opposite to me. Who on earth can it be?"

"Wow!" Billie muttered to himself, "there's a guy on the stairs directly across from me. Who could it possibly be?"

His first inclination was to turn on the light, but on second thought he decided not to.

His first instinct was to turn on the light, but after thinking it over, he chose not to.

"I'll let him set the copy," thought Billie. "It's a mighty good thing to be able to spring the surprise."

"I'll let him write the copy," Billie thought. "It's really great to be able to surprise him."

He drew his automatic and stood ready for any emergency.

He pulled out his gun and got ready for any situation that might come up.

It was still as a tomb.

It was as quiet as a tomb.

He could hear his own heart beat and he could also hear the heavy breathing of the other man.

He could hear his own heart pounding, and he could also hear the other man's heavy breathing.

"Sounds like he had been running and was just catching his breath," was Billie's mental comment.

"Sounds like he had been running and was just catching his breath," was Billie’s thought.

After some minutes the man's breathing became more quiet and Billie heard him slowly descending the stairs.

After a few minutes, the man's breathing became calmer and Billie heard him slowly going down the stairs.

"This won't do," thought Billie. "He probably has some kind of a light, and if he gets on the landing and I'm up here, I'll be like a man up a tree."

"This isn't gonna work," thought Billie. "He probably has some sort of light, and if he gets to the landing while I'm up here, I'll be like a guy stuck in a tree."

The lad sat down and slowly slid toward the bottom.

The guy sat down and gradually slid to the bottom.

Being only a few steps from the landing, Billie [Pg 245] was down first. He crowded to the right and listened.

Being just a few steps from the landing, Billie [Pg 245] was the first one down. He moved to the right and listened.

The other was now nearly on the landing. Now he was on the landing, hugging the wall on the side opposite Billie. Now they passed each other, or rather the man passed Billie, for Billie stood perfectly still.

The other was now almost at the landing. Now he was on the landing, pressing against the wall on the side opposite Billie. Now they passed each other, or rather the man passed Billie, since Billie remained perfectly still.

It seemed as though he must hear Billie's breathing, but if he heard anything he must have thought it his own echo, never dreaming that he was not alone in the passage.

It felt like he should hear Billie breathing, but if he heard anything, he probably thought it was just his own echo, never realizing he wasn’t alone in the hallway.

Now Billie could hear him ascending the stairs leading to Santiago's house, and his hope rose high.

Now Billie could hear him climbing the stairs to Santiago's house, and his hope soared.

"He must know how to open the floor," thought Billie. "I'll be right there when he does."

"He needs to know how to start the conversation," Billie thought. "I'll be right there when he does."

Silently as a cat Billie crept up the stairs behind his unknown companion.

Silently like a cat, Billie crept up the stairs behind his unknown companion.

Near the top the man stopped and a minute later he flashed an electric light against the stone overhead. Another minute and he heaved with the top of his head and the slab slid back.

Near the top, the man stopped, and a minute later he shone an electric light against the stone above. Another minute passed, and he pushed up with his head, causing the slab to slide back.

"And now," exclaimed Billie in a deep voice, "put your hands over your head!"

"And now," shouted Billie in a deep voice, "put your hands over your head!"

Whether from fear or from the unparalleled surprise caused by hearing a human voice at such a time and in such a place, instead of obeying Billie's command, Strong's hands—for Strong it was—fell limp at his side and his electric torch fell to the stones beneath his feet.

Whether from fear or from the shock of hearing a human voice at such a time and place, instead of following Billie's command, Strong's hands—for it was Strong—went limp at his side and his flashlight dropped to the ground beneath his feet.

"All right," continued Billy, "if that's the way[Pg 246] you feel about it; but just remember that a single false move and I'll cut this automatic loose among your ribs. Now climb out a step at a time."

"Okay," Billy went on, "if that’s how you feel about it; but just remember that one wrong move and I’ll let this gun loose on you. Now, get out one step at a time."

With face as white as marble at the shock he had just sustained, Strong obeyed implicitly and Billie was soon standing on the stone patio, looking Strong in the face.

With a face as white as marble from the shock he had just experienced, Strong followed orders without question, and Billie was soon standing on the stone patio, looking Strong in the eye.

"You're a good one, you are," he said sarcastically. "I should think you'd be ashamed to call yourself an American."

"You're really something, aren't you?" he said sarcastically. "I would think you'd be embarrassed to call yourself an American."

"What do you mean?" asked Strong in a trembling voice.

"What do you mean?" asked Strong in a shaky voice.

"Why, first of all, stealing from the bank, and then selling your own countrymen to the Mexicans."

"Why, first of all, robbing the bank, and then selling your own fellow citizens to the Mexicans."

"Who have I sold?"

"Who have I sold to?"

"Do you mean to say that you didn't sell Gen. Funston to the greasers for ten thousand dollars?"

"Are you saying you didn't sell Gen. Funston to the greasers for ten thousand dollars?"

"Of course I do!" in a somewhat stronger voice.

"Of course I do!" she said, a bit more firmly.

"Perhaps you'll deny that you are Strong, the mountebank. You don't think for one minute that I don't know you in spite of your make-up, do you?"

"Maybe you'll deny that you're Strong, the con artist. You don't really think for a second that I don't see through your disguise, do you?"

"No, I'll admit that I'm the mountebank. As for my name that is of small importance in a country like this. But I did not sell Gen. Funston, as you put it. I knew the man I pointed out was not Funston and I knew that as soon as the Mexicans found it out they would let him go. Some one [Pg 247] might have told them rightly. As it was I spoiled their game and I got the money. Do you think it any crime to do that?"

"No, I’ll admit I’m the con artist. My name doesn’t really matter in a place like this. But I didn’t sell Gen. Funston, as you say. I knew the guy I pointed out wasn’t Funston, and I knew that as soon as the Mexicans figured it out, they’d let him go. Someone [Pg 247] might have given them the correct info. Instead, I messed up their plan and got the money. Do you think that’s a crime?"

"That's a matter I am not in a position to discuss," was Billie's answer. "But how about robbing the bank?"

"That's something I can't talk about," Billie replied. "But what do you think about robbing the bank?"

"I had as much right to the box as any one."

"I had just as much right to the box as anyone else."

"You'll have to prove that to some one besides me; all I can do is to turn you over to the authorities."

"You'll need to show that to someone other than me; all I can do is report you to the authorities."

"Never!" cried Strong. "I'll die before I'll rot in a Mexican jail!"

"Never!" shouted Strong. "I'd rather die than rot in a Mexican jail!"

He uttered a peculiar noise and before Billie could imagine what it meant, he felt himself seized from behind by a pair of hairy hands.

He made a weird sound, and before Billie could even think about what it meant, he felt himself grabbed from behind by a pair of hairy hands.

He had been in that clutch once before and recognized in an instant that he was in the grip of the ape.

He had been in that situation once before and realized instantly that he was in the grip of the beast.

He gave one loud cry for help and then turned loose with his automatic.

He let out a loud scream for help and then opened fire with his gun.

The tumult which followed is beyond description. Billie's shout was as nothing compared to the cry of the ape as one of the bullets struck him in the leg and another pierced his foot. Loosing his hold upon the lad, he grabbed for the weapon, but Billie managed to evade him and would undoubtedly have slain the animal had not Strong sprung to his assistance, with the result that in another minute Billie was disarmed.

The chaos that followed is hard to describe. Billie's shout was nothing compared to the ape's scream when one of the bullets hit its leg and another went through its foot. Losing his grip on the boy, the ape reached for the weapon, but Billie dodged him and would have definitely killed the animal if Strong hadn't rushed to help him. As a result, Billie was disarmed in less than a minute.

Ill would the lad have fared then, at the hands [Pg 248] of his two assailants, had not the noise attracted to the scene several soldiers, while an instant later came a loud shout as Donald and Adrian dashed into the patio.

The boy would have been in trouble then, at the hands [Pg 248] of his two attackers, if the noise hadn't drawn several soldiers to the scene, and just a moment later, a loud shout erupted as Donald and Adrian ran into the patio.

On the other side of the square they had heard Billie's shout, followed by the automatic, and had rushed to his aid.

On the other side of the square, they heard Billie’s shout, followed by the gunfire, and rushed to help him.

In another minute both Strong and his hairy friend were overcome and securely bound.

In just a minute, both Strong and his hairy friend were subdued and tightly restrained.

"Where did you find him?" asked Donald, pointing to Strong.

"Where did you find him?" Donald asked, pointing at Strong.

"Down there," was Billie's reply, as he pointed toward the still open underground passage way.

"Down there," Billie replied, pointing toward the still-open underground passage.

"How did he get there?"

"How did he arrive there?"

"I suppose he entered from a similar entrance in Don Esteban's patio. I have had an idea all the time that there was some reason for the position of these two houses."

"I think he came in through a similar entrance in Don Esteban's courtyard. I've had a feeling all along that there was a reason for the way these two houses are situated."

"But it doesn't lead into the bank. How could he steal the box out of the vault?"

"But it doesn’t go into the bank. How could he steal the box from the vault?"

"There is the real thief!" exclaimed Billie, pointing to the ape. "He sneaked in while Strong kept the bank employés engaged. By some mistake in his understanding he put the envelope back in the bank the next day instead of putting back the box. It was he who crawled through the bars into Santiago's library. He was also the devil who scared the maid almost into fits."

"There’s the real thief!" Billie shouted, pointing at the ape. "He snuck in while Strong kept the bank employees busy. Because of some misunderstanding, he put the envelope back in the bank the next day instead of returning the box. It was him who crawled through the bars into Santiago's library. He was also the jerk who nearly scared the maid to death."

"Well! Well!" exclaimed a voice from the gateway. "I never could have believed it."

"Well! Well!" shouted a voice from the entrance. "I never would have believed it."

The voice was that of Don Esteban, who had[Pg 249] entered while Billie was speaking.

The voice belonged to Don Esteban, who had[Pg 249] entered while Billie was talking.

"I have come to see this strange man, Santiago Ojeda," he explained. "What says the doctor?"

"I've come to see this strange guy, Santiago Ojeda," he explained. "What did the doctor say?"

"Here comes the doctor now," announced Adrian as the physician made his appearance in the gateway. "He can speak for himself."

"Here comes the doctor now," Adrian announced as the doctor appeared in the doorway. "He can speak for himself."


CHAPTER XXXI.

THE TREASURE OF MONTEZUMA.

The shadows of evening had fallen and a cool breeze was blowing in off the Gulf of Mexico when a group of persons, among whom were the Broncho Rider Boys, gathered around the bedside of the sick man.

The evening shadows had settled in, and a cool breeze was coming in off the Gulf of Mexico when a group of people, including the Broncho Rider Boys, gathered around the sick man's bedside.

It was as the physician had predicted, and when Santiago had awakened after his long sleep, he had regained his senses, although he was very weak. But as the day declined and the heat lessened he had become stronger, and now at his own request, Lucia and her friends drew around to listen to his tale.

It was just as the doctor had predicted, and when Santiago woke up from his long sleep, he had regained his senses, even though he was very weak. But as the day went on and the heat cooled down, he got stronger, and now, at his own request, Lucia and her friends gathered around to hear his story.

At one side of the bed stood Lucia, the three boys and Don Esteban. At the other stood Mr. Black, Josie and the physician, while at the foot of the bed was Strong, with Ambrosio in his arms, and a [Pg 250] couple of soldiers who had the mountebank in custody.

At one side of the bed were Lucia, the three boys, and Don Esteban. On the other side were Mr. Black, Josie, and the doctor, while at the foot of the bed stood Strong, holding Ambrosio in his arms, along with a couple of soldiers who had the con artist in custody.

"As my daughter knows," began Santiago in a feeble voice, "I am a direct descendant of the great Montezuma. My ancestor was the guardian of the treasure which had been accumulated by the Aztec kings for years. After the overthrow of my race by the Spanish conquerors, there was given to my first great ancestor the keeping of the secret of the source of the gold which had made the city of Anahuac such a rich prize.

"As my daughter knows," began Santiago in a weak voice, "I am a direct descendant of the great Montezuma. My ancestor was the guardian of the treasure that had been collected by the Aztec kings over the years. After my people's downfall at the hands of the Spanish conquerors, my first great ancestor was entrusted with the secret of the source of the gold that made the city of Anahuac such a valuable prize."

"This secret has been handed down through all these generations, the one object being to use this knowledge in freeing Mexico from the Spanish yoke. This secret I, as the last of my race, possess."

"This secret has been passed down through all these generations, with the goal of using this knowledge to free Mexico from Spanish rule. I hold this secret as the last of my lineage."

The aged man paused, his strength being hardly able to the task he had set himself.

The old man paused, his strength barely up to the task he had set for himself.

"It is much as I suspected," whispered Don Esteban to Donald, while Lucia bent over and smoothed the brow of the sick man.

"It’s exactly what I thought," Don Esteban whispered to Donald, while Lucia leaned over and smoothed the sick man's forehead.

"A few years ago," Santiago finally continued, "I began to see an opportunity for the people to assert their rights. In our good Señor Madero I saw the one who should lead the common people out of their bondage. I went to him and offered him all the wealth at my command. He accepted the trust and we began our work. It was at that time that I placed the money with Don Esteban. Also the box, containing the secret of the mine, of[Pg 251] which only I and Madero knew.

"A few years ago," Santiago finally continued, "I started to see a chance for people to claim their rights. In our good Senhor Madero, I saw the one who should lead the common people out of their oppression. I approached him and offered all the resources I had. He accepted the responsibility, and we began our efforts. It was then that I entrusted the money to Don Esteban. Also, the box containing the secret of the mine, of[Pg 251] which only Madero and I were aware."

"You all know what has happened since that time. Madero won, but he was betrayed. His betrayer now seeks to rule the republic, but he can never do it. He must be overthrown."

"You all know what happened since then. Madero won, but he got betrayed. His betrayer now wants to lead the country, but that will never happen. He has to be taken down."

The aged man became greatly excited and the physician cautioned him to be careful. In a few minutes he became more peaceful and continued:

The old man got really excited, and the doctor warned him to take it easy. After a few minutes, he relaxed a bit more and went on:

"I have always been a great friend of the Americans. I admired their integrity and their government. I spent many years of my youth in the United States. I have known many of their great men. I was sure they would be pleased with Madero, and they were. But after he was betrayed, then I began to fear them, as I was told that the usurper, Huerta, had been helped by them."

"I have always been a strong supporter of the Americans. I respected their integrity and their government. I spent many years of my youth in the United States. I have known many of their great leaders. I was confident they would appreciate Madero, and they did. But after he was betrayed, I began to fear them, as I heard that the usurper, Huerta, had received their support."

"Who told you that?" asked Billie, almost without thinking.

"Who told you that?" Billie asked, almost without thinking.

"That man there," and Santiago pointed with his long bony finger at the mountebank, Strong. "That man, Francisco Rodriguez, who claims to be an American, but who is a traitor to his country. He fed me with lies, as I now know, and he wormed out of me the secret of Montezuma's Mine."

"That guy over there," Santiago said, pointing with his long, bony finger at the swindler, Strong. "That guy, Francisco Rodriguez, who says he's American, but he's a traitor to his country. He filled my head with lies, as I now realize, and he got me to spill the secret of Montezuma's Mine."

Again the aged man's excitement nearly overcame him, but again he rallied with an almost superhuman effort.

Again, the elderly man’s excitement almost got the better of him, but once more, he gathered himself with an almost superhuman effort.

"It was because of his lies that I made him my [Pg 252] trusted agent; but he betrayed me as he has others. It was to him I gave the ten thousand pounds which the young señor took away from my servant, Pablo Ojeda—who is not an Ojeda, but whom I have allowed to use that name. I desire that the money become the property of the young señor," and he feebly extended his hand toward Billie, "who has always been such a good friend to me and mine. The secret of the mine is to be found in the box which I left with Don Esteban. I am getting to be an old man, and if you will now bring in the box, I will turn it over to my daughter Lucia, who is my only descendant."

"It was because of his lies that I made him my [Pg 252] trusted agent; but he betrayed me just like he has betrayed others. I gave him the ten thousand pounds that the young señor took from my servant, Pablo Ojeda—who isn’t really an Ojeda, but I’ve let him use that name. I want the money to belong to the young señor," and he weakly gestured toward Billie, "who has always been such a good friend to me and my family. The secret of the mine is in the box I left with Don Esteban. I’m getting old, and if you could bring in the box now, I will give it to my daughter Lucia, who is my only child."

Don Esteban made no move to comply with the request, but looked at the boys in such a perplexed manner that the sick man was quick to take notice.

Don Esteban didn’t make any effort to fulfill the request, but he looked at the boys in such a confused way that the sick man quickly took notice.

"What is it?" he asked, rising on his elbow and looking at Don Esteban with burning gaze. "What is it? Has anything happened to the box?"

"What is it?" he asked, propping himself up on his elbow and looking at Don Esteban with an intense stare. "What is it? Has something happened to the box?"

"Yes," faltered the banker, "it has been stolen."

"Yeah," the banker hesitated, "it's been stolen."

"Stolen!" almost shrieked Santiago. "Stolen! Then there stands the thief!" and he pointed to Strong, who stood with blanched face.

"Stolen!" Santiago almost screamed. "Stolen! There’s the thief!" and he pointed to Strong, who stood there with a pale face.

"We know that," said Billie, "but the box has been stolen again and no one knows where it has gone."

"We know that," Billie said, "but the box has been stolen again and no one knows where it went."

"You are wrong," muttered Strong. "It has not been stolen. It is in the bank where it always was."

"You’re wrong," Strong muttered. "It hasn’t been stolen. It’s in the bank where it’s always been."

"Impossible!" cried Don Esteban. "How could it be back in the vault?"

"Impossible!" shouted Don Esteban. "How could it be back in the vault?"

"Ask Ambrosio," replied Strong, with a wan[Pg 253] smile. "He can tell."

"Ask Ambrosio," replied Strong, with a faint[Pg 253] smile. "He can tell."

"Of course he cannot tell," almost shouted Don Esteban.

"Of course he can't tell," Don Esteban almost shouted.

"Then we shall never know; but I am sure the box is there."

"Then we'll never know; but I'm sure the box is there."

"Send for it! Send for it!" cried Santiago. "Send for it at once that I may turn over to my daughter the secret of the mine."

"Have it brought here! Have it brought here!" shouted Santiago. "Get it here right away so I can hand over the secret of the mine to my daughter."

"That you will never be able to do," said Strong. "It has been destroyed."

"You're never going to be able to do that," said Strong. "It's been destroyed."

"Destroyed!" burst from almost every lip. "Destroyed? How?"

"Destroyed!" came from nearly everyone. "Destroyed? How?"

Strong shook his head.

Strong shook his head.

"I can't tell. Again you'll have to ask Ambrosio. It is he who destroyed it."

"I can't say. You'll need to ask Ambrosio again. He's the one who ruined it."

"By George!" exclaimed Billie, "I knew I ought to have killed that monk the first time I had any dealings with him. I'm sorry now that I didn't."

"By George!" Billie exclaimed, "I knew I should have killed that monk the first time I dealt with him. I regret not doing it now."

"At any rate," declared Don Esteban, "I shall send for the box."

"Anyway," Don Esteban said, "I’ll get the box."

He turned to Santiago, who had fallen back upon his pillow, and over whom the physician was bending and feeling his pulse.

He turned to Santiago, who had fallen back on his pillow, while the doctor hovered over him, checking his pulse.

"I shall send for it at once," he repeated.

"I'll get it right away," he repeated.

Slowly the physician raised his head and loosed his hold upon the sick man's wrist.

Slowly, the doctor lifted his head and released his grip on the sick man's wrist.

"It is too late," he said. "He will not need it. He is dead."

"It’s too late," he said. "He won’t need it. He’s dead."


On board a returning army transport bound for[Pg 254] New York stood the Broncho Rider Boys casting their last glance shoreward as the sun was setting behind the mountains that form the background of the city of Vera Cruz. Over the city still waved the Stars and Stripes, and as the darkness fell and the tip of Mt. Orizaba gradually faded from sight, Billie turned to the others and in a voice tinged with sadness remarked:

On a returning army transport headed for[Pg 254] New York, the Broncho Rider Boys took one last look at the shore as the sun set behind the mountains that create the backdrop for the city of Vera Cruz. The Stars and Stripes still flew over the city, and as darkness settled in and Mt. Orizaba slowly disappeared from view, Billie turned to the others and said, with a hint of sadness:

"There's only one thing about the whole country that I admire."

"There's only one thing about the entire country that I admire."

"What's, that?" asked Adrian. "Lucia?"

"What's that?" asked Adrian. "Lucia?"

"No; it's the wholesome respect the Mexicans show for Brigadier-General Funston."

"No; it's the genuine respect the Mexicans have for Brigadier-General Funston."

"Yes, and if he is let alone, he'll make them respect the American flag," echoed Donald.

"Yeah, and if he's left alone, he'll get them to respect the American flag," echoed Donald.

"Long may it wave!" was Adrian's sententious comment.

"Long may it wave!" was Adrian's wise comment.

But it did not wave long over Vera Cruz, for the following November, Huerta having been obliged to leave the country in the meantime and Gen. Carranza having established himself for the time being in the City of Mexico, the American forces were withdrawn and the Carranza forces took possession of Vera Cruz. Some months later Carranza was recognized by the United States, and at this writing is establishing his government, which promises to be a continuation of the one established by Madero.

But it didn’t stay up long over Vera Cruz, because the following November, Huerta had to leave the country in the meantime and General Carranza had set up in Mexico City. The American forces were withdrawn, and the Carranza forces took control of Vera Cruz. A few months later, Carranza was recognized by the United States, and as of now, he is forming his government, which looks like it will continue the one set up by Madero.

Thus it will be seen that Santiago's work for [Pg 255] his country was productive of good, as are all efforts to bring liberty to the people and to free them from the rule of a few.

Thus it will be seen that Santiago's work for [Pg 255] his country was beneficial, just like all efforts to bring freedom to the people and to liberate them from the control of a few.

Before sailing for home, the boys had the satisfaction of knowing that the man known as Strong had been properly punished, and that, in accordance with Santiago's dying wish, the ten thousand pounds which he had practically given to Billie months before on the Rio Grande, were placed to the lad's credit in the banking house of Don Esteban.

Before heading home, the boys felt satisfied knowing that the man called Strong had been properly punished, and that, in line with Santiago's dying wish, the ten thousand pounds he had essentially given to Billie months earlier on the Rio Grande were deposited in the banking house of Don Esteban for the boy's benefit.

The fate of Ambrosio, the ape which caused so much trouble, was left in the hands of the keeper of the prison to which Strong was sentenced. It is to be hoped that his behavior will improve.

The fate of Ambrosio, the ape that caused so much trouble, was left in the hands of the prison keeper where Strong was sentenced. Hopefully, his behavior will get better.

THE END.


TRANSCRIBER'S NOTES

Front matter: Added table of contents.

Front matter: Added table of contents.

Page 48: Removed extra quotation mark.

Page 48: Removed extra quotation mark.

Page 60: Changed "moso" to "mozo."

Page 60: Changed "moso" to "mozo."

Page 62: Changed typo "gaurd" to "guard."

Page 62: Changed typo "guard" to "guard."

Page 87: Changed typo "variey" to "variety."

Page 87: Changed typo "variey" to "variety."

Pages 123, 132: Left words "blue-jackets" and "bluejackets" as printed.

Pages 123, 132: Keep the words "blue-jackets" and "bluejackets" as they are printed.

Page 140: Added closing quotation mark.

Page 140: Added closing quotation mark.

Page 197: Added missing period.

Page 197: Added missing period.

Pages 206, 214, 224: Left words "kipnaped" and "kipnapped" as printed.

Pages 206, 214, 224: Left words "kipnaped" and "kipnapped" as printed.




        
        
    
Download ePUB

If you like this ebook, consider a donation!